DeviceNet Slaves OPERATION MANUAL C200HW-DRT21 CQM1-DRT21

DeviceNet Slaves OPERATION MANUAL C200HW-DRT21 CQM1-DRT21
Cat. No. W347-E1-06
C200HW-DRT21
CQM1-DRT21
DRT1 Series
DeviceNet Slaves
OPERATION MANUAL
C200HW-DRT21
CQM1-DRT21
DRT1 Series
DeviceNet Slaves
Operation Manual
Revised September 2003
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
Trademarks and Copyrights
COMBICON is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.
PowerTap is a registered trademark of the Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
 OMRON, 1998
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
5
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
6
EC Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
7
DeviceNet Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Overview of DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
SECTION 2
Example System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2-1
Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2-2
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-4
Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
2-5
Checking Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
SECTION 3
Common Slave Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
3-1
Common Slave Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
SECTION 4
General-purpose Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
4-1
Common Specifications for General-purpose Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
4-6
Remote Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
4-7
Sensor Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
4-8
Analog I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-9
Temperature Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
4-10 CQM1 I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Environment-resistive and Waterproof Slaves . . . . . . . . . . 175
5-1
Environment-resistive Slave Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
5-2
Connecting Communications Cables to Environment-resistive Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
5-5
B7AC Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
SECTION 6
Special I/O Slave Units Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6-1
C200H I/O Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
6-2
RS-232C Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
SECTION 7
Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
7-2
Message Communications Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8-1
Indicators and Error Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
8-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
8-3
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
Appendices
A
Node Address Settings Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
321
B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
D
Precautions when Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the DeviceNet Slave Units and includes the
sections described below. Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the DeviceNet Slave Units. Be sure to read the
precautions provided in the first section.
The following manuals are also cover information related to DeviceNet applications. Use the DeviceNet
Operation Manual together with other required manuals.
Manual
DeviceNet
Operation Manual
Contents
Cat. No.
DeviceNet Masters
Operation Manual
CS1 Series DeviceNet Unit
Operation Manual
Describes the configuration and construction of a DeviceNet network, W267
including installation procedures and specifications for cables, connectors, and other connection devices, as well as information on the communications power supply.
Describes the models, specifications, functions, and application meth- W379
ods of C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, and CV-series DeviceNet Master Units.
Describes the models, specifications, functions, and application meth- W380
ods of the CS1-series DeviceNet Unit.
DeviceNet Slaves Operation
Manual (this manual)
Describes the models, specifications, functions, and application methods of DeviceNet Slaves.
DeviceNet Configurator
Operation Manual (Ver. 2)
Describes the operation of the DeviceNet Configurator to allocate
W382
remote I/O areas according to application needs, as well as procedures
to set up a DeviceNet network with more than one master.
DeviceNet MULTIPLE I/O
Describes the models, specifications, functions, and application methTERMINAL Operation Manual ods of the DeviceNet MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs.
W347
W348
Precautions provides precautions for the correct and safe application of the products.
Section 1 provides an overview of the DeviceNet Network, including features, specifications, and the
system configurations.
Section 2 provides information on hardware aspects of Masters and Slaves connected to a DeviceNet
Network to ensure the proper operation of the system. Included are system configuration examples,
basic procedures for wiring, mounting and setting Master and Slave Units, connecting cables and
power supplies, creating I/O tables, and creating and registering scan lists
Section 3 provides specifications that are common to all Slaves.
Section 4 provides specifications and describes the components, indicators, switch settings, and other
aspects of General-purpose Slaves.
Section 5 provides specifications and describes the components, indicators, switch settings, and other
aspects of Environment-resistive Slaves.
Section 6 provides specifications for the C200H I/O Link Unit and the RS-232C Unit.
Section 7 describes the time required for a complete communications cycle, for an output response to
be made to an input, to start the system, and to send a message.
Section 8 describes error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep the DeviceNet Network operating properly. We recommend reading through the
error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected
more quickly.
The Appendices provide information on using masters from other companies, node address settings,
Slave device protocols necessary for multi-vendor applications, standard models, device current consumptions and connecting 2-wire DC Sensors.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PLC) Systems and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of PLC Systems. You
must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PLC
System.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiv
xv
xi
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON
PLC Systems. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC System and all PLC Units be used for the
specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with
your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the abovementioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.
!WARNING Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may
result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
Do not operate the control system in the following places.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
xii
5
Application Precautions
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems
in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using a PLC System.
!WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to
protect against electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC System before attempting
any of the following. Performing any of the following with the power supply
turned on may lead to electrical shock:
• Mounting or removing any Units (e.g., Power Supply Units, I/O Units,
CPU Unit, etc.) or memory cassettes.
• Assembling any devices or racks.
• Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC System or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed these
precautions.
• Use the Units only with the power supplies and voltages specified in the
operation manuals. Other power supplies and voltages may damage the
Units.
• Take measures to stabilize the power supply to conform to the rated supply if it is not stable.
• Provide circuit breakers and other safety measures to provide protection
against shorts in external wiring.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to Input Units.
The Input Units may be destroyed.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Output Units. The Output Units may be destroyed.
• Always disconnect the LG terminal when performing withstand voltage
tests.
xiii
6
EC Directives
• Install all Units according to instructions in the operation manuals.
Improper installation may cause faulty operation.
• Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.
• Locations near to power supply lines.
• Be sure to tighten Backplane screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws securely.
• Do not attempt to take any Units apart, to repair any Units, or to modify
any Units in any way.
!Caution The following precautions are necessary to ensure the general safety of the
system. Always heed these precautions.
• Provide double safety mechanisms to handle incorrect signals that can be
generated by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions.
• Provide external interlock circuits, limit circuits, and other safety circuits in
addition to any provided within the PLC System to ensure safety.
• Always follow electrical specifications for terminal polarity, communications path wiring, power supply wiring, and I/O jumpers. Incorrect wiring
can cause failures.
• Although the Environment-resistive Slaves have IP66 or IP67 degree of
protection, do not use them in applications where the Slave is always submerged in water.
6
EC Directives
DeviceNet products conform to EMS and low-voltage level directives as follows:
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards, so that they can more easily be built in to other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards. Whether they conform to the standards in the system used
by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Low-voltage Level Directives
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the necessary safety standard for the PLC (EN61131-2).
DeviceNet products that comply with EC Directives must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
xiv
1. DeviceNet Units are designed for installation inside control panels. All DeviceNet Units must be installed within control panels.
7
DeviceNet Manuals
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies
used for the communications power supply, internal circuit power supply,
and the I/O power supplies.
3. DeviceNet products that comply with EC Directives also conform to the
Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
4. DeviceNet products that comply with EC Directives have configurations
with less than 30 m of I/O wiring, and less than 10 m of power supply wiring.
The following examples shows how to reduce noise.
1,2,3...
1. Noise from the communications cable can be reduced by installing a ferrite
core on the communications cable within 10 cm of the DeviceNet Master
Unit.
Ferrite Core (Data Line Filter): LF130B (manufactured by Easy Magnet Co.)
Impedance specifications
25 MHz:
105
100 MHz: 190
30 mm
13 mm
32 mm
31.5 mm
2. Wire the control panel with as thick and short cables as possible and
ground to 100 Ω min.
3. Keep DeviceNet communications cables as short as possible and ground
to 100 Ω min.
7
DeviceNet Manuals
The following manuals are available for information relating to DeviceNet. Be
sure to thoroughly read and understand the applicable manuals before installing or operating DeviceNet devices and make sure that you are using the
most recent version of the manual.
DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267)
Describes the functions and applications of DeviceNet including available
Master Units, their specifications, functions, operating procedures, and applications. Always read this manual thoroughly before installing or operating
DeviceNet devices.
DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual (W347)
Describes available Slave Units, their specifications, functions, operating procedures, and applications. This manual has been separately produced in
response to the increase in Slave Unit models since the production of the
DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267). Use this manual in conjunction with the
DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
xv
DeviceNet Manuals
7
DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual (W328)
Describes the operating procedures of the DeviceNet Configurator, which is
used to freely allocate remote I/O areas, and allows multiple Master Units to
be mounted to one PLC or connected to one DeviceNet Network to perform
independent remote I/O communications. Refer to this manual when operating a DeviceNet Network with a DeviceNet Configurator.
MULTIPLE I/O TERMINAL Operation Manual (W348)
Describes available MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs, their specifications, functions, operating procedures, and applications. This manual has been separately produced in response to the increase in MULTIPLE I/O TERMINAL
models since the production of the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267). Use
this manual in conjunction with the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
xvi
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides an overview of the DeviceNet Network, including features, specifications, and the system
configurations.
1-1
Overview of DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
DeviceNet Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-1-3
Slave Mounting and Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a multi-bit, multi-vendor network that combines controls and data
on a machine/line-control level and that conforms to the DeviceNet open field
network specifications. DeviceNet has the following features.
1-1-1
DeviceNet Features
Multi-vendor Network
The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification,
which means that devices (Masters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network. A wide range of field-level applications can thus be supported by combining valve devices, sensors, and
other devices.
OMRON Master Unit
Master from other company
DeviceNet Network
OMRON
Configurator
OMRON Slaves
Simultaneous Remote I/O
and Message Services
Slave from
other company
Remote I/O communications to constantly exchange I/O data between the
PLC and Slaves can be executed simultaneously with message communications, to send/receive Master Unit data as required by the application. A
DeviceNet Network can thus be installed to flexibly handle applications that
require both bit data and message data. Message communications can be
achieved either by using OMRON’s FINS commands or by using explicit
DeviceNet messages.
OMRON Master Unit
OMRON Master Unit
Message communications
DeviceNet Network
Slaves
Remote I/O communications
2
OMRON
Configurator
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Connect Multiple PLCs to
the Same Network
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable connection of more
than one Master to the Network, allowing message communications between
PLCs and between multiple groups of PLCs and Slaves. This allows the
DeviceNet Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while reducing wiring.
OMRON Master Unit
OMRON Master Unit
OMRON Master Unit
Message
communications
Message
communications
DeviceNet Network
OMRON
Configurator
Slaves
Slaves
Remote I/O communications
Multiple Master Units
Handle Multi-point Control
and Line Expansions
Remote I/O communications
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable mounting more than
one Master Unit to a single PLC, allowing control of many more points. This
feature can easily handle line expansions and other applications.
OMRON Master Units
Slaves
Slaves
Slave
Slave
OMRON
Configurator
OMRON
Configurator
3
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Free Remote I/O
Allocation
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable flexible allocation of I/
O, i.e., in any area and in any order. This allows I/O allocations that suit the
application to simplify programming and enable effective usage of PLC memory areas.
OMRON Master Unit
Output Area
Node 01
Node 03
Node 00
Node
00
Handle Slaves with
Different Response
Speeds
Node
01
Node
02
Input Area
Node 04
Node 02
Node
03
Node
04
OMRON
Configurator
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to set the communications cycle
time, enabling usage of Slaves with slow response times.
OMRON Master Unit
Set the communications cycle time.
Remote I/O communications at a set interval
OMRON
Configurator
Easily Expand or Change
Lines with Various
Connection Methods
Use a multi-drop trunk line, T-branch multi-drop lines, or daisy-chain drop
lines. All three connection methods can be combined to flexibly construct a
network that meets the needs of the application.
Multi-drop trunk line
T-branch multi-drop line
Drop line
4
Trunk line
Daisy-chain
drop line
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Overall System Configuration
DeviceNet
Configurator
(computer)
DeviceNet Master Unit
CV Series: CVM1-DRM21-V1
CS Series: CS1W-DRM21
C200HX/HG/HE/HS:
Photoelectric sensors,
C200HW-DRM21-V1
proximity sensors, limit
switches, etc.
Photoelectric sensors,
proximity sensors, limit
switches, etc.
Input
Terminal
I/O Link
Unit
CQM1
: T-branch Taps or multidrop connections
Input Remote
Adapter (used
with Input Block)
Sensor
Terminal
Output Remote
Adapter (used
with Output Block)
Output
Terminal
Solenoids,
valves, etc.
Solenoids,
valves, etc.
Photoelectric sensors
or proximity sensors
with connectors
DeviceNet
Master Unit
Environmentresistant Terminal (inputs,outputs, or mixed
I/O)
Photoelectric
Solenoids,
sensors, proximity valves, etc.
sensors, limit
switches, etc.
C200H I/O
Link Unit
Note A DeviceNet Configurator
is required if multiple Master
Units are to be connected to
one network.
Analog Output
Terminal
Analog Input
Terminal
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA,
etc.
Temperature
Input Terminal
RS-232C
Unit
Inputs Outputs Outputs Inputs
Solenoids,
valves,
etc.
Thermocouple, temperature-resistance
thermometer
Bar code reader, etc.
MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs
Master Features
Master Units
Support remote I/O communications between OMRON PLCs (CS Series, CV
Series or C200HX/HG/HE/HS) and Slaves.
Support message communications between OMRON PLCs, or between an
OMRON PLC and Slaves and Masters from other companies.
VME Master Boards
Support remote I/O communications between a VME System and Slaves.
Open Network Controllers
Support easy connection to an information system via Ethernet.
Configurator Features
•
•
•
•
Enables free (user-set) allocations to remote I/O.
Enables multiple Master Units on a single PLC.
Enables multiple Master Units in a single network.
The Net-X Server can be used to easily monitor, change, or log I/O data
on the DeviceNet.
5
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Slave Features
I/O Terminals
• Provide general-purpose inputs, outputs, or both inputs and outputs via 2tier terminal blocks (M3). Available in 8-point and 16-point models with
transistor inputs or outputs or in a 16-point model with 8 inputs and 8 outputs.
• Provide general-purpose inputs, outputs, or both inputs and outputs via 3tier terminal blocks (M3). Available in 16-point models with transistor
inputs or outputs or in a 16-point model with 8 inputs and 8 outputs.
• Provide general-purpose inputs, outputs, or both inputs and outputs via a
MIL connector. Available in 32-point models with transistor inputs or outputs or in a 32-point model with 8 inputs and 8 outputs.
■
Environment-resistive Slaves
Environment-resistant Terminals
• Improved I/O Terminals that conform to IP66 for spatter-, water-, and oilresistance. Sensors or valves with round water-proof connectors can be
easily connected with no tools.
• Available in 8-point or 16-point models with transistor inputs or outputs,
and 16-point models with transistor I/O (8 inputs and outputs).
• [email protected]@@@C(-1): IP66
Water-proof Terminals
• Improved I/O Terminals that conform to IP67 for water- and oil-resistance.
Sensors or valves with round water-proof connectors can be easily connected with no tools.
• Available in 4-point or 8-point models with transistor inputs or outputs.
• [email protected]@@@CL(-1): IP67
B7AC Interface Unit
• Input Interface Unit that conforms to IP66 for spatter-, water-, and oilresistance.
• Provides three FA connector ports for the B7A for 10 input points on each
of 3 ports.
Remote Adapters
• Used in combination with G70D and other I/O Blocks to handle relay outputs, power MOS FET Relay outputs, etc.
• Available in 16-point models with transistor inputs or outputs.
CQM1 I/O Link Units
• More than one I/O Link Unit can be mounted to a CQM1 PLC.
• Link 16 inputs and 16 outputs between the PLC and the Master Unit.
Sensor Terminals
• Accept inputs from photoelectric and proximity sensors with connectors.
• Available in 16-point input and 8-point input/8-point output models.
• Output signals can be used for sensor teaching and external diagnosis.
Analog Input Terminals
• Convert analog inputs to binary.
• Switchable between 2 and 4 input points using the DIP switch.
• Handle inputs of 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4
to 20 mA.
6
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Analog Output Terminals
• Convert binary data to analog outputs.
• Provides outputs of 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20mA.
• Available in models with a resolution of either 1/6,000 or 1/30,000.
Temperature Input Terminals
• Temperature data is input as binary data for 4 inputs.
• Thermocouple and temperature-resistance thermometer inputs are available.
■
Special I/O Slaves
C200H I/O Link Units
• Special I/O Slaves that mount to C200HX/HG/HE PLCs and read/write
data from the Master Unit to the specified words in the CPU Unit.
• Read and write areas specified for up to 512 bits each (32 words each).
• Any memory area words can be read or written using DeviceNet explicit
messages.
RS-232C Units
• Special I/O Slaves that provide two RS-232C ports and control I/O from
the Master Units.
MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs
• Multiple I/O Units can be combined under a Communications Unit and
treated as a single Slave.
• Special I/O Units, such as Analog I/O Units, and High-speed Counter
Units are also available.
7
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
1-1-2
Slaves
DeviceNet Slaves are classified as follows:
• General-purpose Slaves
Slaves with I/O functions that use a normal connector to connect the communications cable.
• Environment-resistive Slaves
Slaves with I/O functions that use a round, water-proof connector to connect the communications cable.
• Special I/O Slaves
Slaves with functions other than I/O functions (such as message communications) that use a normal connector to connect the communications
cable.
Type Cable
Normal square connector
General purpose
Name
Transistor
Remote I/O Terminals
Transistor
Remote I/O Terminals with 3tier I/O Terminal
Blocks
Appearance
I/O points
8 input points, NPN
Model
DRT1-ID08
8 input points, PNP
16 input points, NPN
DRT1-ID08-1
DRT1-ID16
16 input points, PNP
8 output points, NPN
DRT1-ID16-1
DRT1-OD08
8 output points, PNP
16 output points, NPN
DRT1-OD08-1
DRT1-OD16
16 output points, PNP
DRT1-OD16-1
8 input/8 output points, DRT1-MD16
NPN
16 input points, NPN
DRT1-ID16T
16 input points, PNP
16 input points, NPN
DRT1-ID16T-1
DRT1-ID16TA
16 input points, PNP
16 output points, NPN
DRT1-ID16TA-1
DRT1-OD16T
16 output points, PNP
16 output points, NPN
DRT1-OD16T-1
DRT1-OD16TA
16 output points, PNP
8 input/8 output points,
NPN
8 input/8 output points,
PNP
8 input/8 output points,
NPN
DRT1-OD16TA-1
DRT1-MD16T
DRT1-MD16T-1
DRT1-MD16TA
8 input/8 output points, DRT1-MD16TA-1
PNP
8
Features
---
Easy wiring (no need to
double-wire terminals
and wiring locations are
easy to understand)
Separate power supply
not needed for the [email protected] (same power
supply used as communications power supply).
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Type Cable
Normal square connectors
General purpose
Name
Transistor
Remote I/O Terminals with I/O
Connectors
I/O points
32 input points, NPN
Model
DRT1-ID32ML
32 input points, PNP
32 output points, NPN
DRT1-ID32ML-1
DRT1-OD32ML
32 output points, PNP
16 input/16 output
points, NPN
DRT1-OD32ML-1
DRT1-MD32ML
16 input/16 output
points, PNP
DRT1-MD32ML-1
16 input points, NPN
16 input points, PNP
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-ID16X-1
16 output points, NPN
16 output points, PNP
DRT1-OD16X
DRT1-OD16X-1
Sensor Terminals
16 input points, NPN
DRT1-HD16S
Temperature
Input Terminals
4 thermocouple input
points
DRT1-TS04T
4 temperature-resistant input points
DRT1-TS04P
4 analog input points
(4 words) or 2 input
points (2 words) (voltage or current)
DRT1-AD04
Applicable range:
1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to
10 V,
–10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
or 4 to 20 mA input (switchable)
Resolution: 1/6,000
4 analog input points
(4 words) (voltage or
current
DRT1-AD04H
Applicable range:
1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to
10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20 mA input (switchable)
Resolution: 1/30,000
Remote Adapters
Analog Input
Terminals
Appearance
8 input/8 output points, DRT1-ND16S
NPN
Features
Compact:
35 x 60 x 80 mm
(WxDxH)
Connection to I/O Blocks
possible through MIL
cables.
Separate power supply
not needed (same power
supply used as communications power supply).
Compact:
85 x 50 x 40 mm
(WxDxH)
Connects to G70D I/O
Block for output via relays
or power MOS FET
relays.
Connected to photoelectric and proximity sensors
with connectors
Thermocouple
Temperature-resistant
input
Analog Output
Terminals
2 analog output points DRT1-DA02
(2 words)
Applicable range:
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to
+10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20 mA output (switchable)
Resolution: 1/6,000
CQM1 I/O Link
Units
16 internal input/
16 internal output
points (between
CQM1 and Master
Unit)
Pier-to-pier remote I/O
PLC communications
CQM1-DRT21
9
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Type Cable
Round communications connectors
Environment-resistive Terminals
Name
Waterproof Terminals
Environmentresistive Transistor Terminals
Appearance
I/O points
4 input points, NPN
Model
DRT1-ID04CL
4 input points, PNP
8 input points, NPN
DRT1-ID04CL-1
DRT1-ID08CL
8 input points, PNP
4 output points, NPN
DRT1-ID08CL-1
DRT1-OD04CL
4 output points, PNP
8 output points, NPN
DRT1-OD04CL-1
DRT1-OD08CL
8 output points, PNP
8 input points, NPN
DRT1-OD08CL-1
DRT1-ID08C
8 output points, NPN
16 input points, NPN
DRT1-OD08C
DRT1-HD16C
16 input points, PNP
16 output points, NPN
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-WD16C
16 output points, PNP DRT1-WD16C-1
8 input/8 output points, DRT1-MD16C
NPN
Features
Better resistance to environment with waterproof,
drop-proof construction
(IP67).
Connects without tools to
sensors, valves, and
other devices with XS2series connectors.
Better resistance to environment with spatterproof, waterproof, dropproof construction (IP66).
Connects without tools to
sensors, valves, and
other devices with XS2series connectors.
8 input/8 output points, DRT1-MD16C-1
PNP
Normal square connectors
Special I/O Slaves
10
B7AC Interface
Unit
10 inputs x 3 ports
DRT1-B7AC
C200H I/O Link
Units
512 input points max. C200HW-DRT21
(32 words)
512 output points max.
(32 words)
RS-232C Units
16 input points (1
word) (status area)
DRT1-232C2
Each Unit connects to
three branches.
Connects without tools to
sensors, valves, and
other devices with XS2series connectors.
Better resistance to environment with spatterproof, waterproof, dropproof construction (IP66).
Pier-to-pier remote I/O
PLC communications
Max. I/O area: 512 inputs
and 512 outputs.
User allocations of I/O
area.
Two RS-232C ports
Explicit messages used
for data transfers (151
bytes max.)
Explicit messages used
for settings and control.
RS-232C port status
reflected in inputs.
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
1-1-3
Slave Mounting and Connection Methods
Type Cable
Name
Normal square connectors
General purpose
Transistor
Remote I/O
Terminals
Model
DRT1-ID08
DRT1-ID08-1
DRT1-ID16
Mounting
I/O
connections
Combined
devices
DIN Track
or screws
M3 terminal
block, 2 tiers
Connected to
terminal block
Internal I/O power
power
supply
supply
M3 termi- M3 terminal block nal block
DIN Track
or screws
M3 terminal
block, 3 tiers
Connected to
terminal block
M3 termi- M3 terminal block nal block
DRT1-ID16-1
DRT1-OD08
DRT1-OD08-1
DRT1-OD16
DRT1-OD16-1
DRT1-MD16
Transistor
Remote I/O
Terminals with
3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
DRT1-ID16T
DRT1-ID16T-1
DRT1-OD16T
DRT1-OD16T-1
DRT1-MD16T
DRT1-MD16T-1
DRT1-ID16TA
DRT1-ID16TA-1
Same as
communications
power
supply
DRT1-OD16TA
DRT1-OD16TA-1
DRT1-MD16TA
DRT1-MD16TA-1
Transistor
Remote I/O
Terminals with
I/O Connectors
DIN Track
or directly
to wall with
mounting
bracket
MIL connector
Cable with MIL Same as
connector and communications
I/O Block
power
supply
DIN Track
or screws
Flat cable
connector,
MIL socket
G70D I/O
Block
Sensor Termi- DRT1-HD16S
nals
DRT1-ND16S
DIN Track
or screws
I/O connector Sensor or
external
devices with
connector
Temperature
Input Terminals
DIN Track
or screws
M3 terminal
block
DIN Track
or screws
M3 terminal
block
Remote
Adapters
DRT1-ID32ML
DRT1-ID32ML-1
DRT1-OD32ML
DRT1-OD32ML-1
DRT1-MD32ML
DRT1-MD32ML-1
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-ID16X-1
DRT1-OD16X
DRT1-OD16X-1
Analog Input
Terminals
DRT1-TS04T
DRT1-TS04P
DRT1-AD04
DRT1-AD04H
Thermometer
Temperature
resistance
input device
0 to 5 V, 1 to
5 V, 0 to 10 V,
−10 to 10 V, 0
to 20 mA, 4 to
20 mA
MIL connector (for
both inputs
and outputs)
M3 termi- Flat cable
nal block connector
with MIL
socket (for
both inputs
and outputs)
M3 termi- I/O connal block nectors
(for both
inputs and
outputs)
M3 termi- None
nal block
M3 termi- None
nal block
11
Section 1-1
Overview of DeviceNet
Type Cable
Name
Model
Mounting
I/O
connections
Combined
devices
Internal
power
supply
I/O power
supply
Environment-resistive Terminals
Normal square connectors Round communications connectors
General purpose
Analog Output Terminals
DRT1-DA02
DIN Track
or screws
M3 terminal
block
1 to 5 V, 0 to
10 V, −10 to
10 V, 0 to
20 mA, 4 to
20 mA
M3 termi- None
nal block
CQM1 I/O
Link Units
CQM1-DRT21
Directly to
PLC
None
PLC-to-PLC
link
Supplied
from PLC
Waterproof
Terminals
DRT1-ID04CL
Screws
Round, waterproof connector (XS2
compatible)
Cable with XS2
connector on
one end and
cables with
XS2 connector
on both ends
with sensor
with direct connector or relay
sensor connector and sensor
with pull-out
connector
Same as Cable with
communi- XS2 concations
nector
power
supply
DRT1-ID04CL-1
DRT1-ID08CL
DRT1-ID08CL-1
DRT1-OD04CL
DRT1-OD04CL-1
DRT1-OD08CL
Environmentresistive Transistor Terminals
DRT1-OD08CL-1
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-OD08C
DRT1-HD16C
None
Cable with XS2 connector
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-WD16C
DRT1-WD16C-1
DRT1-MD16C
B7AC Interface Unit
Normal square connector
Special I/O Terminals
12
DRT1-MD16C-1
DRT1-B7AC
Screws
Round, water- B7AC x 3 Units Cable
None
proof connecwith XS2 (communitor
connector cations
connections to
B7AC via
round
waterproof connector)
C200H I/O
Link Units
C200HW-DRT21
To Backplane
None
PLC-to-PLC
link
Supplied
from PLC
None
RS-232C
Units
DRT1-232C2
DIN Track
or screws
Two RS-232
ports
Devices with
M3 termi- None
RS-232C inter- nal block
face (e.g., barcode reader)
for two ports
SECTION 2
Example System Setup
This section provides information on hardware aspects of Masters and Slaves connected to a DeviceNet Network to ensure
the proper operation of the system. Included are system configuration examples, basic procedures for wiring, mounting and
setting Master and Slave Units, connecting cables and power supplies, creating I/O tables, and creating and registering scan
lists.
2-1
Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2-1-1
Basic Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2-1-2
System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-2
Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-4
2-5
2-3-1
Mounting and Setting the Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-3-2
Mounting and Setting Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-3-3
Mounting Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-3-4
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
2-4-1
Creating I/O Tables for the Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
2-4-2
Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
2-4-3
Creating and Registering Scan Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Checking Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-5-1
Indicator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-5-2
Reading and Writing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
13
Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples
2-1
Section 2-1
Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples
The examples shown here provide the basic operating procedures for
DeviceNet.
2-1-1
Basic Procedures
Use the following procedures to operate the DeviceNet Slave Units. For
details on settings and connections, refer to the operation manual for the
Master Unit. For further details on Slave Units, refer to SECTION 4 Generalpurpose Slaves to SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units Specifications.
Preparing the Units
1,2,3...
1. Select the appropriate Units. Refer to page 15.
2. Determine the appropriate wiring method. Refer to page 15.
3. Determine the appropriate method for supplying communications power.
Refer to page 15.
Setting and Wiring Hardware
1,2,3...
1. Separate and lay the cables.
2. Mount the Master Unit and specify the correct settings. Refer to page 16.
3. Mount the Slave Units and specify the correct settings. Refer to page 17.
4. Mount other devices to be connected to the Network. Refer to page 15.
5. Connect the cables. Refer to page 15.
6. Wire the I/O cables. Refer to page 15.
Starting Communications
1,2,3...
1. Create the I/O tables. Refer to page 20.
2. Start up the system. Refer to page 20.
3. Create and register the scan list. Refer to page 21.
Checking Operations
1,2,3...
1. Check the status of the indicators on the Unit. Refer to page 24.
2. Check that data is reading and writing properly. Refer to page 24.
Note The examples provided in this section show the minimum settings to operate
the system. If details on other settings for actual operation are required, refer
the operation manual for the Master Unit. For further details on Slave Units,
refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves to SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave
Units Specifications.
14
Section 2-2
Preparations
2-1-2
System Configuration Example
The following diagram shows the operating procedure using a system configuration example. The system configuration shown here uses Thin Cables.
C200H-OD215
Output Unit
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Unit
S82K-05024 24-V DC Power Supply
(Node 00)
(100 V AC, 50 W)
C200HX PLC
C200HW-DRT21 I/O Link Unit
(Node 07)
C200HX PLC
H7F 7-segment
Display Device
DRT1-ID16 Remote
I/O Terminal
16 transistor inputs
(Node 01)
DRT1-OD16 Remote
I/O Terminal
16 transistor outputs
(Node 02)
DCN1-1C T-branch Tap
DCN1-3 T-branch Tap with
Terminating Resistor
DCN1-1C T-branch Tap with
Terminating Resistor
DRT1-232C2 RS-232C Unit
allocated 1 input word
(Node 08)
DRT1-TS04T Temperature Input Terminal
with 4 inputs (allocated 4 words)
(Node 03)
Power is supplied to each node in the above diagram using the following
devices.
Internal power: S82K-05024 (100 V AC, 50 W)
I/O power:
2-2
S82K-05024 (100 V AC, 50 W)
Preparations
Selecting Units
Select the following Units as shown in 2-1-2 System Configuration Example.
Master Unit:
C200HW-DRM21-V1
Slave Units:
DRT1-ID16
DRT1-OD16
DRT1-TS04T
C200HW-DRT21
DRT1-232C2
There is a complete line of OMRON Master Units and Slave Units available
that are compatible with DeviceNet. Select Units that suit the needs of the
system. For further details on types of Units, refer to 1-1-2 Slaves.
Wiring
Either Thick Cables or Thin Cables can be used to wire a DeviceNet Network.
Flexible branching of cables is possible by using either T-branch Taps or
multi-drop connections. Restrictions on the maximum network length and total
branch line length depends on the baud rate and type of cable used. For
details, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
In 2-1-2 System Configuration Example, Thin Cables are used with T-branch
Taps for connecting Slave Units to the trunk line.
Communications Power
Supply
Each node (Master or Slave) must be supplied with a 24-V DC power supply
for proper DeviceNet communications. The communications power, however,
can be supplied by communications cables and does not require separate wiring.
For systems that have a short maximum network length, power can be supplied to all nodes by using one communications power supply. Various conditions, constraints, and measures affect how the communications power is
15
Section 2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware
supplied. In the examples shown here, the power is supplied from one communications power supply, and communications cables are connected using
T-branch Taps.
Refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267) for details on methods of
supplying communications power.
Note Use the OMRON Connectors shown below when using Thick Cables and
multi-drop connections for wiring.
XW4B-05C4-T-D
(Without set screws)
2-3
XW4B-05C4-TF-D
(With set screws)
Setting and Wiring Hardware
Use the following procedures to mount, set, and wire the hardware.
2-3-1
Mounting and Setting the Master Unit
Settings
The components, functions, and switch settings for the C200HW-DRM21-V1
Master Unit mounted to a C200HX PLC are shown as an example in the following diagram. For information on switch settings and other Master Units,
refer to the operation manual for the Master Unit.
Front panel
Rear panel
Indicators
Rear-panel DIP switch
These pins have the following
functions:
Pins 1 to 6: Node address
Pins 7 and 8: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Here, all pins are set to OFF to set the
node address to 01
Rotary switch
This switch sets the Master's single-digit hexadecimal
unit number. Here, set this switch to 0.
Front-panel DIP switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate
Pin 3: Continue/stop communications for error
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Here, all pins are turned OFF to set the baud rate to
125 Kbps and to continue communications for errors.
Communications connector
16
Section 2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware
Mounting
2-3-2
Settings
The Master Unit is mounted to the Backplane of the PLC in the same way as
other Units are normally mounted. For details on mounting Master Units to
PLCs, and mounting control panels to PLCs, refer to the applicable CPU Unit
Operation Manual.
Mounting and Setting Slaves
The following example shows Slave settings. For details on how to set
Slaves, refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves to SECTION 6 Special I/
O Slave Units Specifications.
C200HW-DRM21-V1
Master Unit (Node 00)
DRT1-ID16 Remote I/O Terminal
16 transistor inputs
(Node 01)
C200HW-DRT21 I/O
Link Unit (Node 07)
DRT1-TS04T Temperature
Input Terminal with 4 inputs
(allocated 4 words)
(Node 03)
DRT1-OD16 Remote I/O Terminal
16 transistor outputs
(Node 01)
DRT1-232C2 RS-232C Unit
(allocated 1 input word)
(Node 08)
• DRT-ID16 Remote I/O Terminals (Transistor Inputs)
Node Address: 01
Baud Rate:
125 kbps
• DRT-OD16 Remote I/O Terminals (Transistor Outputs)
Node Address:
02
Baud Rate:
125 kbps
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error:
Clear
• DRT1-TS04T Temperature Input Terminals
Node Address:
03
Baud Rate:
125 kbps
Temperature Scale: °C
Display Mode for 2 Digits Below Decimal Point:
Normal mode
• C200HW-DRT21 I/O Link Units
Node Address:
07
Unit Number:
0
Baud Rate:
125 kbps
Write Area Handling for Communications Error:
Clear
• DRT1-232C2 RS-232C Units
Node Address:
08
Baud Rate:
125 kbps
17
Section 2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware
Mounting
C200H I/O Link Units
C200H I/O Link Units are mounted to C200HX Backplanes in the same way
as Units are normally mounted to PLCs. For details on mounting I/O Link
Units to PLCs, and mounting control panels to PLCs, refer to the CPU Unit’s
Operation Manual.
A maximum of 16 C200H I/O Link Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack and
Expansion I/O Racks for a C200HX/HG/HE PLC.
Remote I/O Terminals and Temperature Input Terminals
Remote I/O Terminals and Temperature Input Terminals are mounted using
either of the following two methods.
• Screw Mounting
While referring to the dimensions for each Slave provided in SECTION 4
General-purpose Slaves to SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units Specifications, open mounting holes in the control panel and secure the Slave
Units to the control panel using M4 screws.
The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6 to 0.98 N⋅m.
• DIN Track Mounting
Secure the bottom of the Slave Unit to a 35-mm DIN track, or secure the
Slave Unit to the track between two End Plates.
Mounting Examples
The following diagram shows all Units except the PLC node mounted to DIN
tracks.
Master Unit
Temperature
Input Terminal Output Terminal Input Terminal
C200H I/O Link Unit
RS-232C Unit
2-3-3
Mounting Connecting Devices
Connecting devices that require being mounted are as follows:
• T-branch Taps: Secure to the control panel with screws, or mounted to a
DIN track.
• Terminal-block Terminating Resistors: Secure to the control panel with
screws.
Open mounting holes in the control panel and secure the device to the control
panel with screws. Tighten the M4 screws to a tightening torque of 0.6 to
1.18 N⋅m. The method of mounting devices to DIN track is the same as for
Slave Units. Refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267) for details.
18
Section 2-3
Setting and Wiring Hardware
2-3-4
Connecting Cables
Connecting
Communications Cables
Connect the Master Unit and T-branch Taps, T-branch Taps and T-branch
Taps, and T-branch Taps and Slaves with Thin DeviceNet Communications
Cables.
If Terminating Resistors are connected to T-branch Taps, connect to the T-branch Tap furthest
from the power supply. The T-branch Tap, however, must be within 6 m of the furthest node.
24-V DC power supply
C200HX PLC
C200HX PLC
7-segment display
device M7F
T-branch Tap
T-branch Tap
T-branch Tap
Remote I/O Terminal
RS-232C Unit
Temperature Input Terminal
Remote I/O Terminal
If Terminal-block Terminating Resistors are used, the Terminating Resistor must be connected to the end of a cable within 1 m from the furthest node.
Use the following procedure to connect the cables. Refer to 4-2 Connecting
Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves for details.
1,2,3...
1. Prepare the communications cables and attach the connectors to the cables.
2. Connect the communications cable connectors to the node connectors on
the Master Unit, T-branch Taps, and Slaves.
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
Most nodes on the network require an internal power supply in addition to the
communications power supply to operate the device. Supply internal power to
all nodes except for the Master Unit and C200H I/O Link Unit. Connect M3
crimp terminals to the power lines and then connect them to the terminal
block.
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
If required, an I/O power supply for I/O devices is connected to the Remote I/
O Terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals to the power lines and then connect
them to the terminal block.
Wiring I/O
Connect M3 crimp terminals to the signal lines of Remote I/O Terminals and
Temperature Input Terminals and then connect them to the terminal block.
19
Section 2-4
Starting Communications
2-4
Starting Communications
After setting and wiring the hardware, turn ON the communications power
supply, the internal power supply of each node, and the I/O power supply, and
then start communications using the following procedure.
2-4-1
Creating I/O Tables for the Master Unit
I/O tables must be created in the CPU Unit to distinguish between the different Slaves mounted to the PLC.
Turn ON the PLC to which the Master Unit and C200H I/O Link Unit are
mounted, connect the Peripheral Devices to the PLC, and create the I/O
tables. Once the I/O tables have been created, turn OFF the power to the
PLC. The following example shows the procedure for creating I/O tables using
a Programming Console. For details on creating I/O tables, refer to the Operation Manual for the Peripheral Device being used.
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON power to Master Unit.
2. Switch the operating mode switch to PROGRAM mode.
3. Input the following key sequence.
CLR
MONTR
CLR
<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD!
<PROGRAM>
00000
FUN
00000
FUN (0??)
CH
00000IOTBL
?-?U=
?
00000IOTBL
WRIT
????
00000IOTBL
WRIT
9713
00000IOTBL
OK
WRIT
SHIFT
CHG
B
9
7
D
1
BZ
3
WRITE
Precautions
• Do not turn ON multiple Master Units in a DeviceNet Network until scan
lists for all Masters have been registered. Finish creating I/O tables for
one Master Unit before creating tables for another Master Unit.
• Do not turn ON the power supply to other nodes or the communications
power supply when creating I/O tables.
2-4-2
Starting the System
Turn ON the communications power supply and the power to other nodes in
the following order.
1,2,3...
20
1. Turn ON the communications power supply.
Section 2-4
Starting Communications
2. Turn ON the power to each Slave.
3. Turn ON the power to the Master Unit.
The power supplies listed above can all be turned ON simultaneously. The
external I/O power supply can be turned ON at any time.
2-4-3
Creating and Registering Scan Lists
Scan lists are lists that register the information that is transferred between
Master Units and Slaves. The Master Unit compares the scan list with the status of the Slave currently being communicated with, so communications with
the Slave are always being checked.
For details on scan lists and remote I/O communications, refer to the operation manual for the Master Unit.
Note When the scan list is disabled, communications are possible with all Slaves
on the DeviceNet Network with fixed allocations. Without scan lists, however,
the Master Unit cannot check if there is an error in a Slave. For normal operations, always enable the scan lists.
Precautions
• User I/O Allocations
The user can allocated desired words for Slave I/O in the DeviceNet I/O
Areas (Input Area, Output Area) in the Master Unit. When user allocations
are used, scan lists must be created with a DeviceNet Configurator and
registered in the Master Unit. The scan list is enabled as soon as it is registered, and I/O communications start according to the scan list. For
details, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267) and the
DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual (W328).
• Fixed I/O Allocations
Slave I/O is allocated in the DeviceNet I/O area (Input Area, Output Area)
in the Master Unit in the same order as the Slave node addresses. When
fixed allocations are used, the scan lists are automatically created and
registered using the software switches. The scan list is enabled as soon
as it is registered, and I/O communications start according to the scan list.
The registered scan lists can be cleared using the software switches.
Note If scan lists are not enabled, operation will be performed on the DeviceNet
network according to fixed allocations, but the Master will not be able to recognize errors. Always enable the scan lists during normal operation.
Creating and Registering
Fixed Allocation Scan
Lists
The method of creating and registering scan lists for fixed allocation using
Programming Console is explained here. For details on operating the Peripheral Device, refer to the Operation Manual for the Peripheral Device being
used with the PLC. For details on creating scan lists, refer to the operation
manual for the Master Unit. For fixed allocations, the PLC’s Peripheral Device
is used to operate the Master Unit’s software switches, monitor the Status
Areas (Master Status Area 1 and Registered Slave Data Area), and create
and register scan lists.
21
Section 2-4
Starting Communications
Creating and Registering Scan Lists
Use the following procedure to create, register, and enable the scan lists.
• The following procedure shows how to clear scan lists.
CLR
S
C
1
0
0
CHG
2
00000
R
c100
0000
WRITE
c100
0002
O
c100
B200
CHG
1,2,3...
0
WRITE
c100
0000
1. Switch the operating mode switch to PROGRAM mode.
2. Display the initial screen.
3. Monitor IR 100 (software switches).
4. Turn ON bit 01(Scan List Clear Bit).
5. Monitor IR 101 (Master Status Area 1) and check that bit 09 (scan list operation end) turns ON.
6. Turn OFF bit IR 10001.
• The following procedure shows how to check the registered slave data.
Monitor IR 102 to IR 105 (Registered Slave Data Area), and check that bits
00, 01, 02, 03, 07, and 08 are ON.
The numbers in the following table indicate the node addresses. In the
Registered Slave Data Area, the bits corresponding to the nodes that are
communicating properly are ON.
Bit
IR 102
IR 103
IR 104
IR 105
22
Section 2-4
Starting Communications
• The following procedure shows how to create and register scan lists.
SHIFT
CH
1
0
0
MONTR
c100
0000
CHG
1
WRITE
c100
0001
c101
9200
CHG
1,2,3...
0
WRITE
c100
0000
1. Monitor IR 100 (software switches).
2. Turn ON bit 00 (Scan List Enable Bit).
3. Monitor IR 101 (Master Status Area 1), and check that bit 09 (scan list operation end) turns ON.
4. Turn OFF bit IR 10000. The scan list will be created, registered, and I/O
communications will start with the scan list enabled.
Software Switches and Status Area
The software switches and Status Area are allocated in IR words according to
the Master Unit’s unit number as shown in the following diagram.
Master Unit
Unit No. 0 to 9
First word: 100 + (10 × unit No.)
C200HX/HG/HE/HS CPU Unit
IR Area
IR 100 Unit No. 0
IR 100
IR 101
Unit No. 0
Software switch: 1 word
Status Area: 9 words
IR 190 Unit No. 9
Unit No. A to F
First word: 400 + 110 × (unit No. –10)
10 words
IR 109
IR 400 Unit No. A
IR 450 Unit No. F
DM Area
Unit No. 0
Unit No. 1
Unit No. 0
Status Area: 2 words
First word: DM 6032 + (2 × unit No.)
Unit No. F
23
Section 2-5
Checking Operations
The following diagram shows the Status Area configuration for unit number 0.
IR Area
IR 101
IR 102
Master Status Area 1 (1 word)
Registered Slave Data Area (4 words)
IR 106
Normal Slave Data Area (4 words)
IR 109
DM Area
DM 6032
DM 6033
2-5
Master Status Area 2 (1 word)
Current Communications Cycle Time
(1 word)
Checking Operations
Use the procedures provided here to check that I/O communications are operating normally.
2-5-1
Indicator Status
I/O communications are operating normally if the MS and NS indicators for all
nodes are lit in green, and the 7-segment indicator on the front panel of the
Master Unit is displaying the node address of the Master Unit as shown in the
following diagram (when the Master Unit’s node address is 00), and the scan
list is enabled.
Master Unit
OFF: Scan list enabled
Master Unit node address 00
2-5-2
Reading and Writing Data
Connect the Peripheral Device for the PLC to the Master Unit, write the Master Unit’s Output Area and are read the Input Area, and check that the data is
the same in the Slaves.
Refer to the operation manual for the Master Unit for details on Output Area
and Input Area addresses and how to allocate Slave I/O.
24
Section 2-5
Checking Operations
I/O between Remote I/O
Terminals
Create ladder programs in the PLC of the Master Unit, and check that when
the switch on the DRT1-ID16 Input Terminal turns ON, the indicator on the
DRT1-OD16 Output Terminal turns ON.
Master Unit
DRT1-ID16
Input Terminal
Switch1 (bit 00)
DRT1-OD16
Output Terminal
Indicator (bit 00)
Slave Allocations
In the system configuration examples in this section, Slave I/O is allocated in
the Master Unit’s IR Area for fixed remote I/O communications as shown in
the following diagram.
Output area
IR 50
IR 51
IR 52
IR 53
IR 54
IR 55
IR 56
IR 57
IR 58
IR 59
Displaying Temperature
Data with 7-segment
Display
Not used.
Not used.
DRT1-OD16
Not used.
C200HW-DRT21
Not used.
Not used.
Input Area
IR 350
IR 351
IR 352
IR 353
IR 354
IR 355
IR 356
IR 357
IR 358
IR 359
Not used.
DRT1-ID16
Not used.
DRT1-TS04T
C200HW-DRT21
DRT1-232C2
Not used.
Operation can be checked by displaying the temperature data input into the
Temperature Input Terminal on the 7-segment display (static, negative logic
model) connected to the Output Unit (IR 110) of the Master’s PLC.
The temperature data can be converted to BCD data by using the BCD(024)
instruction (when the temperature data is negative, it can be converted to positive data using the NEG(160) instruction). For details on using instructions,
25
Section 2-5
Checking Operations
refer to the C200HX, C200HG, C200HE Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual (W322).
35315
NEG
Rightmost bit of temperature data
353
DM1000
35315
MOV (21)
353
DM1000
25315
BCD (24)
Normally ON
DM1000
110
• Use the MVN(022) instruction to reverse data for displays that require
positive logic.
• Use the 7SEG(214) instruction in the I/O Unit instructions for dynamic displays.
Checking I/O Links for
C200H I/O Link Units
Read/Write Areas in the C200H I/O Link Unit are allocated by default to the
words in the PLC that it is mounted to as follows:
Read Area:
Write Area:
IR 50 (1 word)
IR 350 (1 word)
The C200H I/O Link Unit’s Read/Write Areas are normally linked to the Input/
Output Areas of the Master (the Input/Output Areas occupied by the C200H I/
O Link Unit in the Master Unit) as shown in the following diagram.
Input Area Output area
Master Unit
IR 057
IR 357
Slave
IR 050
C200H I/O Link Unit
IR 350
Read Area Write Area
Connect the Peripheral Device to the PLC, monitor the changes in current
positions, and check that the links are operating normally.
26
SECTION 3
Common Slave Specifications
This section provides specifications that are common to all Slaves.
3-1
Common Slave Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
3-1-1
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
3-1-2
MS and NS Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
27
Section 3-1
Common Slave Specifications
3-1
3-1-1
Common Slave Specifications
Communications Specifications
Item
Communications protocol
Supported connections (communications)
Connection forms
Baud rate
Specification
DeviceNet
Master-Slave: Remote I/O and explicit messages
Both conform to DeviceNet specifications
Combination of multi-drop and T-branch connections (for trunk or drop lines)
500 kbps, 250 kbps, or 125 kbps (switchable)
Communications media
Special 5-wire cables (2 signal lines, 2 power
lines, 1 shield line)
Communications
distances
Network length: 100 m max. (100 m max.)
Drop line length: 6 m max.
Total drop line length: 39 m max.
500 kbps
250 kbps
Network length: 250 m max. (100 m max.)
Drop line length: 6 m max.
Total drop line length: 78 m max.
125 kbps
Network length: 500 m max. (100 m max.)
Drop line length: 6 m max.
Total drop line length: 156 m max.
Parentheses indicate the length when Thin Cables are used.
Communications power supply
Max. number of nodes
11 to 25 V DC
64 nodes (including Configurator when used)
Max. number of Masters
Without Configurator: 1
With Configurator:
Max. number of Slaves
63 Slaves
Communications cycle time
Without Configurator:
Input Slaves (16-pt): 16
Output Slaves (16-pt):16
Cycle time at 500 kbps: 9.3 ms
With Configurator: Set between 2 and 500 ms
Calculated value takes priority if longer.
Max. communications cycle time
with multiple Masters
Input Slaves (16-pt): 16
Output Slaves (16-pt):16
Max. cycle time at 500 kbps: 18 ms
CRC error check
Error control checks
28
63
Section 3-1
Common Slave Specifications
3-1-2
MS and NS Indicators
This section describes the meaning of MS and NS indicators for the Slave
Units. The MS (Module Status) indicator displays the status of a node on the
network. The NS (Network Status) indicator displays the status of the entire
network. The MS and NS indicators can be green or red and they can be OFF,
flashing, or ON. The following table shows the meaning of these indicator
conditions.
The following diagram shows the indicator panel on a basic Slave Unit. The
position and status of the indicators, may change depending on the specific
Slave Unit.
Indicator
MS
Color
Definition
Meaning
Normal operating status.
Flashing
Device
Operational
Device in
Standby
Unrecoverable Fault
Minor Fault
---
OFF
No Power
Power isn’t being supplied, waiting for initial processing to start, or the Unit is
being reset.
Green
ON
Link OK.
On-line,
Connected.
Network is operating normally (communications established)
Flashing
On-line, Not
Connected
ON
Critical Link
Failure
Network is operating normally, but communications have not yet been established.
A fatal communications error has
occurred. Network communications are
not possible. Check for a node address
duplication or Bus Off error.
Flashing
Connection
Time-out
Communications timeout.
OFF
Not Powered/
Not On-Line
Checking for node address duplication
on the Master, switch settings are incorrect, or the power supply is OFF.
Green
Status
ON
Flashing
Red
NS
Red
---
ON
Reading switch settings.
Unit hardware error: Watchdog timer
error.
Switch settings incorrect, etc.
29
SECTION 4
General-purpose Slaves
This section provides specifications and describes the components, indicators, switch settings, and other aspects of
General-purpose Slaves.
4-1
4-2
4-3
Common Specifications for General-purpose Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
4-1-1
Current Consumption and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves . . . . . . . . . .
34
4-2-1
Connecting Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
4-2-2
Connecting Communications Cables to the Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4-2-3
Mounting Terminating Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
4-3-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings . . . . . .
40
4-3-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 8 Points:
DRT1-ID08 (NPN) and DRT1-ID08-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
4-3-3
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 16 Points:
DRT1-ID16 (NPN) and DRT1-ID16-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
4-3-4
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 8 Points:
DRT1-OD08 (NPN) and DRT1-OD08-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 16 Points:
DRT1-OD16 (NPN) and DRT1-OD16-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Transistor Remote I/O Terminal with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs:
DRT1-MD16 (NPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-3-7
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
4-3-8
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
60
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . .
62
4-4-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings . . . . . .
62
4-4-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with
16 Points and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-ID16T (NPN) and DRT1-ID16T-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with
16 Points and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-ID16TA (NPN) and DRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
4-4-4
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with
16 Points and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-OD16T (NPN) and DRT1-OD16T-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
4-4-5
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with
16 Points and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-OD16TA (NPN) and DRT1-OD16TA-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . .
73
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with
8 Inputs and 8 Outputs and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-MD16T (NPN) and DRT1-MD16T-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with
8 Inputs and 8 Outputs and 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-MD16TA (NPN) and DRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . .
81
4-4-8
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
4-4-9
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
86
4-3-5
4-3-6
4-4
4-4-3
4-4-6
4-4-7
31
4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
4-5-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings. . . . . . .
87
4-5-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 32 Points and Connectors:
DRT1-ID32ML (NPN) and DRT1-ID32ML-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . .
88
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 32 Points and Connectors:
DRT1-OD32ML (NPN) and DRT1-OD32ML-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . .
93
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with
16 Inputs and 16 Outputs and Connectors:
DRT1-MD32ML (NPN) and DRT1-MD32ML-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . .
98
4-5-5
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
4-5-6
4-5-3
4-5-4
4-6
4-7
4-8
108
111
4-6-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings. . . . . . .
111
4-6-2
Remote Input Adapters with 16 Points:
DRT1-ID16X (NPN) and DRT1-ID16X-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
4-6-3
Remote Output Adapters with 16 Points:
DRT1-OD16X (NPN) and DRT1-OD16X-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
4-6-4
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
4-6-5
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
122
Sensor Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
4-7-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings. . . . . . .
124
4-7-2
Transistor Input Sensor Terminals with 16 Points: DRT1-HD16S . .
125
4-7-3
Transistor I/O Sensor Terminals with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs:
DRT1-ND16S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
4-7-4
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
4-7-5
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
133
Analog I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-8-1
Node Address and Baud Rate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-8-2
Analog Input Terminals: DRT1-AD04 and DRT1-AD04H . . . . . . .
137
4-8-3
Analog Output Terminal: DRT1-DA02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
4-8-4
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
4-8-5
Wiring Internal Power Supplies and I/O Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
Temperature Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
4-9-1
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
4-9-2
Temperature Input Terminals: DRT1-TS04T and DRT1-TS04P . . .
158
4-9-3
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
4-9-4
Wiring Internal Power Supplies and I/O Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
4-10 CQM1 I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
4-10-1 Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings. . . . . . .
171
4-9
32
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies and I/O . . . . .
Remote Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10-2 CQM1 I/O Link Unit: CQM1-DRT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
4-10-3 Mounting to Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Section 4-1
Common Specifications for General-purpose Slaves
4-1
Common Specifications for General-purpose Slaves
The following table lists specifications which are common to all General-purpose Slaves. For details of specifications for each Slave, refer to the following
Slave specifications pages.
4-1-1
Item
Communications power
supply voltage
Internal power supply
voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Specifications
11 to 25 V DC (Supplied from the communications connector.)
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC, –15 to +10%)
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC, –15 to +10%)
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between isolated circuits)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
0 to 55°C
35% to 85%
Operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
No corrosive gases
–20 to 65°C
Mounting
Mounting strength
M4 screw mounting or DIN 35-mm track mounting
50 N
Track direction: 10 N
Screw tightening torque
M2 (Communications connector):
M3 (Power supply, I/O terminals):
M4 (Mounting Unit):
Pulse width: 0.1 to 1 µs
Pulse rise time: 1 ns
(via noise simulator)
0.25 to 0.3 N⋅m
0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m
0.6 to 0.98 N⋅m
Current Consumption and Weight
The following table lists the current consumption, weight, and connector lock
strength for basic Slaves.
Model
DRT1-ID08(-1)
Communications
Internal power
power supply
supply
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
Weight
135 g max.
DRT1-ID16 (-1)
DRT1-OD08(-1)
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
170 g max.
140 g max.
DRT1-OD16 (-1)
DRT1-MD16
30 mA max.
25 mA max.
50 mA max.
45 mA max.
180 g max.
170 g max.
DRT1-ID16T(-1)
DRT1-ID16TA(-1)
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-OD16T(-1)
30 mA max.
90 mA max.
315 g max.
(Same as communica- 315 g max.
tions power supply)
90 mA max.
315 g max.
DRT1-OD16TA(-1)
50 mA max.
DRT1-MD16T(-1)
30 mA max.
DRT1-MD16TA(-1)
50 mA max.
(Same as communica- 315 g max.
tions power supply)
DRT1-ID32ML(-1)
50 mA max.
(Same as communica- 110 g max.
tions power supply)
DRT1-OD32ML(-1)
90 mA max.
(Same as communica- 100 g max.
tions power supply)
(Same as communica- 315 g max.
tions power supply)
90 mA max.
315 g max.
33
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
Model
DRT1-ID16X(-1)
Communications
Internal power
Weight
power supply
supply
70 mA max.
(Same as communica- 110 g max.
tions power supply)
30 mA max.
70 mA max.
110 g max.
DRT1-OD16X (-1)
DRT1-HD16S
30 mA max.
40 mA max.
70 mA max.
60 mA max.
110 g max.
140 g max.
DRT1-ND16S
DRT1-AD04
40 mA max.
30 mA max.
60 mA max.
80 mA max.
140 g max.
160 g max.
DRT1-AD04H
DRT1-DA02
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
130 mA max.
140 mA max.
160 g max.
160 g max.
DRT1-TS04T
DRT1-TS04P
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
130 mA max.
130 mA max.
230 g max.
160 g max.
CQM1-DRT21
40 mA max.
CPM1A-DRT21
30 mA max.
80 mA max. at 5 V DC 185 g max.
(Power supplied from
the PLC’s Power Supply Unit.)
50 mA max. at 5 V DC 125 g max.
(Power supplied from
the PLC’s CPU Unit.)
DRT1-MD32ML(-1)
4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose
Slaves
Communications cables are connected to General-purpose Slaves using normal square connectors.
4-2-1
Connecting Communications Cables
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications
cables to the connectors. Although some connectors are equipped with set
screws and some are not, the methods used to connect the cables to the connectors are the same.
1,2,3...
1. Remove about 30 to 80 mm of the cable covering, being careful not to damage the shield weaving underneath. Do not remove more than necessary;
removing too much of the covering can result in short circuits.
About 30 to 80 mm
(Remove as little as possible.)
2. Carefully peel back the weaving. You will find the signal lines, power lines,
and the shielding wire. The shielding wire will be loose on the outside of
the other lines, but it is harder than the weaving and should be easily identified.
Shielding wire
34
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
3. Remove the exposed weaving, remove the aluminum tape from the signal
and power lines, and strip the covering from the signal and power lines to
the proper length for the crimp terminal connectors. Twist together the
wires of each of the signal and power lines.
Strip to match the crimp terminals
4. Attach the crimp terminals to the lines and then cover any exposed areas
of the cable and lines with electricians tape or heat-shrinking tubes.
5. Orient the connector properly, loosen the line set screws, and then insert
the lines in order: Black, blue, shield, white, and then red. The wiring method is the same regardless of whether or not the connector is equipped with
set screws.
Connector without Set Screws
Black (–V)
Connector with Set Screws
Black (–V)
Blue (CAN low)
Blue (CAN low)
Shield
Shield
White (CAN high)
Red (+V)
White (CAN high)
Red (+V)
There are colored stickers provided on the Master Unit and Slaves that match
the colors of the lines to be inserted. Be sure that the colors match when wiring the connectors. These colors are as follows:
Black
Color
Signal
Power line, negative voltage (–V)
Blue
---
Communications line, low (CAN low)
Shield
White
Red
Communications line, high (CAN high)
Power line, positive voltage (+V)
Note Be sure the line set screws are sufficiently loosened before attempting to insert the lines. If these screws are not loose, the lines will enter the gaps in the back of the connector and will not lock properly.
35
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
6. Tighten the line set screws for each line in the connector. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 0.25 to 0.3 N⋅m.
You will not be able to tighten these screws with a normal screwdriver,
which narrows to a point at the end. You will need a screwdriver that is consistently thin for the entire length.
Connector without Set Screws
Use a flat-blade screwdriver that is
consistently thin at the end.
Crimp Terminals
We recommend the following crimp terminals.
• Phoenix Contact, AI-series Crimp Terminals
Crimp
terminal
Wire
Insert the line into the terminal and then crimp.
The following crimp tool is also available.
Phoenix Contact, ZA3 Crimp Tool
The OMRON XW4Z-00C Screwdriver is available for tightening the line set
screws. The end of the screwdriver has the following dimensions.
Side View
Front View
0.6 mm
3.5 mm
• Supplying Communications Power Using T-branch Taps
Connect the V+ and V– of the power lines to the connectors in the same
way as for the communications cables. If the communications power sup-
36
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
ply is in one location only, connect a shield to the connectors when fixing
them, and ground to 100 Ω max.
T-branch Tap or Power Supply Tap
V+
CAN H
Shield
CAN L
V–
Communications
power supply
Communications
cable
Ground (100 Ω max.)
FG
V– V+
Communications
power supply
Ground (100 Ω max.)
Power supply with cable grounded
(one location only)
4-2-2
Connecting Communications Cables to the Nodes
Align the node connector with the cable connector and fully insert the projecting part of the cable connector into the node connector. Depending on the
type of Slave used, the connectors are secured with screws or a connector
band, or there is no component for securing the connectors. Always fix
securely those connectors that can be secured.
Master
Temperature
Input Terminal Output Terminal Input Terminal
C200H I/O Link Unit
RS-232C Unit
Securing Slave Connectors with Screws
Tighten the screws fixing the connectors to a torque of 0.25 to 0.3 N⋅m.
Securing Slave Connectors with Connector Bands
Use the following procedure to secure connectors with connector bands.
37
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
1,2,3...
1. Pull out the connector band from the Slave Unit.
Slave
Connector band
Slave
2. Lift up the connector band.
3. Insert the connector into the Slave Unit.
4. Wrap the connector band around the connector and secure firmly.
Note Multidrop connectors cannot be secured.
Multi-drop Connections
• Multi-drop Connections with Accessory Connector (Thin Cables Only)
The connectors provided with the Units can be used for a multi-drop connection as long as thin cables are being used, just insert both lines into
the same hole in the connector. Be sure to use crimp connectors on both
lines. The following illustration shows a multi-drop connection for a connector without set screws.
When connecting two lines to the same hole, first place them together in one
pressure-welded terminal as shown below.
Pressure-welded
terminal for 2 lines
Cables
Pressure-welded terminal: Pheonix Contacts model AI-TWIN2X0.5-8WH
(product number 3200933)
Pressure-welding tool: Pheonix Contacts model UD6 (product number
1204436)
38
Section 4-2
Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves
• Multi-drop Connections with Special Connector (Thin or Thick Cables)
A multi-drop wiring connector (sold separately) can be used to wire a
multi-drop connector for either thin or thick cables. This multi-drop wiring
connector is required to wire a multi-drop connection with thick cables,
which are too thick for two lines to fit into the connector provided with the
Units.
The multi-drop wiring connector cannot always be used with Master Units
or the CQM1 I/O Link Units because it may come into contact with the Units
mounted next to the Master Unit or the CQM1 I/O Link Unit. If this happens,
use a T-branch Tap to wire the connection.
4-2-3
Mounting Terminating Resistors
Terminating Resistors must be used at both ends of the trunk line.
Terminating Resistors
• T-branch Tap Terminating Resistors
A terminating resistor is included with the T-branch Tap. Clip the leads on
the resistor to about 3 mm and insert it into the T-branch Tap as shown in
the following diagram. The resistor can face in either direction.
• Terminal-block Terminating Resistors
A terminating resistor is built into the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor.
To connect the cable to the Terminating Resistor, attach standard M3
crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw the terminals to the
Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Tighten to a torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
6.0 mm max.
39
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
4-3
4-3-1
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
ON
Output hold/clear setting:Pin 10 (affects only outputs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs)
Node address setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Baud rate setting
Node Address Settings
The node address of the Remote I/O Terminal is set with pins 1 through 6 of
the DIP switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as
long as it isn’t already set on another node.
DIP switch setting
Node address
Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 (default)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
61
62
1
1
1
1
1
1
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
Note
Pin 7
Pin 8
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
250 kbps
Baud rate
OFF
ON
ON
ON
500 kbps
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (master and slaves) in the Network. Any slaves with baud rates different from the master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
40
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Setting Pins 9 and 10
The functions of pins 9 and 10 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the
following diagram.
Input:
Not used (Always OFF)
Output:
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 9:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 10: As follows:
Inputs:
Outputs:
OFF (Clear):
No function (Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
ON (Hold):
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 9 and 10 are factory-set to OFF.
4-3-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 8 Points:
DRT1-ID08 (NPN) and DRT1-ID08-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-ID08
NPN
Input points
ON voltage
OFF current
8 points (allocated one word in Master)
15 V DC min. (between
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V) each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V) each input terminal and G)
1 mA max.
Input current
ON delay time
10 mA max./point
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
OFF voltage
DRT1-ID08-1
PNP
41
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Components of the DRT1-ID08 and DRT1-ID08-1
Input indicators
Indicate the status of each contact. (Lit
when the input is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pins 9 and 10: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID08 Input Terminal.
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V+
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
layer
0
Photocoupler
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
1
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
V 24 V DC
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G
G
42
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID08-1
Remote Input Terminal.
V
Photocoupler
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
0
V+
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
layer
1
Photocoupler
V–
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
Photocoupler
G
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID08 Remote Input Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
–
–
+
NPN output
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Blue (black)
Black (white)
I/O power supply
Brown (red)
+
Blue (black)
–
Brown (white)
Internal circuits
power supply
Blue (black)
Wiring
Black (white)
SOURCE
24 V DC –
G
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Brown (red)
SOURCE
24 V DC +
NPN output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
43
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID08-1 Remote Input
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
–
–
+
PNP output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
I/O power supply
Black (white)
+
Black (blue)
–
Brown (white)
Internal circuits
power supply
PNP output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
1. The V terminals (terminal numbers 9 and 14) are connected internally, as
are the G terminals (terminal numbers 2 and 7). When I/O power is supplied to terminals 9 and 2, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals
14 and 7.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
2. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
44
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID08 and DRT1ID08-1 Remote Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
50 max.
(With connector attached)
125 max.
40 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
115 ± 0.3
4-3-3
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 16 Points:
DRT1-ID16 (NPN) and DRT1-ID16-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-ID16-1
Model
DRT1-ID16
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
16 points
PNP
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Input current
1 mA max.
10 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
16 points with one common
45
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Components of the DRT1-ID16 and DRT1-ID16-1
Input indicators
Indicate the status of each contact. (Lit
when the input is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pins 9 and 10: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16 Remote
Input Terminal.
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V+
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
layer
0
Photocoupler
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
46
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
V 24 V DC
V 24 V DC
1
Photocoupler
G
G
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16-1
Remote Input Terminal.
V
Photocoupler
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
0
V+
Physical
layer
DRAIN
CAN L
1
Photocoupler
V–
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
Photocoupler
G
SOURCE
24 V DC +
G
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16 Remote Input Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
–
–
+
Internal circuits
power supply
NPN output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Blue (black)
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
I/O power supply
Black (white)
+
Brown (red)
–
NPN output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
47
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16-1 Remote Input
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
–
–
+
Internal circuits
power supply
PNP output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Black (blue)
Brown
(red)
I/O power supply
Black (white)
+
Blue (black)
–
PNP output 3-wire
sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
1. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
2. The V terminals (terminal numbers 13 and 22) are connected internally, as
are the G terminals (terminal numbers 2 and 11). When I/O power is supplied to terminals 13 and 2, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals 22 and 11.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
48
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID16 and DRT1ID16-1 Remote Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
150 max.
40 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140 ± 0.3
4-3-4
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 8 Points:
DRT1-OD08 (NPN) and DRT1-OD08-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD08-1
Model
DRT1-OD08
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
PNP
8 points (Master Unit uses one word)
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
49
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Components of the DRT1-OD08 and DRT1-OD08-1
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact. (Lit
when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Mounting screw holes
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pin 9: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 10: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD08 Remote
Output Terminal.
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
CAN L
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
SOURCE
24 V DC –
V 24 V DC
V 24 V DC
0
1
Internal
circuitry
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G
50
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD08-1
Remote Output Terminal.
Photocoupler
V 24 V DC
V+
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
layer
1
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
0
Photocoupler
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G
G
Voltage
step-down
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD08 Remote Output
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
–
–
+
Internal circuits
power supply
–
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Solenoid
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 7, 9, and 14) are connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminals 9, power can be supplied to output
devices from terminals 7 and 14.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input
through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
51
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD08-1 Remote Output
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
+
G
–
–
G
+
Internal circuits
power supply
–
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Solenoid
Note The G terminals (terminal numbers 2, 7, and 14) are connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminal 2, power can be supplied to output
devices from terminals 7 and 14.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input
through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD08 and DRT1OD08-1 Remote Output Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
125 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
115 ± 0.3
52
40 max.
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
4-3-5
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 16 Points:
DRT1-OD16 (NPN) and DRT1-OD16-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD16-1
Model
DRT1-OD16
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
16 points with one common
PNP
Components of the DRT1-OD16 and DRT1-OD16-1
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact. (Lit
when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pin 9: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 10: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
53
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16 Remote
Output Terminal.
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
CAN L
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
SOURCE
24 V DC –
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
0
1
Internal
circuitry
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16-1
Remote Output Terminal.
Photocoupler
V+
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
CAN H
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
SOURCE
24 V DC –
1
Internal
circuitry
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
0
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G
G
Voltage
step-down
54
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16 Remote Output
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC 24 V DC
+
–
–
+
Internal circuits
power supply
–
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Solenoid
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 11, 13, and 22) are connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminal 13, power can be supplied to output
devices from terminals 22 and 11.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input
through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16-1 Remote Output
Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC 24 V DC
+
G
–
–
G
+
Internal circuits
power supply
–
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Solenoid
Note The G terminals (terminal numbers 2, 11, and 22) are connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminal 2, power can be supplied to output
devices from terminals 22 and 11.
When the power supply exceeds 1.2 A, the power supply should not be input
through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
55
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD16 and DRT1OD16-1 Remote Output Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
40 max.
150 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140 ± 0.3
4-3-6
Transistor Remote I/O Terminal with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs:
DRT1-MD16 (NPN)
Input Specifications
Item
56
Specification
Model
DRT1-MD16
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
8 points
ON voltage
OFF voltage
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and IN V)
5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and IN V)
OFF current
Input current
1 mA max.
10 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
DRT1-MD16
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
8 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A, between each output terminal and OUT G)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
Components
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
I/O Indicators
Indicate the status of each input and output.
The left half are for inputs; the right half are
for outputs. (Lit when the input or output is
ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pin 9: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 10: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
57
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16 Remote
I/O Terminal.
Physical layer
Photo-
Transceiver coupler
1
V+
2
3
V 24 V DC
Photocoupler
NC
DRAIN
IN
Photocoupler
TXD
CAN_H
4
0
CAN_L
RXD
5
V−
Non-isolated
power supply
5V
Photocoupler
5V
@V
5V
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
1
Internal
circuitry
To physical layer
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
.
.
.
.
G
1MS
1NS
@V
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
OUT
V 24 V DC
0
.
.
.
.
Photocoupler
.
.
.
1
G
0V
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16 Remote I/O Terminal.
SOURCE
24 V DC
24 V DC
12
1
14
IN
V
+
2
OUT
15
1
3
IN
G
−
−
IN
13
3
4
0
16
17
5
5
2
18
7
6
4
1
7
6
19
3
8
0
21
5
9
2
24 V DC
20
22
10
4
OUT
V
7
11
6
OUT
G
+
Internal circuits
power supply
−
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Power supply
for inputs
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
+
Black (white)
−
3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor
NPN output
(e.g., limit switch)
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
58
+
Power supply
for outputs
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
1. IN V is not connected internally to OUT V (terminals 13 and 22), and IN G
is not connected internally to OUT G (terminals 2 and 11). Connect them
carefully.
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
2. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-MD16 Remote I/O
Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx.73
(With connector attached)
DRT1-MD16
No.
50 max.
REMOTE TERMINAL 24VDC
MS
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
7
0
2
4
6
0
2
4
6
IN
OUT
NS
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
0
1
150 max.
40 max.
Mounting holes
40±0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140±0.3
4-3-7
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an Remote I/O Terminal
in a control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Remote I/O Terminal with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6
to 0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Remote I/O Terminal to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount
the Terminal, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with
a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then
secure the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on
both ends of the DIN Track with End Plates.
59
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Mounting Direction
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
Vertical
4-3-8
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
The internal circuit power supplies, I/O power supplies, and I/O lines are all
wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect
them to the terminal block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a
torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
60
6.0 mm max.
Section 4-3
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-ID16 Remote Input Terminal.
DRT1-ID16
No.
REMOTE TERMINAL 24VDC
−
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
+
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the I/O
power supply for a DRT1-ID16 Remote Input Terminal.
DRT1-ID16
No.
REMOTE TERMINAL 24VDC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
−
Wiring I/O
+
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block and external I/O wiring. The following
example shows the wiring to input 0 on a DRT1-ID16 Remote Input Terminal.
DRT1-ID16
REMOTE TERMINAL 24VDC
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
61
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
4-4
4-4-1
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal
Blocks
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting: Rotary switches
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 and 2
Output hold/clear setting:Pin 4 (affects only outputs)
Baud rate setting
ON
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs)
1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8
2 3
4
0 1
7 8
2 3
5 6
9
4
9
0 1
Node address setting (×1)
Node address setting (×10)
Node Address Settings
The node address of the Remote I/O Terminal is set with two rotary switches.
The 10s digit is set on the left and the 1s digit is set on the right. Any node
address within the setting range can be used as long as it isn’t already set on
another node.
Note The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 1
Note
Pin 2
Baud rate
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
250 kbps
OFF
ON
ON
ON
500 kbps
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
62
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The functions of pins 3 and 4 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the following diagram.
ON
Setting Pins 3 and 4
3 4
Input: Not used (Always OFF)
Output: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 3:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 4:
As follows:
Inputs:
Outputs:
OFF (Clear):
ON (Hold):
No function (Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 3 and 4 are factory-set to OFF.
4-4-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 16 Points and 3-tier I/O
Terminal Blocks: DRT1-ID16T (NPN) and DRT1-ID16T-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-ID16T-1
Model
DRT1-ID16T
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
16 points
PNP
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1.0 mA max.
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with two commons
63
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Components of the DRT1-ID16T and DRT1-ID16T-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
DIP switch (Refer to page 62.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Input Indicators
Indicate the input status of each contact.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DRT1-ID16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
DR0 DR1 NC NC
IN
MS
NS
Circuit removal screws.
Terminal block
Communications
connector
Internal power supply terminals
Internal Circuits
DIN track mounting hooks
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16T Remote
Input Terminal.
Photocoupler
V1 24 V DC
G1
V−
V1
CANL
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
CANH
V+
Internal
circuitry
DRAIN
Photocoupler
Input (0 to 7)
G1
V2 24 V DC
G2
SOURCE
24V DC
+
SOURCE
24V DC
−
64
I/O power
supply
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Input (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
G2
I/O power
supply
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16T-1
Remote Input Terminal.
Photocoupler
I/O power
supply
V1 24 V DC
G1
V−
V1
CANL
Physical
layer
DRAIN
Input (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
CANH
Internal
circuitry
V+
G1
Photocoupler
V2 24 V DC
I/O power
supply
G2
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
Input (8 to 15)
G2
Photocoupler
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16T Remote Input Terminal.
−
+
+
−
+
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Internal circuits
power supply
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
65
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16T-1 Remote Input
Terminal.
−
+
+
−
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
+
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Internal circuits
power supply
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully.
2. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID16T and DRT1ID16T-1 Remote Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-ID16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
IN
MS
NS
50
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
58
(83)
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
40±0.2
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-ID16T and DRT1-ID16T-1.)
66
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-3
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 16 Points and 3-tier I/O
Terminal Blocks: DRT1-ID16TA (NPN) and DRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-ID16TA
NPN
DRT1-ID16TA-1
PNP
Input points
ON voltage
16 points
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay time
1.0 mA max.
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with two commons
Components of the DRT1-ID16TA and DRT1-ID16TA-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
DIP switch (Refer to page 62.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Input indicators
Indicate the input status of each contact.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DRT1-ID16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
DR0 DR1 NC NC
IN
MS
NS
Circuit removal screws.
Communications
connector
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
67
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16TA
Remote Input Terminal.
V1 24 V DC
5
G1
V+
Photocoupler
4
V1
CAN_H
3
DRAIN
2
CAN_L
1
Physical
layer
0 to 7
G1
Internal
circuitry
V−
V2 24 V DC
G2
Photocoupler
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
8 to 15
G2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16TA-1
Remote Input Terminal.
V1 24 V DC
5
G1
V+
4
V1
CAN_H
Photocoupler
3
DRAIN
2
CAN_L
1
0 to 7
Physical
layer
G1
Internal
circuitry
V−
V2 24 V DC
G2
V2
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
8 to 15
G2
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16TA Remote Input
Terminal.
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
+
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
68
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Brown (red)
V1
15
Black (white)
V1
9
Blue (black)
V1
8
Blue (black)
7
Brown (white)
1
Brown (white)
+
0
Blue (black)
Wiring
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID16TA-1 Remote Input
Terminal.
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Brown (white)
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
+
Brown (white)
+
9
Black (white)
V1
8
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully.
2. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID16TA and
DRT1-ID16TA-1 Remote Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-ID16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
IN
MS
NS
50
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
58
(83)
Mounting holes
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
40±0.2
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC NC
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-ID16TA and DRT1-ID16TA-1.)
69
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-4
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 16 Points and 3-tier I/O
Terminal Blocks: DRT1-OD16T (NPN) and DRT1-OD16T-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD16T-1
Model
DRT1-OD16T
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.5 A/point
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with two commons
PNP
Components of the DRT1-OD16T and DRT1-OD16T-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
DIP switch (Refer to page 62.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DRT1-OD16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
MS
NS
OUT
Circuit removal screws.
Communications
connector
Internal power supply terminals
70
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16T
Remote Output Terminal.
Voltage
step-down
V1 24 V DC
Photocoupler
I/O power
supply
G1
V−
V1
CANL
DRAIN
Physical
layer
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
CANH
Photocoupler
G1
Internal
circuitry
V+
V2 24 V DC
I/O power
supply
G2
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
Voltage
step-down
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
V2
Output (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
G2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16T-1
Remote Output Terminal.
Voltage
step-down
V1 24 V DC
Photocoupler
G1
V−
I/O power
supply
V1
CANL
DRAIN
Physical
layer
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G1
CANH
Internal
circuitry
V+
Voltage
Photocoupler step-down
V2 24 V DC
G2
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
I/O power
supply
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Output (8 to 15)
G2
Photocoupler
71
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16T Remote Output
Terminal.
−
+
+
−
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
+
Internal circuits
power supply
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16T-1 Remote Output
Terminal.
−
+
+
−
+
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Internal circuits
power supply
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Note
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
72
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD16T and DRT1OD16T-1 Remote Output Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-OD16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
OUT
MS
NS
50
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
58
(83)
Mounting holes
40±0.2
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-OD16T and DRT1-OD16T-1.)
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-5
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 16 Points and 3-tier I/O
Terminal Blocks: DRT1-OD16TA (NPN) and DRT1-OD16TA-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD16TA-1
Model
DRT1-OD16TA
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.5 A/point
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points
PNP
73
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Components of the DRT1-OD16TA and DRT1-OD16TA-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
DIP switch (Refer to page 62.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DRT1-OD16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
OUT
MS
NS
Circuit removal screws.
Terminal block
Communications
connector
DIN track mounting hooks
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16TA
Remote Output Terminal.
Voltage
step-down
V1 24 V DC
Photocoupler
G1
I/O power
supply
V−
V1
CANL
DRAIN
Physical
layer
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
CANH
Photocoupler
G1
Internal
circuitry
V+
V2 24 V DC
G2
Voltage
step-down
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
V2
Output (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
G2
74
I/O power
supply
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16TA-1
Remote Output Terminal.
Voltage
step-down
V1 24 V DC
Photocoupler
G1
V−
CANL
DRAIN
I/O power
supply
V1
Physical
layer
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G1
CANH
Internal
circuitry
V+
Voltage
Photocoupler step-down
V2 24 V DC
I/O power
supply
G2
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Output (8 to 15)
G2
Photocoupler
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16TA Remote Output
Terminal.
+
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
+
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
75
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD16TA-1 Remote Output Terminal.
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
+
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Note
8
9
15
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully.
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD16T and DRT1OD16TA-1 Remote Output Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-OD16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
OUT
MS
NS
50
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
58
(83)
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
40±0.2
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-OD16TA and DRT1-OD16TA-1.)
76
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-6
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs and
3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-MD16T (NPN) and DRT1-MD16T-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-MD16T
NPN
DRT1-MD16T-1
PNP
Input points
ON voltage
8 points
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1 mA max.
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay time
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-MD16T-1
Model
DRT1-MD16T
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
8 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.5 A/point
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
PNP
77
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Components of the DRT1-MD16T and DRT1-MD16T-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
DIP switch (Refer to page 62.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
DeviceNet Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Input indicators
Indicate the input status of each
contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
DRT1-MD16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
5
6
7
ON
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
IN
MS
NS
OUT
Circuit removal screws.
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications
connector
Internal power
supply terminals
Output terminal block
Input terminal block
Internal Circuit
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16T
Remote I/O Terminal.
Photocoupler
V1 24 V DC
G1
V−
CANL
DRAIN
V1
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
CANH
Internal
circuitry
V+
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
Input (0 to 7)
G1
V2 24 V DC
G2
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
78
I/O power
supply
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G2
I/O power
supply
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16T-1
Remote I/O Terminal.
Photocoupler
V1 24 V DC
I/O power
supply
G1
V−
V1
CANL
Physical
layer
DRAIN
Input (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
CANH
Internal
circuitry
V+
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
G1
Photocoupler
V2 24 V DC
Voltage
stepdown
G2
I/O power
supply
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
Output (0 to 7)
G2
Photocoupler
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16T Remote I/O Terminal.
−
+
+
−
+
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
0
1
7
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Internal circuits
power supply
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
79
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16T-1 Remote I/O
Terminal.
−
+
+
−
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
+
+
0
1
7
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Internal circuits
power supply
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
3. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-MD16T and
DRT1-MD16T-1 Remote I/O Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-MD16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ON
IN
MS
NS
50
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
OUT
13
14
15
58
(83)
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
40±0.2
Mounting holes
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-MD16T and DRT1-MD16T-1.)
80
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-7
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs and
3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks:
DRT1-MD16TA (NPN) and DRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-MD16TA-1
Model
DRT1-MD16TA
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
8 points
PNP
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1.0 mA max.
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Input current
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-MD16TA-1
Model
DRT1-MD16TA
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
8 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.5 A/point
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
PNP
81
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Components of the DRT1-MD16TA and DRT1-MD16TA-1
Rotary switches (Refer to page 62.)
Set the node address.
(Refer to page 62.)
DIP switch
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
DeviceNet Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Input indicators
Indicate the output status of each
contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
DRT1-MD16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
5
6
7
ON
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
IN
MS
NS
OUT
Circuit removal screws.
Communications
connector
DIN track mounting hooks
Input terminal block
Internal Circuits
Output terminal block
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16TA
Remote I/O Terminal.
V1 24 V DC
5
V+
G1
Photocoupler
4
CAN_H
V1
3
DRAIN
2
CAN_L
1
Physical
layer
0 to 7
Voltage
step-down
Internal
circuitry
V−
V2 24 V DC
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G1
G2
V2
0 to 7
G2
82
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16TA-1
Remote I/O Terminal.
V1 24 V DC
5
G1
V+
4
CAN_H
DRAIN
2
CAN_L
1
V1
Photocoupler
3
Physical
layer
0 to 7
G1
Internal
circuitry
V−
Voltage
stepdown
V2 24 V DC
G2
V2
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Photocoupler
0 to 7
G2
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16TA Remote I/O
Terminal
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
0
1
7
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
+
Blue (black)
+
0
Brown (white)
Wiring
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
83
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16TA-1 Remote I/O
Terminal.
0
1
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
G1
G1
G1
G1
−
1
7
V2
V2
V2
V2
G2
G2
G2
G2
−
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
+
Brown (white)
+
0
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
2-wire sensor
3-wire sensor with
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
1. V1 is not connected internally to V2, and G1 is not connected internally to
G2. Connect them carefully
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
3. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-MD16TA and
DRT1-MD16TA-1 Remote I/O Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
180
DRT1-MD16TA
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ON
IN
MS
NS
50
(54)
DR0 DR1 NC HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
OUT
13
14
15
58
(83)
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
40±0.2
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
170±0.2
Note The circuit section can be removed by loosening the circuit removal screws.
(Refer to Components of the DRT1-MD16TA and DRT1-MD16TA-1.)
84
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
Always turn OFF the communications, internal, and I/O power supplies before
removing or attaching the circuit section.
4-4-8
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an Remote I/O Terminal
in a control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Remote I/O Terminal with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6
to 0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Remote I/O Terminal to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount
the Terminal, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with
a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then
secure the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on
both ends of the DIN Track with End Plates.
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
85
Section 4-4
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
10
11
12
13
14
15
14
15
13
9
14
8
IN
7
12
6
13
Vertical
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
11
15
0
11
7
12
10
IN
0
6
15
5
14
5
15
MS
NS
13
4
14
12
4
13
11
3
12
10
3
11
9
2
10
8
2
9
1
8
7
1
7
6
0
6
5
0
5
4
MS
NS
4
3
ON
3
2
ON
1
DR0 DR1 NC NC
2
IN
0
DRT1-ID16T
1
MS
NS
DR0 DR1 NC NC
0
ON
DR0 DR1 NC NC
DRT1-ID16T
DRT1-ID16T
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
15
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
Mounting Direction
2
9
2
8
1
10
9
1
3
8
3
4
7
7
4
5
6
6
5
6
5
5
6
7
3
9
10
1
8
2
3
8
2
4
4
7
11
0
1
9
0
10
ON
DR0 DR1 NC NC
15
DRT1-ID16T
14
15
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
13
14
IN
12
13
MS
NS
11
12
4-4-9
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
The internal circuit power supplies, I/O power supplies, and I/O lines are all
wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect
them to the terminal block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a
torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
6.0 mm max.
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-ID16T Remote Input Terminal
DRT1-ID16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
DR0
−
+
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
IN
MS
NS
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the I/O
power supply for a DRT1-ID16T Remote Input Terminal.
DRT1-ID16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ON
−
86
IN
MS
NS
DR0
+
15
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Wiring I/O
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block and external I/O wiring. The following
example shows the wiring to input 0 on a DRT1-ID16T Remote Input Terminal.
DRT1-ID16T
0
REMOTE TERMINAL DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
IN
MS
NS
DR0
Brown
(white)
4-5
4-5-1
Blue
(black)
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Rotary switch on top panel
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 and 2 on DIP switch on bottom panel
Output hold/clear setting: Pin 4 on DIP switch on bottom panel
(affects only outputs)
Node address setting (×10)
Node address setting (×1)
7 8
4
1
5 6
5 6
O
N
0 1
2 3
Bottom panel
9
2 3
7 8
0 1
2
3
4
4
9
Top panel
(Illustration shows factory settings: All OFF.)
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs) only)
Reserved: Always OFF
Baud rate setting
Node Address Settings
The node address of the Remote I/O Terminal is set with two rotary switches.
The 10s digit is set on the left and the 1s digit is set on the right. Any node
address within the setting range can be used as long as it isn’t already set on
another node.
Note The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
87
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 1
Note
Pin 2
Baud rate
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
The functions of pins 3 and 4 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the following diagram.
ON
Setting Pins 3 and 4
3
4
Input: Not used (Always OFF)
Output: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 3:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 4:
As follows:
Inputs:
Outputs:
OFF (Clear):
ON (Hold):
No function (Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 3 and 4 are factory-set to OFF.
4-5-2
Transistor Remote Input Terminals with 32 Points and
Connectors: DRT1-ID32ML (NPN) and DRT1-ID32ML-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
DRT1-ID32ML
NPN
DRT1-ID32ML-1
PNP
Input points
ON voltage
32 points
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1.0 mA max.
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
88
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
Input impedance
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
4.4 kΩ
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Item
Max. simultaneously ON
input points
32 points (See note.)
Specification
Number of circuits
32 points with one common
Note All 32 inputs can be ON simultaneously if the Remote I/O Terminal is mounted
facing up, but sufficient space will need to be allowed between Units depending on the ambient temperature. Refer to the Dimensions diagram on page
page 93 for details.
Components of the DRT1-ID32ML and DRT1-ID32ML-1
DeviceNet indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Indicate the status of the Slave, communications,
and inputs (lit when input is ON).
Top panel
Front panel
Rotary switches
(Refer to page 87.)
Set the node address.
Bottom panel
DIN track
mounting hooks
Communications
connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 87.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Input connector (MIL)
Connects the 32 inputs via a MIL connector. The MIL cable is sold separately.
Input Indicators
Name
I0 to I15
II0 to II15
Meaning
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word m. Lit
when input is ON; not lit when input is OFF.
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word m+1. Lit
when input is ON; not lit when input is OFF.
Note “m” is the first word allocated to the Remote Input Terminal.
89
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID32ML
Remote Input Terminal.
V−
CANL
DRAIN
V+
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
V
Input
Photocoupler
G
Input
Photocoupler
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID32ML-1
Remote Input Terminal.
V−
CANL
DRAIN
V+
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
G
Input
Photocoupler
V
Input
Photocoupler
90
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID32ML Remote Input
Terminal.
24 V DC
Wd m Wd m
08 39
40 00
Wd m Wd m
09 37
38 01
Wd m Wd m
10 35
36 02
Wd m Wd m
11 33
34 03
Wd m Wd m
12 31
32 04
Wd m Wd m
13 29
30 05
Wd m Wd m
14 27
28 06
Wd m Wd m
15 25
26 07
24 G
22
G 23
V
V
Wd
m+1
00
Wd
m+1
01
Wd
m+1
02
Wd
m+1
03
Wd
m+1
04
Wd
m+1
05
Wd
m+1
06
Wd
m+1
07
Wd
m+1
08
Wd
m+1
09
Wd
m+1
10
Wd
m+1
11
Wd
m+1
12
Wd
m+1
13
Wd
m+1
14
Wd
m+1
15
4
G
G
3
2
V
V
1
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
91
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID32ML-1 Remote Input
Terminal.
24 V DC
Wd m Wd m
08 39
40 00
Wd m Wd m
09 37
38 01
Wd m Wd m
10 35
36 02
Wd m Wd m
11 33
34 03
Wd m Wd m
12 31
32 04
Wd m Wd m
13 29
30 05
Wd m Wd m
14 27
28 06
Wd m Wd m
15 25
26 07
24 G
V
Wd
m+1
00
Wd
m+1
01
Wd
m+1
02
Wd
m+1
03
Wd
m+1
04
Wd
m+1
05
Wd
m+1
06
Wd
m+1
07
Wd
m+1
08
Wd
m+1
09
Wd
m+1
10
Wd
m+1
11
Wd
m+1
12
Wd
m+1
13
Wd
m+1
14
Wd
m+1
15
4
G
G
3
2
V
V
1
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
Note
G 23
V
22
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
1. V terminals are not connected internally, and G terminals are not connected internally. Connect them carefully.
2. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
I/O Allocations
The first word allocated to the Remote Input Terminal is referred to as “word
m.” Given this, the bit and word allocations to MIL connector pin numbers are
as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
Wd m
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Wd m+1 5
92
7
9
11 13 15 17 19
6
8
10 12 14 16 18 20
16 inputs
16 inputs
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID32ML and
DRT1-ID32ML-1 Remote Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
(83)
60
5
80
27.8
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
35
Note There are restriction when using the 32-point Transistor Remote Input Terminals with Connectors depending on the ambient operating temperature.
• If the Terminals are not mounted facing up, they can be mounted side-byside and all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously at 55°C or less.
• If the Terminals are mounted facing up, the distances and temperatures in
the graph given below must be maintained to enable turning ON all inputs
simultaneously. For example, at an ambient temperature of 55°C, the Terminals must be separated by at least 10 mm.
L
Distance between
Units L (mm)
L
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
Ambient operating temp. (°C)
4-5-3
Transistor Remote Output Terminals with 32 Points and
Connectors: DRT1-OD32ML (NPN) and DRT1-OD32ML-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-OD32ML
NPN
DRT1-OD32ML-1
PNP
Output points
Rated output current
32 points
0.3 A/point, 4 A/common (see note)
Residual voltage
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
93
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Item
Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
Specification
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
32 points with one common
Note Do not allow the total load current to exceed 4 A and do not allow the load current on either the V or G terminal to exceed 1 A.
Components of the DRT1-OD32ML and DRT1-OD32ML-1
DeviceNet indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Indicate the status of the Slave, communications,
and outputs (lit when output is ON).
Top panel
Front panel
Rotary switches
(Refer to page 87.)
Set the node address.
DIN track
mounting hooks
Communications
connector
Bottom panel
DIP switch (Refer to page 87.)
Pins1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Output connector (MIL)
Connects the 32 outputs via a MIL connector. The MIL cable is sold separately.
Output Indicators
Name
Meaning
I0 to I15
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word m. Lit
when output is ON; not lit when output is OFF.
II0 to II15
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word m+1. Lit
when output is ON; not lit when output is OFF.
Note “m” is the first word allocated to the Remote Output Terminal.
94
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD32ML
Remote Output Terminal.
Voltage
step-down
V−
CANL
V1
CAN H
V+
Internal
circuitry
DRAIN
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G
Output (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD32ML-1
Remote Output Terminal.
V−
CANL
V
DRAIN
CAN H
V+
Internal
circuitry
Internal Circuits
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G
Voltage
step-down
Output (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
95
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD32ML Remote Output
Terminal.
24 V DC
L
40 00
Wd m Wd m
08 39
L
L
Wd m Wd m
38 01
09 37
L
L
36 02
Wd m Wd m
10 35
L
L
Wd m Wd m
34 03
11 33
L
L
32 04
Wd m Wd m
12 31
L
L
30 05
Wd m Wd m
13 29
L
L
Wd m Wd m
28 06
14 27
L
L
26 07
Wd m Wd m
15 25
L
24 G
22
96
G 23
V
V
Wd
m+1
00
Wd
m+1
01
Wd
m+1
02
Wd
m+1
03
Wd
m+1
04
Wd
m+1
05
Wd
m+1
06
Wd
m+1
07
Wd
m+1
08
Wd
m+1
09
Wd
m+1
10
Wd
m+1
11
Wd
m+1
12
Wd
m+1
13
Wd
m+1
14
Wd
m+1
15
4
G
G
3
2
V
V
1
L
20
L
18
L
16
L
14
L
12
L
10
L
8
L
6
21
19
L
17
L
15
L
13
L
11
L
9
L
7
L
5
L
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD32ML-1 Remote Output Terminal.
24 V DC
L
40 00
Wd m Wd m
08 39
L
L
Wd m Wd m
38 01
09 37
L
L
36 02
Wd m Wd m
10 35
L
L
Wd m Wd m
34 03
11 33
L
L
32 04
Wd m Wd m
12 31
L
L
30 05
Wd m Wd m
13 29
L
L
Wd m Wd m
28 06
14 27
L
L
26 07
Wd m Wd m
15 25
L
24 G
22
Note
G 23
V
V
Wd
m+1
00
Wd
m+1
01
Wd
m+1
02
Wd
m+1
03
Wd
m+1
04
Wd
m+1
05
Wd
m+1
06
Wd
m+1
07
Wd
m+1
08
Wd
m+1
09
Wd
m+1
10
Wd
m+1
11
Wd
m+1
12
Wd
m+1
13
Wd
m+1
14
Wd
m+1
15
4
G
G
3
2
V
V
1
L
20
L
18
L
16
L
14
L
12
L
10
L
8
L
6
21
19
L
17
L
15
L
13
L
11
L
9
L
7
L
5
L
1. The V terminals are connected internally, as are the G terminals. When the
power supply exceeds 1.0 A per terminal or the total current drawn by the
external loads exceeds 4 A, the output power supply should not be input
through the terminals; an external power supply must be used instead.
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
I/O Allocations
The first word allocated to the Remote Output Terminal is referred to as “word
m.” Given this, the bit and word allocations to MIL connector pin numbers are
as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
Wd m
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Wd m+1 5
7
9
11 13 15 17 19
6
8
10 12 14 16 18 20
16 outputs
16 outputs
97
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD32ML and
DRT1-OD32ML-1 Remote Output Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
(83)
60
5
80
27.8
35
4-5-4
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs
and Connectors: DRT1-MD32ML (NPN) and DRT1-MD32ML-1
(PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
98
Specification
DRT1-MD32ML-1
Model
DRT1-MD32ML
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
16 points
PNP
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Input current
1.0 mA max.
6.0 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3.0 mA min./point at 17 V DC
Input impedance
ON delay time
4.4 kΩ
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Max. No. of ON inputs
1.5 ms max.
16 points
Number of circuits
16 points with one common
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-MD32ML-1
Model
DRT1-MD32ML
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.3 A/point, 2 A/common (see note)
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
16 points with one common
PNP
Note Do not allow the total load current to exceed 2 A and do not allow the load current on either the V or G terminal to exceed 1 A.
Components of the DRT1-MD32ML and DRT1-MD32ML-1
DeviceNet indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Indicate the status of the Slave, communications,
and I/O (lit when I/O is ON, I = inputs, II = outputs).
Top panel
Front panel
Rotary switches
(Refer to page 87.)
Set the node address.
DIN track
mounting hooks
Communications
connector
Bottom panel
DIP switch (Refer to page 87.)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
(for outputs only)
I/O connector (MIL)
Connects the 16 inputs and 16 outputs via a MIL
connector. The MIL cable is sold separately.
I/O Indicators
Name
I0 to I15
II0 to II15
Meaning
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word m. Lit
when input is ON; not lit when input is OFF.
Indicate the status of bits (contacts) 0 to 15 in word n. Lit when
output is ON; not lit when output is OFF.
Note m: The first word allocated for the Remote I/O Terminal’s IN Area.
n: The first word allocated for the Remote I/O Terminal’s OUT Area.
99
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD32ML
Remote I/O Terminal.
V−
CANL
DRAIN
V+
V1
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
Input
G1
V2
Output
Photocoupler
G2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD32ML-1
Remote I/O Terminal.
V−
CANL
DRAIN
G1
V+
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
Input
Photocoupler
V1
V2
Output
Photocoupler
G2
Voltage
step-down
100
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD32ML Remote I/O
Terminal.
24 V DC
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
IN
00
IN
01
IN
02
IN
03
IN
04
IN
05
IN
06
IN
07
24 G1
22 V1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
OUT
20
00
OUT
18
01
OUT
16
02
OUT
14
03
OUT
12
04
OUT
10
05
OUT
8
06
OUT
6
07
IN
08
IN
09
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
G1 23
V1 21
OUT
08
OUT
09
OUT
10
OUT
11
OUT
12
OUT
13
OUT
14
OUT
15
19
L
17
L
15
L
13
L
11
L
9
L
7
L
5
L
4 G2
G2 3
2 V2
V2 1
101
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD32ML-1 Remote I/O
Terminal.
24 V DC
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
IN
00
IN
01
IN
02
IN
03
IN
04
IN
05
IN
06
IN
07
24 G1
22 V1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Note
OUT
00
OUT
18
01
OUT
16
02
OUT
14
03
OUT
12
04
OUT
10
05
OUT
8
06
OUT
6
07
20
IN
08
IN
09
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
G1 23
V1 21
OUT
08
OUT
09
OUT
10
OUT
11
OUT
12
OUT
13
OUT
14
OUT
15
19
L
17
L
15
L
13
L
11
L
9
L
7
L
5
L
4 G2
G2 3
2 V2
V2 1
1. The V1 terminals are connected internally, as are the V2 terminals, the G1,
and the G2 terminals. (V1 is not connected to V2 and G1 is not connected
to G2.) When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A per terminal or the total current drawn by the external loads exceeds 2 A, the output power supply
should not be input through the terminals; an external power supply must
be used instead.
2. When using inductive loads (such as solenoids or valves), use a load with
a built-in diode to absorb reverse power or attach a diode externally.
3. Line colors have been changed accompanying changes in JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. Previous colors are given in parentheses.
I/O Allocations
The first word allocated to the Remote I/O Terminal is referred to as “word m.”
Given this, the bit and word allocations to MIL connector pin numbers are as
shown in the following diagram.
Bit
102
Wd m
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
16 inputs
Wd n
5
16 outputs
7
9
11 13 15 17 19
6
8
10 12 14 16 18 20
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-MD32ML and
DRT1-MD32ML-1 Remote I/O Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
(83)
60
5
80
27.8
Values in parentheses
are reference values.
35
Note There are restriction when using the 32-point Transistor Remote I/O Terminals
with Connectors depending on the ambient operating temperature.
• If the Terminals are not mounted facing up, they can be mounted side-byside and all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously at 55°C or less.
• If the Terminals are mounted facing up, the distances and temperatures in
the graph given below must be maintained to enable turning ON all inputs
simultaneously. For example, at an ambient temperature of 55°C, the Terminals must be separated by at least 10 mm.
L
Distance between
Units L (mm)
L
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
Ambient operating temp. (°C)
4-5-5
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following three methods can be used to mount an Remote I/O
Terminal in a control panel.
• Mounting to DIN Track (page 104)
• Mounting perpendicular to a panel using a Mounting Bracket (page 105)
• Mounting parallel to a panel using a Mounting Bracket (page 106)
Note
1. There are restriction when using the 32-point Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors or 32-point Transistor Remote Input Terminals with
Connectors depending on the ambient operating temperature.
103
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
• If the Terminals are not mounted facing up, they can be mounted side-byside and all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously at 55°C or less.
• If the Terminals are mounted facing up, the distances and temperatures in
the graph given below must be maintained to enable turning ON all inputs
simultaneously. For example, at an ambient temperature of 55°C, the Terminals must be separated by at least 10 mm.
L
Distance between
Units L (mm)
L
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
Ambient operating temp. (°C)
2. Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors cannot be mounted to a control
panel with just screws; the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B (sold separately) must be used.
Mounting to DIN Track
Mount the back of the Remote I/O Terminal to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount
the Terminal, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with
a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then
secure the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on
both ends of the DIN Track with End Plates.
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
104
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Mounting Perpendicular to
a Panel Using a Mounting
Bracket
A Remote I/O Terminal with a Connector can be mounted perpendicular to a
panel by using the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B (sold separately).
Panel surface
Mounted
perpendicular
to panel
Mounting
Bracket B
Mounting Method
Use the following procedure to mounted the Remote I/O Terminal.
1. Mount the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B to the wall using two Phillip’s
screws as shown below. Refer to page 107 for mounting dimensions.
2. Mount the Remote I/O Terminal to the Mounting Bracket B. The Mounting
Bracket B is shaped like a DIN Track. Use the same mounting procedure
as for DIN Track.
Mounting Holes and Slave Center Line
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
Center of mounting holes
5
16±0.2
1,2,3...
Center of Slave
Unit: mm
105
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Mounting Parallel to a
Panel Using a Mounting
Bracket
A Remote I/O Terminal with a Connector can be mounted parallel to a panel
by using the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B (sold separately).
Note A multi-drop DeviceNet connector cannot be used if the Remote I/O Terminal
is mounted parallel to the panel.
Panel surface
Mounted
parallel to a
panel
Mounting
Bracket B
Mounting Method
Use the following procedure to mounted the Remote I/O Terminal.
1,2,3...
1. Mount the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B to the wall using two Phillip’s
screws as shown below. Refer to page 107 for mounting dimensions.
2. Mount the Remote I/O Terminal to the Mounting Bracket B. The Mounting
Bracket B is shaped like a DIN Track. Use the same mounting procedure
as for DIN Track.
Mounting Holes and Slave Center Line
Center of mounting holes
5
16±0.2
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
Center of Slave
Unit: mm
106
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Mounting Direction
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
Vertical
45 mm
35 mm
Mounted to DIN Track
DIN track
4 mm
35 mm
Mounted to Perpendicular to a Panel
45 mm
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting
Bracket B
3.3 mm
107
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
45 mm
35 mm
Mounted to Parallel to a Panel
Mounting
Bracket B
0.1 mm
Mounting Bracket
Dimensions
The dimensions of the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B are shown below.
7.3
32.5
Mounting holes
35
16±0.2
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
4-5-6
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies and I/O
Internal power is supplied together with the communications power supply
and does not need to be wired separately. I/O power supplies and I/O are
wired through the I/O MIL connector.
Connecting to I/O
Terminals Using OMRON
MIL Cables
Slave
DRT1-ID32ML
DRT1-OD32ML
108
The MIL Cables listed in the following table are available to connect OMRON
I/O Terminals (e.g., I/O Relay Blocks). Select the MIL Cable that matches the
Remote I/O Terminal and the I/O Terminal.
MIL Cable
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
I/O Relay Block or other I/O
Terminal
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-OC08/OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
Remarks
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Slave
MIL Cable
I/O Relay Block or other I/O
Terminal
Inputs: G7TC-ID16/IA16
Outputs: G7TC-OC08/OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
Remarks
DRT1-MD32ML
G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm)
DRT1-ID32ML-1
G79-I50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D2 (75 cm)
G70A-ZIM16-5
---
DRT1-OD32ML-1
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
---
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm)
G7TC-OC16-4
M7F
Inputs: G70A-ZIM16-5
Outputs: G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
---
DRT1-MD32ML-1
I/O are distinguished by color.
Input tube color: Red
Output tube color: Yellow
I/O are distinguished by color.
Input tube color: Red
Output tube color: Yellow
The following cables are also available with a MIL connector on the Remote I/
O Terminal end and loose wires on the other end.
MIL Cable
Remarks
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m)
Loose wire size: AWG28
Loose wires are cut.
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m)
G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
Forked terminals are attached to the loose wires.
Forked terminals: 161071-M2 (Nippon Terminal)
The MIL pin numbers, loose wire colors, dot markings, and dot colors are
listed in the following table.
Pin
No.
Core
color
Dot
marking
■
Dot color
Pin
No.
Core
color
Black
Red
21
22
Light
brown
Dot
marking
■■■
Dot color
1
2
Light
brown
3
4
Yellow
Black
Red
23
24
Yellow
Black
Red
5
6
Light
green
Black
Red
25
26
Light
green
Black
Red
7
8
Gray
Black
Red
27
28
Gray
Black
Red
9
10
White
Black
Red
29
30
White
Black
Red
11
12
Light
brown
Black
Red
31
32
Light
brown
13
14
Yellow
Black
Red
33
34
Yellow
Black
Red
15
16
Light
green
Black
Red
35
36
Light
green
Black
Red
17
18
Gray
Black
Red
37
38
Gray
Black
Red
19
20
White
Black
Red
39
40
White
Black
Red
■■
■■■■
Black
Red
Black
Red
109
Section 4-5
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals with Connectors
Using Pressure-welded
Flat Cable Connectors
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to prepare flat cables with XG4M-4030-T MIL
Connectors.
1. Use precision screwdrivers to open the hooks on both ends and separate
the contacts from the cover of the MIL socket. There are two tabs on each
end of the contact side of the socket. Release both of these at the same
time, not one at a time.
2. Place the flat cable between the contacts and cover of the socket, align the
contacts, and press on the cover to lock it in place on the contacts. Use a
vise or similar device to firmly press the cover on until the tabs are properly
joined.
Applicable Wires: 1.27-mm pitch flat cable, AWG28 (7-strand wire)
UL2651: Standard Cable, UL20012: Stranded Cable, UL20028: Color
Coded Cable
3. If required, fold the back over the connector, and insert and lock a strain
relief in place.
4. Connect the MIL Connector to a Remote I/O Terminal with a Connector.
Using Loose Wires with
Pressure-welded
Connectors
Note
110
Use the following parts to prepare cables. The Socket used depends on the
wire size.
Part
Socket
Cable wire size: AWG24
XG5M-4032-N
Semi-cover
(See note 1.)
XG5S-2001
Hood Cover
(See note 2.)
XG5S-5022
Cable wire size: AWG26 to 26
XG5M-4035-N
1. Two Semi-covers are required for each connector.
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
2. A multi-drop DeviceNet Connector cannot be used if the Hood Cover is
used.
Refer to the PCB Relays Catalog (X33) for details on the XG5 Loose Wire
Pressure-welded Connectors.
4-6
4-6-1
Remote Adapters
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
ON
Output hold/clear setting:Pin 10 (affects only outputs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs)
Node address setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Baud rate setting
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Pin 6
DIP switch setting
Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Node address
Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 (default)
1
0
1
0
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
62
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Baud rate
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
111
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
The functions of pins 9 and 10 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the
following diagram.
ON
Setting Pins 9 and 10
9 10
Input: Not used (Always OFF)
Output: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 9:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 10: As follows:
Inputs:
Outputs:
OFF (Clear):
ON (Hold):
No function (Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 9 and 10 are factory-set to OFF.
4-6-2
Remote Input Adapters with 16 Points:
DRT1-ID16X (NPN) and DRT1-ID16X-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
112
Specification
DRT1-ID16X-1
Model
DRT1-ID16X
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
PNP
16 points (Try to use fewer than 8 points over an average
5 minute time span.)
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Input current
0.8 mA max.
10 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
9 ms max.
14.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Components of the DRT1-ID16X and DRT1-ID16X-1
DeviceNet Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
MIL socket flat cable connector
Connect the input power supply and input
devices such as switches and sensors
through an MIL-type flat cable connector.
Power supply terminals
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pins 9 and 10: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16X Remote
Input Adapter.
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V0 24 V DC
V+
0
CAN H
1
DRAIN
CAN L
Physical
Photolayer
coupler
Photocoupler
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Internal
circuitry
V–
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G0
Photocoupler
V1 24 V DC
8
9
Photocoupler
G1
113
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID16X-1
Remote Input Adapter.
Photocoupler
V0
Photocoupler
0
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
Physical
layer
1
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
CAN L
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Internal
circuitry
V–
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G0
V1
Photocoupler
8
9
Photocoupler
G1
Wiring of the DRT1-ID16X (NPN)
Connector Pin Allocation
TOP VIEW
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Internal Circuits Power Supply
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
–
+
–
Internal circuits
power supply
114
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Input Devices
Use a printed circuit board to wire I/O devices to a flat cable MIL plug which
can be connected to the Remote Adapter.
Brown
(red)
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity sensor) Black
(white)
Blue
(black)
Top View
Brown
(white)
Blue
(black)
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
I/O power supply
–
+
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
Wiring of the DRT1-ID16X-1 (PNP)
Connector Pin Allocation
TOP VIEW
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Internal Circuits Power Supply
SOURCE
24 V DC
–
+
+
–
Internal circuits
power supply
115
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Input Devices
Use a printed circuit board to wire I/O devices to a flat cable MIL plug which
can be connected to the Remote Adapter.
Brown
(red)
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity sensor) Black
(white)
Blue
(black)
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
I/O power supply
Top View
Brown
(white)
Blue
(black)
–
▲ Triangle mark
+
Connector pin No.
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID16X and DRT1ID16X-1 Remote Input Adapters. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
50 max.
(With connector attached)
12
Flat cable length: Approx. 60
85 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
75 ± 0.3
116
40 max.
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
4-6-3
Remote Output Adapters with 16 Points:
DRT1-OD16X (NPN) and DRT1-OD16X-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD16X-1
Model
DRT1-OD16X
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
30 mA/point
1.2 V max. (30 mA DC,
1.2 V max. (30 mA DC,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
PNP
Components of the DRT1-OD16X and DRT1-OD16X-1
DeviceNet Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
MIL socket flat cable connector
Connect the output power supply
and output devices such as relays
and indicators through an MIL-type
flat cable connector.
Power supply terminals
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pin 9: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 10: Hold/clear outputs for communications error
117
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16X
Remote Output Adapter.
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V0 24 V DC
V+
0
CAN H
DRAIN
CAN L
1
Physical
Photolayer
coupler
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Internal
circuitry
V–
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
G0
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
V1 24 V DC
8
9
Photocoupler
G1
118
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD16X-1
Remote Output Adapter.
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
Physical
layer
CAN L
Photocoupler
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Voltage
step-down
Internal
circuitry
V–
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
Wiring of the DRT1-OD16X (NPN)
Connector Pin Allocation
TOP VIEW
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Internal Circuits Power Supply
SOURCE
24 V DC
–
+
+
–
Internal circuits
power supply
119
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Output Devices
Use a printed circuit board to wire I/O devices to a flat cable MIL plug which
can be connected to the Remote Adapter.
TOP VIEW
Relay
LED indicator
I/O power supply
–
▲ Triangle mark
+
Connector pin No.
Note The G70D, NPN-output G7TC, and G70A can also be connected to the
Remote Adapter, but the PNP-output G7TC and Input G7TC can’t be connected because the power supply’s polarity is reversed. (Reversing the power
supply polarity can damage the Remote Adapter.)
Wiring of the DRT1-OD16X-1 (PNP)
Connector Pin Allocation
TOP VIEW
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Internal Circuits Power Supply
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
–
+
–
Internal circuits
power supply
120
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Output Devices
Use a printed circuit board to wire I/O devices to a flat cable MIL plug which
can be connected to the Remote Adapter.
TOP VIEW
Relay
LED indicator
I/O power supply
–
+
▲ Triangle mark
Connector pin No.
Note The G70D, NPN-output G7TC, and G70A can also be connected to the
Remote Adapter, but the PNP-output G7TC and Input G7TC can’t be connected because the power supply’s polarity is reversed. (Reversing the power
supply polarity can damage the Remote Adapter.)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD16X and
DRT1-OD16X-1 Remote Output Adapters. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
50 max.
(With connector attached)
12
Flat cable length: Approx. 60
85 max.
40 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
75 ± 0.3
121
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
4-6-4
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an Remote Adapter in a
control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Remote Adapter with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6 to
0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Remote Adapter to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount the
Adapter, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with a
screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then secure
the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on both ends
of the DIN Track with End Plates.
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
Vertical
No.
IN
No.
No.
IN
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-ID16X
NS
IN
NS
MS
NS
REMOTE ADAPTER 24VDC
MS
MS
DRT1-ID16X
REMOTE ADAPTER 24VDC
REMOTE ADAPTER 24VDC
Mounting Direction
No.
DRT1-ID16X
NS
MS
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
The internal circuit power supplies, I/O power supplies, and I/O lines are all
wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect
them to the terminal block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a
torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
122
REMOTE ADAPTER 24VDC
IN
4-6-5
6.0 mm max.
Section 4-6
Remote Adapters
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-ID16X Remote Input Adapter.
DRT1-ID16X
No.
REMOTE ADAPTER 24VDC
MS
NS
+
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
−
The I/O power supply and I/O are wired through the MIL socket on the I/O flat
cable connector. An MIL connector for an I/O Relay Block or PCB can be connected.
Connecting to I/O Relay Blocks
The MIL socket on the flat cable connector on the Remote Adapter can be
connected directly to the connector on an OMRON I/O Relay Block.The
Remote Adapter-I/O Relay Block combinations that can be connected are
listed in the following table.
Remote Adapter
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-OD16X
Note
I/O Relay Block
G7TC-ID16-5
G7TC-IA16-5
G7TC-OC08
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16
G70D-FOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3
1. Connection is also possible to manifold solenoid valves from Koganei or
CKD.
2. The DRT1-ID16X-1 cannot be connected to an I/O Relay Block.
Connecting to PCB MIL Connectors
The MIL socket on the flat cable connector on the Remote Adapter can be
connected to I/O devices connected to a PCB by connecting a MIL connector
to the PCB. The PCB MIL connectors that can be used are listed in the following table.
MIL Connector
XG4A-2031
Remarks
DIP straight terminals
XG4A-2034
DIP right-angle terminals
123
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
4-7
4-7-1
Sensor Terminals
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
ON
Output hold/clear setting: Pin 10 on DIP switch on bottom panel
(affects only outputs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs)
Node address setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Baud rate setting
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
DIP switch setting
Node address
Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 (default)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
61
62
1
1
1
1
1
1
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 7
Note
Pin 8
Baud rate
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
250 kbps
OFF
ON
ON
ON
500 kbps
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incor-
124
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
rect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
Setting Pins 9 and 10
The functions of pins 9 and 10 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the
following diagram.
Input:
Not used (Always OFF)
Output:
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 9:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 10: As follows:
Inputs:
No function (Always OFF)
Outputs:
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
OFF (Clear): All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
ON (Hold):
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 9 and 10 are factory-set to OFF.
4-7-2
Transistor Input Sensor Terminals with 16 Points: DRT1-HD16S
Input Specifications
Item
Input points
ON voltage
OFF voltage
Specification
16 NPN points
12 V DC min. (between each input terminal and VCC, the
external sensor power supply)
4 V DC max. (between each input terminal and VCC, the
external sensor power supply)
OFF current
Input current
1.0 mA max.
10 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.0 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
125
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Components
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Power supply terminals
I/O indicators
Indicate the status of each contact. (Lit when the input or output is ON.)
Word address
Indicates the word which the
sensor uses.
I/O connectors
Connect the special connectors from the sensors here.
(The special connectors are attached to the sensor's cable.)
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
Pin 9 and 10: Reserved (Always OFF.)
126
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-HD16S Sensor
Terminal.
V
G
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Non-isolated
power supply
IN-A
Internal
circuitry
CAN L
IN-B
V
Terminals for
one sensor
G
Isolated
power
supply
Wiring
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring for the Sensor Terminal’s Connector
Pin
Function
1
IN-A (inputs)
2
3
IN-B (inputs)
VCC (V) (external sensor power supply, +terminal)
4
GND (G) (external sensor power supply, –terminal)
The bit in the DeviceNet I/O area depends on the word address where the
sensor is connected, as shown in the following table.
Word address
0
0
IN-A bit
8
IN-B bit
1
2
1
2
9
10
3
4
3
4
11
12
5
6
5
6
13
14
7
7
15
127
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Wiring Example
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
–
+
–
Sensor
3-wire sensor
(without
self-diagnostic
output function)
Sensor
3-wire sensor
(with
self-diagnostic
output
function)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Orange (orange)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Black (white)
Brown (red)
Internal circuits
power supply
Sensor
2-wire sensor
(without
self-diagnostic
output
function)
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-HD16S Input Sensor Terminal. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
150 max.
40 ± 0.3
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140± 0.3
128
40 max.
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
4-7-3
Transistor I/O Sensor Terminals with 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs:
DRT1-ND16S
Specifications
Input Specifications
Item
Input points
ON voltage
Specification
OFF current
8 NPN points
12 V DC min. (between each input terminal and VCC,
the external sensor power supply)
4 V DC max. (between each input terminal and VCC,
the external sensor power supply)
1.0 mA max.
Input current
ON delay time
10 mA max./point
1.0 ms max.
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
OFF voltage
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
Output points
Rated output current
8 NPN points
20 mA max.
Residual voltage
Leakage current
1 V max.
0.1 mA max.
129
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Components
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Power supply terminals
I/O indicators
Indicate the status of each contact. (Lit when the input or output is ON.)
Word address
Indicates the word which the
sensor uses.
I/O connectors
Connect the special connectors from the sensors here.
(The special connectors are attached to the sensor's cable.)
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins
address setting
setting
Pins 1 to 6: Node address
Pins
Baud rate
rate setting
setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud
Pin
(Always OFF.)
OFF.)
Pin 9: Reserved (Always
Pin
o tp ts for
forcommunications
comm nicationserror
error
Pin 10: Hold/clear outputs
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ND16S Sensor
Terminal.
V
G
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
130
Non-isolated
power supply
IN
Internal
circuitry
CAN L
OUT
V
G
Isolated
power
supply
Terminals for
one sensor
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Wiring
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring for the Sensor Terminal’s Connector
Pin
Function
1
2
IN (inputs)
OUT (outputs)
3
VCC (V) (external sensor power supply, +terminal)
4
GND (G) (external sensor power supply, –terminal)
The bit in the DeviceNet I/O area depends on the word address where the
sensor is connected, as shown in the following table.
Word address
0
0
IN-A bit
8
IN-B bit
1
2
1
2
9
10
3
4
3
4
11
12
5
6
5
6
13
14
7
7
15
Wiring Example
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
–
+
–
Sensor
Sensor with teaching
function,
Sensor with external
diagnostic function
Blue
Purple
Black
Brown
Pink (gray)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Internal circuits
power supply
Sensor
Sensor with bank
switching function
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
131
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ND16S Sensor
Terminal. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
150 max.
40 max.
40± 0.3
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140 ± 0.3
4-7-4
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an Sensor Terminal in a
control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Sensor Terminal with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6 to
0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Remote Adapter to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount the
Adapter, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with a
screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then secure
the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on both ends
of the DIN Track with End Plates.
132
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
No.
1
7
7
7
1
6
1
6
6
0
5
0
5
5
0
4
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
IN-B
4
4
1
IN-A
3
1
1
DRT1-HD16S
3
0
NS
3
IN
2
0
0
MS
2
2
IN-B
IN-A
7
Vertical
No.
SENSOR TERMINAL
1
1
IN
1
7
0
7
6
0
7
6
5
0
6
5
4
IN-B
5
4
3
IN-A
4
3
2
DRT1-HD16S
3
2
1
NS
2
1
0
DRT1-HD16S
1
0
NS
0
IN-B
MS
No.
IN-A
NS
MS
MS
SENSOR TERMINAL
DRT1-HD16S
SENSOR TERMINAL
SENSOR TERMINAL
No.
IN
Mounting Direction
IN
4-7-5
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply
The internal circuit power supplies, I/O power supplies, and I/O lines are all
wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect
them to the terminal block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a
torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
6.0 mm max.
133
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-HD16S Remote I/O Terminal.
DRT1-HD16S
No.
SENSOR TERMINAL
IN-A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN-B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DRT1-HD
NODE ADDRESS
ON
1
2
4
8
16
DR
32
0
1
NC NC
0
1
2
5
4
3
6
7
SOURCE SOURCE
24VDC
24VDC
+
-
-
+
Wiring the I/O Power
Supply and I/O Terminals
The I/O power supply and I/O wiring are connected through the cables of the
sensors and other external devices with cable connectors.
Assembling Cable Connectors
Use the following information to connect the Cable Connectors to the cables
on the sensors or other external devices.
• Cable Connectors
Cover
Plug connector
Confirming the Cable Connector and Cable Core Wire Size
There are two models of Cable Connector that vary in the applicable cable
core wire size.
Model
XS8A-0441
XS8-1
Marking
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
Applicable core wire size
XS8A-0442
XS8-2
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Confirm that the Cable Connector is the correct one for the core wire of the
sensor or other external device. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes
The plug connector of the Connector Cable is marked to identify it.
mark
XS8-1
Preparing the Sensor or External Device Cable
The cable from the sensor or external device (with a connector output transistor) is normally either stripped or semi-stripped.
Semi-stripped
134
Stripped
Section 4-7
Sensor Terminals
The wires cannot be connected in this condition. Cut the stripped portion of
wire off and then remove the sheath as shown in the following illustration. Do
not strip the core wires.
20 mm min.
Inserting Core Wires in the Cable Connector
When connecting the sensor, align the senor wires by color with the terminal
numbers printed on the cover according to the following tables.
• DRT1-HD16S
Terminal
number
3-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnosis output)
2-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnosis output)
3-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnosis output)
1
2
Black (white)
---
Brown (white)
---
Black (white)
Orange (orange)
3
4
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
--Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
• DRT1-ND16S
Terminal
number
1
Sensor with teaching function
Sensor with bank switching
or with self-diagnosis output
function
Black (white)
Black
2
3
Pink (gray)
Brown (red)
Purple
Brown
4
Blue (black)
Blue
Note Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric and
proximity sensors.
Insert the core wires completely to the back of the cover holes.
Assembling the Cable Connectors
1,2,3...
1. Confirm that the core wires and terminal number are aligned properly using the wire colors. Also be sure that the wires are inserted completely to
the back of the cover. (The Cover is transparent so that the wires can be
easily seen.)
2. As shown in the following diagram, press the covers with the cable wires
inserted into it into the plug connector using your hands to temporarily attach it.
3. As shown in the following diagram, use pliers or a similar tool to press the
cover completely into the plug connector. Press on the center of the cover
135
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
so that you do not distort it. Press the cover in until there is no gap between
the cover and connector plug.
Connecting and Disconnecting the Cable Connector
Connecting
With terminal number 1 toward the front, insert the Cable Connector into the I/
O connector on the Slave until it clicks into place.
Disconnecting
Lift up on the lock lever as shown in the following diagram and remove the
Cable Connector to disconnect it.
Lock lever
Note Cable Connectors (XS8A-0441/0442) are not provided with the Sensor Terminals and must be purchased separately.
4-8
4-8-1
Analog I/O Terminals
Node Address and Baud Rate Setting
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
Slave-specific setting:
Pins 9 and 10
(Refer to the descriptions of individual Slaves.)
ON
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Node address setting
Baud rate setting
136
Slave-specific setting:
Refer to the description
of individual Slaves.
Analog I/O Terminals
Section 4-8
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Pin 6
DIP switch setting
Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Node address
Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 (default)
1
0
1
0
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
62
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 7
Note
Pin 8
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
4-8-2
Analog Input Terminals: DRT1-AD04 and DRT1-AD04H
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-AD04
Voltage inputs
Current inputs
DRT1-AD04H
Voltage inputs
Current inputs
Input points
Either 4 points or 2 points
4 points
(Set with the DIP switch.) (Master Unit uses 4 (Four input words occupied at Master Unit.)
input words or 2 input words respectively)
Communications power 11 to 25 V DC (supplied from the communications connector)
supply voltage
Internal power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15% to 10%)
137
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Item
Specification
DRT1-AD04
DRT1-AD04H
Current consumption
Voltage inputs
Current inputs
Communications: 30 mA max.
Internal circuit: 80 mA max.
Voltage inputs
Current inputs
Communications: 30 mA max.
Internal circuit: 130 mA max.
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p, pulse width: 0.1 to 1 µs, pulse rise time: 1 ns (via noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC for 1 min (between insulated circuits) 500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient operating tem- 0 to 55°C
perature
Ambient operating
humidity
Ambient operating environment
Ambient storage temperature
Mounting method
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Mounting strength
50 N
10 N min. in the DIN Track direction
Pull: 50 N
Terminal strength
Weight
Input signal range
No corrosive gases.
−25 to 65°C
M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Max. signal input
160 g max.
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to
10 V, or –10 to 10 V
±15 V
Input impedance
Resolution
1 MΩ min.
1/6000 (full scale)
Approx. 250 Ω
1 MΩ min.
1/30000 (full scale)
Approx. 250 Ω
Accuracy
±0.3% FS
±0.6% FS
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
±0.3% FS
±0.6% FS
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
25°C
0 to 55°C
0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA
±30 mA
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V or
0 to 10 V,
±15 V
0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA
±30 mA
Conversion time
Converted output data
(Binary)
2 ms/input (8 ms/4 points, 4 ms/2 points)
Binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Averaging function
Open circuit detection
Settable (via DIP switch)
Provided.
Not provided.
Provided.
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation between analog inputs
and communications lines
(There is no isolation between analog input signals.)
Photocoupler isolation between analog inputs
and communications lines
Photocoupler isolation between analog input
signals.
138
–10- to 10-V range:
scale
Other signal ranges:
8BB8 to 0 to 0BB8 full
250 ms/4 points
Binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
0000 to 7530 (hexadecimal) full scale
0000 to 1770 full scale
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Components of the DRT1-AD04 and DRT1-AD04H
DeviceNet Indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Rotary switch
Sets the input ranges.
Open-circuit Indicators (DRT1-AD04H only)
(Refer to page 147.)
Corresponding indicator lights when open
circuit is detected.
Terminal block
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting (Refer to page 124.)
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting (Refer to page 124.)
Pin 9: Number of inputs setting (4 points or 2 points) [DRT1-AD04 only] (Refer to page 146.)
Pin 10: Averaging function setting [DRT1-AD04 only] (Refer to page 147.)
DIP Switch Settings
The following diagram shows the functions of the DIP switch on the DRT1AD04 and DRT1-AD04H Analog Input Terminals.
Node address setting
Baud rate
DRT1-AD04
Averaging
function setting
Number of inputs setting
(4 pts. or 2 pts.)
DRT1-AD04H
Not used. (must
be OFF.)
139
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
The following table summarizes the DIP switch settings. (All pins are factoryset to OFF.)
Pin(s)
Function
1 through
6
Node address setting
7 and 8
9
Baud rate
Number of inputs
setting (2 or 4)
(See page 146 for
details.)
Averaging function
(See page 147 for
details.)
10
Settings
Setting contents
DRT1-AD04
DRT1-AD04H
Refer to 4-8-1 Node Address and Baud Rate Setting for details. (Factory-set to OFF.)
OFF*
4 points
ON
2 points
OFF*
Averaging is not
performed. (Factory setting)
Averaging is performed.
ON
Not used. (Must
be OFF.)
Not used. (Must
be OFF.)
* Factory settings.
Note Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any settings.
Rotary Switch Setting
Set the input signal range for each input with the rotary switch. Inputs 0 and 2
share the same signal range, as do inputs 1 and 3.
The voltage input/current input selection is carried out by connecting the V+
terminal to the I+ terminal. Short-circuit the V+ terminal and I+ terminal when
inputting current.
Note Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any settings.
DRT1-AD04
0 1
2 3
7 8
9
4
5 6
The following table shows the rotary switch settings and corresponding input
signal range settings.
No.
140
Signal range for inputs 0 and 2
Signal range for inputs 1 and 3
0
1
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
2
3
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
–10 to +10 V
4
5
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
6
7
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
–10 to +10 V
0 to 10 V
8
9
0 to 10 V
–10 to +10 V
–10 to +10 V
–10 to +10 V
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
DRT1-AD04H
The following table shows the rotary switch settings and corresponding input
signal range settings.
No.
Internal Circuits
0
Signal range for inputs 0 and 2
0 to 5 V
Signal range for inputs 1 and 3
0 to 5 V
1
2
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
3
4
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
5
6
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
7
8
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
9
A
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
B
C
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
D
E
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
F
(Cannot be set.)
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-AD04 Analog
Input Terminal.
DRT1-AD04
Photocoupler
V+
V+
CAN H
DRAIN
CAN L
510 kΩ
Physical Photolayer
coupler
250 Ω
–
V+
Internal
circuitry
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Input 0
510 kΩ
V–
SOURCE
24 V DC +
I+
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
510 kΩ
250 Ω
510 kΩ
510 kΩ
I+
Input 1
–
V+
250 Ω
I+
Input 2
–
510 kΩ
V+
510 kΩ
250 Ω
I+
Input 3
–
510 kΩ
Analog GND
141
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Note The DRT1-AD04H has insulation between the inputs, so there is no need for
the user to be concerned with the internal circuitry.
Terminal Arrangement
DRT1-AD04
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
±
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
±
±
±
+
±
DRT1-AD04H
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
Wiring: DRT1-AD04 and
DRT1-AD04 H (Common)
Connect the power supply and inputs (voltage input or current input) to the
Analog Input Terminal’s terminal block as shown in the following diagram.
Internal circuits
power supply
SOURCE
24 V DC
Voltage input
connection
Current input
connection
V+
V+
I+
I+
+
–
–
–
–
+
Shield
Shield
Internal circuits
power supply
0V
0V
(With current inputs,
short-circuit the V+ and I+
terminals.)
Do not connect the shield when using shielded cables for the inputs.
Input Ranges and
Converted Data
The Analog Input Terminal converts analog input data to digital values. The
digital values depend on the input signal ranges, as shown in the following
diagrams.
Note When the input exceeds the specified range, the AD conversion data will be
fixed at either the lower limit or upper limit.
142
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
DRT1-AD04
–10- to 10-V Inputs
The –10- to 10-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 8BB8 to 0BB8
(–3000 to 3000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for negative
values and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest of
the word indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 8CE4 to 0CE4
(–3300 to 3300).
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
0000 (0)
–11 V –10 V
0V
Voltage
10 V 11 V
8BB8 (–3000)
8CE4 (–3300)
0- to 10-V Inputs
The 0- to 10-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
to 6000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for negative values
and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest of the word
indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 812C to 189C (–300 to
6300).
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
– 0.5 V
812C (–300)
0V
10 V
Voltage
10.5 V
0- to 5-V Inputs
The 0- to 5-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
to 6000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for negative values
and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest of the word
indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 812C to 189C (–300 to
6300).
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
– 0.25 V
812C (–300)
0V
Voltage
5 V 5.25 V
143
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
1- to 5-V Inputs
The 1- to 5-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
to 6000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for voltages from
0.8 V to 1 V and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest
of the word indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 812C to
189C (–300 to 6300). If the input voltage falls below 0.8 V, the open-circuit
detection function is activated and the converted data is set to FFFF.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
FFFF
0000 (0)
0.8 V
812C (–300)
1V
Voltage
5 V 5.2 V
0- to 20-mA Inputs
The 0- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for negative values
and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest of the word
indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 812C to 189C (–300 to
6300).
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
–1 mA
0 mA
812C (–300)
Current
20 mA 21 mA
4- to 20-mA Inputs
The 4- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6000). The most significant bit (bit 15) is set to 1 (ON) for currents from
3.2 to 4 mA and the AD conversion data is set to the absolute values; the rest
of the word indicates the absolute value. The entire data range is 812C to
189C (–300 to 6300). If the input current falls below 3.2 mA, the open-circuit
detection function is activated and the converted data is set to FFFF.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
FFFF
0000 (0)
812C (–300)
144
3.2 mA
4 mA
Current
20 mA 20.8 mA
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
DRT1-AD04H
0 to 10 V
The 0- to 10-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 7530 (0
to 30,000). The convertible data range is FA24 to 7B0C (–1,500 to 31,500).
When the voltage is negative, the negative number is expressed as a two’s
complement.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
7B0C (31500)
7530 (30000)
0000 (0)
–0.5 V
FA24 (-1500)
Voltage
0V
10 V 10.5 V
0 to 5 V
The 0- to 5-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 7530 (0
to 30,000). The convertible data range is FA24 to 7B0C (–1,500 to 31,500).
When the voltage is negative, the negative number is expressed as a two’s
complement.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
7B0C (31500)
7530 (30000)
0000 (0)
–0.25 V
FA24 (-1500)
Voltage
0V
5 V 5.25 V
1 to 5 V
The 1- to 5-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 7530 (0
to 30,000). The convertible data range is FA24 to 7B0C (–1,500 to 31,500).
The 0.8- to 1-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values FA24 to 7B0C
(–1,500 to 0). If the voltage drops below the input range (i.e., if the input voltage drops below 0.8 V), the open-circuit detection function is activated and
the data is set to 7FFF.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
7B0C (31500)
7530 (30000)
7FFF
0000 (0)
FA24 (–1500)
0.8 V
1V
Voltage
5 V 5.2 V
145
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
0 to 20 mA
The 0- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 7530
(0 to 30,000). The convertible data range is FA24 to 7B0C (–1,500 to 31,500).
When the current is negative, the negative number is expressed as a two’s
complement.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
7B0C (31500)
7530 (30000)
0000 (0)
–1 mA
FA24 (-1500)
Current
0 mA
20 mA 21 mA
4 to 20 mA
The 4- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 7530
(0 to 30,000). The convertible data range is FA24 to 7B0C (–1,500 to 31,500).
The 3.2- to 4-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values FA24 to 0000
(–1,500 to 0). If the current drops below the input range (i.e., if the current voltage drops below 3.2 mA), the open-circuit detection function is activated and
the data is set to 7FFF.
Converted data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
7B0C (31500)
7530 (30000)
7FFF
0000 (0)
FA24 (–1500)
Number of Inputs Setting
(DRT1-AD04 Only)
3.2 mA
4 mA
Current
20 mA 20.8 mA
The number of inputs can be limited to two by turning ON pin 9 of the DIP
switch. Changing the number of inputs from four to two reduces the sampling
time from 8 ms/4 inputs to 4 ms/2 inputs, which provides faster conversion.
If the number of inputs is two, the number of words allocated to the Input Terminal in the PLC is also reduced to 2 words. When only two inputs are used,
inputs 0 and 1 are used (inputs 2 and 3 cannot be used.)
146
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Averaging Function
Setting (DRT1-AD04 Only)
With the DRT1-AD04, the averaging function can be enabled for all inputs (0
through 3) by turning ON pin 10 of the DIP switch. The averaging function outputs the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that vary like the one in the
following diagram.
Actual input
Input after averaging
Time
Note The time required for converted data refreshing remains 2 ms/point when the
averaging function is enabled. The first communications data after the power
is turned ON will be output after averaging eight samples.
Open-circuit Detection
Function
The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to
1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4
to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA. When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data is set to FFFF for the DRT1AD04 and 7FFF for the DRT1-AD04H. In addition, with the DRT1-AD04H, the
broken wire indicator lights when the open-circuit detection function is activated.
The open-circuit detection function is enabled or cleared at the same time as
the conversion time. If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared automatically and the output returns to the normal
range.
Converted Data
The converted data is transferred to the Master as shown in the following diagram.
DRT1-AD04
Bit
First word
Sign
bit
Input 0 converted data
First word + 1
Sign
bit
Input 1 converted data
First word + 2
Sign
bit
Input 2 converted data*
First word + 3
Sign
bit
Input 3 converted data*
Note *Not used when there are two input points. At that time only two words are
occupied.
The sign bit is turned ON to indicate that the converted value is negative; the
converted value will be the absolute value (not the two’s complement).
147
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Example: When –300 is converted, the sign bit (bit 15) is set to 1 and 300 is
output as the binary value as 12C hexadecimal. The contents of the word is
thus 812C, as shown in the following illustration.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
8
(163)
0
0
0
0
1
(162)
2
(161)
C
(160)
DRT1-AD04H
Bit
First word
Input 0 converted data
First word + 1
Input 1 converted data
First word + 2
Input 2 converted data
First word + 3
Input 3 converted data
If the converted data is a negative number, it is expressed as a two’s complement. The NEG command can be useful to obtain the absolute value from the
two’s complement.
Conversion Time
DRT1-AD04
AD conversion values are refreshed every 2 ms for each input point.
DRT1-AD04H
AD conversion values are refreshed every 250 ms. It may take up to 650 ms,
however, from when the step response is input until AD conversion data of
90% of that value can be transmitted.
148
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-AD04 and DRT1AD04H Analog Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
40 max.
150 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140± 0.3
4-8-3
Analog Output Terminal: DRT1-DA02
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage outputs
Current outputs
Output points
Communications
power supply voltage
2 points (allocated two words in the Master Unit.)
11 to 25 V DC (supplied from the communications connector)
Internal power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15% to 10%)
Current consumption
Communications: 30 mA max.
Internal circuit: 140 mA max.
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p, pulse width: 0.1 to 1 µs, pulse rise time: 1 ns (via
noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC for 1 min (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient operating
temperature
0 to 55°C
Ambient operating
humidity
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
149
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Item
Specification
Voltage outputs
Current outputs
Ambient operating
environment
Ambient storage temperature
Mounting method
No corrosive gases.
Mounting strength
50 N
10 N min. in the DIN Track direction
Terminal strength
Weight
Pull: 50 N
160 g max.
−25 to 65°C
M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Output signal range
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or –10 to
10 V
Allowable external out- 1 KΩ min.
put load resistance
Output impedance
0.5 Ω max.
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
600 Ω max.
---
Resolution
Accuracy 25°C
1/6000 (full scale)
±0.4% FS
0 to 55°C
Conversion time
±0.8% FS
4 ms/2 points
Conversion output
data
(Binary)
–10- to 10-V range:
Other signal ranges:
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation between analog outputs and communications lines
(There is no isolation between analog output signals.)
8BB8 to 0 to 0BB8 full scale
0000 to 1770 full scale
Components
DeviceNet Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
Rotary switch
Sets the output ranges.
Terminal block
Connect the internal circuits power
supply and the analog outputs.
DIN track mounting hooks
Communications connector
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address
Pins
address setting
setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate
Pins
rate setting
setting
Pins 9 and 10: Output
Pins
O tp t status
stat s after
aftercommunications
comm nicationserror
error
150
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
DIP Switch Settings
The following diagram shows the functions of the DIP switch.
Node address setting
Output status after
communications error
Baud rate
The following table summarizes the DIP switch settings. (All pins are factoryset to OFF.)
Pin(s)
Function
Settings
1 through 6 Node address setting
7 and 8
Baud rate
Refer to 4-8-1 Node Address and Baud Rate
Setting for details.
9 and 10
9
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Output status at communications error.
(See page 154 for
details.)
Output
Clear at “Low” (see below)
(Factory setting)
Clear at “High” (see below)
Hold
Hold
Outputs for “High” and “Low” Clear
Pins 9 and 10 of the DIP switch determine the status of the outputs after a
communications error occurs in DeviceNet communications. The following
table shows the lower and upper limits of the output ranges for each output
signal range setting.
Output signal range
“Low”
“High”
–10 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
–11 V
–0.5 V
11 V
10.5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
0.8 V
0 mA
5.2 V
21 mA
4 to 20 mA
3.2 mA
20.8 mA
Note Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any settings.
Rotary Switch Setting
Set the output signal range for each output with the rotary switch.
The following table shows the rotary switch settings and corresponding output
signal range settings.
No.
Signal range
for output 0
Signal range
for output 1
0
1
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
2
3
1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
–10 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4
5
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
6
7
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
151
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
No.
8
Signal range
for output 0
0 to 10 V
Signal range
for output 1
4 to 20 mA
9
A
–10 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
B
C
–10 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
D
E
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
F
(Setting not possible.)
Internal Circuits
Photocoupler
V+
CAN H
CAN L
Physical
Photolayer
coupler
V–
I+
V+
Internal
circuitry
DRAIN
Output 0
–
I+
SOURCE
24 V DC +
SOURCE
24 V DC –
Output 1
V+
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
–
Analog GND
Terminal Arrangement
SOURCE
24 V DC
+
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
152
+
–
+
+
–
+
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
Wiring
Connect the power supply and outputs (voltage output or current output) to
the Analog Output Terminal’s terminal block as shown in the following diagram.
Internal circuits
power supply
Voltage output
connection
SOURCE
24 V DC
V+
–
Current output
connection
V+
I+
–
I+
+
–
–
+
Internal circuits
power supply
External
device
Output Ranges and
Converted Data
External
device
+
–
+
–
The Analog Output Terminal converts the digital output data to analog values.
The analog values depend on the output signal ranges, as shown in the following diagrams.
–10- to 10-V Outputs
The hexadecimal values 8BB8 to 0BB8 (–3000 to 3000) correspond to an
analog voltage range of –10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is –11 to 11 V.
Voltage
11 V
10 V
8CE4 8BB8
FFFF (–3300) (–3000) 0000 (0)
0V
Converted data
Hexadecimal
0BB8 0CE4 7FFF (Decimal)
(3000) (3300)
–10 V
–11 V
0- to 10-V Outputs
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog
voltage range of 0 to 10 V. The entire output range is –0.5 to 10.5 V.
Voltage
10.5 V
10 V
0V
FFFF 812C (–300)
–0.5 V
0000 (0)
Converted
1770 189C 7FFF data
Hexadecimal
(6000) (6300)
(Decimal)
153
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
1- to 5-V Outputs
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog
voltage range of 1 to 5 V. The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
Voltage
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
0V
FFFF 812C 0000 (0)
(–300)
Converted data
1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
0- to 20-mA Outputs
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog
current range of 0 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
Current
21 mA
20 mA
0 mA
0000 (0)
FFFF
Converted data
1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
4- to 20-mA Outputs
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog
current range of 4 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
Current
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
0V
FFFF
Output Status after
Communications Error
812C 0000 (0)
(–300)
Converted data
1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
Pins 9 and 10 of the DIP switch determine the status of the outputs after a
communications error occurs in DeviceNet communications.
Hold:
Low:
High:
154
3.2 mA
Maintains the previous output status.
Clears to the lower limit of the output signal range.
Clears to the upper limit of the output signal range.
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
The following table shows the lower and upper limits of the output ranges for
each output signal range setting.
Converted Data
Output signal range
–10 to 10 V
“Low”
“High”
–11 V
11 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
–0.5 V
0.8 V
10.5 V
5.2 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 mA
3.2 mA
21 mA
20.8 mA
Output the converted data to the Master as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
Sign
bit
Output 0 converted data
First word + 1 Sign
bit
Output 1 converted data
First word
The sign bit is turned ON to indicate that the converted value is negative, at
which time the converted value will be an absolute value.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-DA02 Analog Output Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
Unit: mm
12
50 max.
(With connector attached)
150 max.
40 max.
Mounting holes
40 ± 0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140 ± 0.3
155
Section 4-8
Analog I/O Terminals
4-8-4
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an Analog I/O Terminal
in a control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Analog I/O Terminal with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6
to 0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Analog I/O Terminal to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount
the Terminal, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with
a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and then
secure the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on
both ends of the DIN Track with End Plates.
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
Vertical
3
IN
1
No.
3
2
2
1
3
0
2
DRT1-AD04
1
NS
IN
0
DRT1-AD04
NS
MS
No.
NS
MS
ANALOG TERMINAL
MS
DRT1-AD04
ANALOG TERMINAL
ANALOG TERMINAL
No.
IN
Mounting Direction
0
0
MS
NS
3
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
2
DRT1-AD04
1
IN
4-8-5
Wiring Internal Power Supplies and I/O Lines
The internal circuit power supplies and I/O lines are all wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect them to the terminal
block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a torque of 0.3 to
0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
156
6.0 mm max.
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-AD04 Analog Input Terminal.
DRT1-AD04
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
0 1
2 3
7 8
9
4
5 6
−
Wiring I/O
+
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block and external I/O wiring. The following
example shows the wiring to input 0 on a DRT1-AD04 Analog Input Terminal.
DRT1-AD04
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
0 1
2 3
7 8
9
4
5 6
V+
4-9-1
Temperature Input Terminals
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
Slave-specific setting:
Pins 9 and 10
(Refer to the descriptions of individual Slaves.)
ON
4-9
−
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Node address setting
Baud rate setting
Slave-specific setting:
Refer to the descriptions
of individual Slaves.
157
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Pin 6
DIP switch setting
Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Node address
Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 (default)
1
0
1
0
2
:
:
Note
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
62
63
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 7
Note
Pin 8
Baud rate
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
250 kbps
OFF
ON
ON
ON
500 kbps
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
4-9-2
Temperature Input Terminals: DRT1-TS04T and DRT1-TS04P
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Model
Input type
Input points
DRT1-TS04P
Resistance temperature
sensor input
4 points (allocated four words in the Master Unit.)
Communications power
supply voltage
11 to 25 V DC (supplied from the communications connector)
Internal power supply voltage
Current consumption
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15% to 10%)
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p, pulse width: 0.1 to 1 µs, pulse rise time: 1 ns
(via noise simulator)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
Vibration resistance
158
Specification
DRT1-TS04T
Thermocouple input
Communications: 30 mA max.
Internal circuit: 130 mA max.
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Item
Shock resistance
Specification
200 m/s
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC for 1 min (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
2
Ambient operating temper- 0 to 55°C
ature
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Ambient operating environ- No corrosive gases.
ment
Ambient storage temperature
−25 to 65°C
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting
50 N
10 N min. in the DIN Track direction
Terminal strength
Weight
Pull: 50 N
230 g max.
Input classification
R, S, K1, K2, J1, J2, T, E,
B, N, L1, L2, U, W, PL II
convertible (4-point common input class)
(Instruction value ±0.5% or
±2°C, whichever is larger)
±1 digit max. (See note.)
Instruction precision
160 g max.
Pt100, JPt100 convertible
(4-point common input
class)
(Instruction value ±0.5% or
±1°C, whichever is larger)
±1 digit max.
Conversion period
Temperature conversion
data
250 ms / 4 pts.
Binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation between temperature inputs and
communications lines
(Photocoupler isolation between temperature input signals.)
Note Less than –100°C of K1, T, N: ±4°C ±1 digit max.
U, L1, L2:
±4°C ±1 digit max.
Less than 200°C of R, S:
±6°C ±1 digit max.
No regulation
Less than 400°C of B:
W:
(Instruction value ±0.5% or ±6°C, whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
PL II: (Instruction value ±0.5% or ±4°C, whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
159
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Components of the DRT1-TS04T and DRT1-TS04P
DeviceNet Display
(Refer to page 312.)
Broken wire display
The indicator for the relevant number lights
when the open-circuit detection function is
activated.
Rotary switch
Sets the input range.
Cold Junction Compensator
(DRT1-TS04T only)
Corrects the input temperature. Do
not touch or remove it.
Terminal block
Connects the operation power supply
(the internal circuit power supply) and
the temperature sensors. The wiring
will vary depending on the model.
DIN track mounting rack
Communications connector
DIP switch
1 to 6: Node address (Refer to page 124.)
7, 8:
Baud rate (Refer to page 124.)
9:
Temperature unit (5C or 5F) (See below)
10:
Display mode for 2 digits below decimal point (See below)
DIP Switch Settings
The following diagram shows the functions of the DIP switch for the DRT1TS04T and DRT1-TS04P Temperature Input Terminals.
Node address
Two digits below decimal point
Temperature unit
Baud rate
Pin(s)
Function
1 through 6 Node address setting
7 and 8
9
10
Baud rate setting
Temperature unit setting
Display mode for 2 digits below the decimal
(Refer to page 164.)
Settings
Refer to 4-9-1 Node Address and Baud Rate
Settings for details.
OFF (factory setting)
°C
ON
OFF (factory setting)
°F
Normal mode (0 or 1
digit depending on
input classification)
ON
Two digits below decimal point
Note Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any settings.
160
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Rotary Switch Setting
Set the common input classification and input signal range for each input with
the rotary switch. (The input classification and input range cannot be set for 4point classification.)
Note Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any settings.
DRT1-TS04T
The following table shows the input classifications and input ranges according
to the rotary switch settings.
0
Number
R
Input classification
Range (°C)
0 to 1700
Range (°F)
0 to 3000
1
2
S
K1
0 to 1700
–200 to 1300
0 to 3000
–300 to 2300
3
4
K2
J1
0.0 to 500.0
–100 to 850
0.0 to 900.0
–100 to 1500
5
6
J2
T
0.0 to 400.0
–200.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 750.0
–300.0 to 700.0
7
8
E
L1
0 to 600
–100 to 850
0 to 1100
–100 to 1500
9
A
L2
U
0.0 to 400.0
–200.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 750.0
–300.0 to 700.0
B
C
N
W
–200 to 1300
0 to 2300
–300 to 2300
0 to 4100
D
E
B
PL II
100 to 1800
0 to 1300
300 to 3200
0 to 2300
F
Cannot be set.
DRT1-TS04P
The following table shows the input classifications and input ranges according
to the rotary switch settings.
0
Number
Input classification
PT100
Range (°C)
–200.0 to 650.0
Range (°F)
–300.0 to 1200.0
1
2 to 9
JPT100
Cannot be set.
–200.0 to 650.0
–300.0 to 1200.0
161
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
DRT1-TS04T
Cold Junction Compensator
SOURCE
24 V DC
Input 0
Input 0
SOURCE
24 V DC
−
Input 1
Input 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 3
Note Do not touch or remove the Cold Junction Compensator.
DRT1-TS04P
SOURCE
24 V DC
SOURCE
24 V DC
Wiring
Input 0 Input 0 Input 1 Input 1
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2 Input 2 Input 3 Input 3
Input 2
Input 3
Connect the inputs to the Temperature Input Terminal’s terminal block as
shown in the following diagram, depending on whether thermocouple inputs
or resistance temperature sensor inputs are used.
Internal circuit power supply
Source: 24 V DC
DRT1-TS04T
Thermocouple input
DRT1-TS04P
Resistance temperature sensor input
Internal circuit
power supply
Temperature Conversion
Data for the DRT1-TS04T
and DRT1-TS04P
162
Data that is input is converted to binary data (4-digit hexadecimal) and the
Master is notified. If the converted data is a negative number, it is expressed
as a two’s complement.
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
The four inputs occupy four words at the Master, as shown below. If the input
classification is set for up to one digit below the decimal point, a multiple of 10
will be transmitted as binary data.
Bit
Beginning word
Input 0: Temperature conversion data
Beginning word + 1
Input 1: Temperature conversion data
Beginning word + 2
Input 2: Temperature conversion data
Beginning word + 3
Input 3: Temperature conversion data
Input classification
Unit: 1°C (°F)
R, S, K1, J1, E,
L1, N, W, B, PL
K2, J2, T, L2, U,
Pt100, JPt100
Unit: 0.1°C (°F)
Note
850° → 0352 (4 digits hex)
–200° → FF38 (4 digits hex)
x10
500.0° → 5000 → 1388 (4 digits hex)
–20.0° → 200 → FF38 (4 digits hex)
–200.0° → 2000 → F830 (4 digits hex)
1. For more details regarding temperature conversion data with a unit setting
of two digits below the decimal point (unit: 0.01), refer to page 164.
2. If there is a sudden temperature change, condensation may develop inside
of the Terminal and cause incorrect values to be displayed. If condensation
does develop, leave the Terminal for approximately one hour at a stable
temperature before using it.
Data Ranges and the
Open-circuit Detection
Function
The following table shows the convertible data ranges according to the number set by the rotary switch.
DRT1-TS04T
Number
Input classification
Range (°C)
Range (°F)
0
1
R
S
–20 to 1720
–20 to 1720
–20 to 3020
–20 to 3020
2
3
K1
K2
–220 to 1200
–20.0 to 520.0
–320 to 2320
–20.0 to 920.0
4
5
J1
J2
–120 to 870
–20.0 to 420.0
–120 to 1520
–20.0 to 770.0
6
7
T
E
–220.0 to 420.0
–20 to 620
–320.0 to 720.0
–20 to 1120
8
9
L1
L2
–120 to 870
–20.0 to 420.0
–120 to 1520
–20.0 to 770.0
A
B
U
N
–220.0 to 420.0
–220 to 1320
–320.0 to 720.0
–320 to 2320
C
D
W
B
–20 to 2320
80 to 1820
–20 to 4120
280 to 3220
E
F
PL II
Cannot be set.
–20 to 1320
–20 to 2320
163
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
DRT1-TS04P
Number
0
Input classification
Range (°C)
Pt100
–220.0 to 670.0
Range (°F)
–320.0 to 1220.0
1
2 to 9
JPt100
Cannot be set.
–320.0 to 1220.0
–220.0 to 670.0
If the input temperature goes outside of the permissible conversion range, the
temperature data is fixed at the upper or lower limit.
If the input temperature goes beyond a given constant value, outside of the
permissible conversion range, it is determined that the input wiring has been
disconnected. The open-circuit detection function is then activated so that the
temperature data is set to 7FFF (hexadecimal), and the broken wire indicator
on the Temperature Input Terminal lights up. The open-circuit detection function will operate even if there is an error at the Cold Junction Compensator.
When the input temperature returns to within the conversion range, the opencircuit detection function is automatically cleared and the conversion data is
returned to normal.
Temperature Input
Terminal’s Display Mode
for 2 Digits Below the
Decimal Point
This section explains the Temperature Input Terminal’s display mode for 2 digits below the decimal point.
When the Temperature Input Terminal is in this mode, each single item of temperature data (four integer digits and two digits below the decimal point, in six
digits of hexadecimal binary data) is provided to the Master Unit multiplied by
100 with the sign affixed. At that time the temperature data is divided into two
parts as shown below, and these parts are alternately transmitted every 125
ms. (The two respective data items are each configured as one word of data.)
!Caution In the display mode for 2 digits below the decimal point, temperature data is
converted for up to two digits below the decimal point, but the actual resolution is not 0.01°C (°F). Therefore there may be some oscillation or jumping at
the 0.01°C (°F) and 0.1°C (°F) digits. Resolutions beyond those prescribed for
the normal mode should be treated as reference data.
164
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
The following diagram shows how temperature data is divided and the data
configuration.
Temperature data (Actual temperature x 100, in binary data)
Notification format for leftmost 3 digits
Bit
Left/right
Temp.
unit
Broken
wire
Not used.
0: Left
1: Right
0: C°
1: F°
0: OK
1: Error
0 (Fixed)
Sign/determination area
Data area
Notification format for rightmost 3 digits
Bit
Right/left
Temp.
unit
Broken
wire
Not used.
0: Left
1: Right
0: C°
1: F°
0: OK
1: Error
0 (Fixed)
Sign/determination area
Data area
Leftmost/rightmost bit: Determines whether leftmost or rightmost digits are
displayed.
Temperature unit bit:
Determines whether temperature is expressed in °C
or °F.
Broken wire bit:
Turns ON (1) to notify of broken wire. At that time the
data in the leftmost three digits is “7FF” and the data
in the rightmost three digits is “FFF.”
The three leftmost digits and three rightmost digits, each comprising one word
of data, are alternately provided to the Master every 125 ms as shown in the
following diagram.
125 mms
Leftmost 3 digits
125 mms
Rightmost 3 digits
125 mms
Leftmost 3 digits
Time
Data refresh
Data refresh
165
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Example 1: 1130.25°C
Value multiplied by 100: 113025
Notification value:
01B981 (113025 expressed in hexadecimal)
Contents of 3 Leftmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4
Bits
Data
C Normal
Leftmost
3 to 0
Temperature conversion data
Data area
Sign/determination area
Contents of 3 Rightmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4
Bits
Data
Rightmost
C Normal
3 to 0
Temperature conversion data
Sign/determination area
Data area
Example 2: –100.12°C
Value multiplied by 100: –10012
Notification value:
FFD8E4 (–10012 expressed in hexadecimal)
Contents of 3 Leftmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4
Bits
Data
Leftmost C Normal
3 to 0
Temperature conversion data
Data area
Sign/determination area
Contents of 3 Rightmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
Bits
Data
Rightmost C
Temperature conversion data
Normal
Sign/determination area
Data area
Example 3: –200.12°F
Value multiplied by 100: –20012
Notification value:
FFB1D4 (–20012 expressed in hexadecimal)
Contents of 3 Leftmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
Bits
Data
Leftmost
F
Normal
Temperature conversion data
Sign/determination area
Data area
Contents of 3 Rightmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
Bits
Data
Rightmost
F
Temperature conversion data
Data area
Normal
Sign/determination area
166
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Example 4: Input Error (Broken Wire) (Unit:°F)
Notification value: 7FFFFF
Contents of 3 Leftmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
Temperature conversion data
11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
Bits
Data
Leftmost
F
Error
Sign/determination area
Data area
Contents of 3 Rightmost Digits
Sign/Determin.
Rightmost
Note
Temperature conversion data
11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
Bits
Data
F
Error
Sign/determination area
Data area
1. Data notification is provided in order, from the leftmost digits to the rightmost. When reading data with the program, be sure to read it in that same
order.
2. Taking the Programmable Controller’s cycle time and the communications
time into consideration, lower the reading cycle to 125 ms or less. If the
reading cycle exceeds 125 ms, normal data cannot be read.
Sample Program for the
DRT1-TS04T and DRT1TS04P
The following program is an example of using the Temperature Input Terminal
in the display mode for 2 digits below the decimal point.
Settings
Temperature Input Terminal’s allocated words: 350 to 353
Temperature Input Terminal’s mode: Two digits below decimal point (DIP
switch pin 10: ON)
Operation
The temperature data from the Temperature Input Terminal’s input 0 is stored
in words 30 to 32 in binary data multiplied by 100, as shown below.
Word
Bit
15 to 12
11 to 8
7 to 4
30
x163
x162
x161
31
x167
0 (Fixed)
x166
0 (Fixed)
x165
0 (Fixed)
32
Temperature unit bit
Broken wire bit:
3
2
1
0
x160
0
x164
Temperature Broken wire
unit bit
bit
0
0: °C; 1: °F
0: Normal; 1: Error
The data in words 30 and 31 can be treated as 32-bit binary data.
167
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Program Example
35015
MOV
350
Leftmost 3 digits notification
Stores leftmost 3 digits of data in IR word 040.
040
35015
MOVD
350
Leftmost 3 digits
notification
#0020
Transfers rightmost 3 bits of data (160 to 162)
to word 030.
030
MOVD
350
#0300
Transfers163 data to word 030.
030
MOVD
040
#0011
Transfers 164 and 165 data to word 031.
031
04011
MOVD
#00FF
When data is negative
#0210
If data is negative, stores "FF" in leftmost
two digits of word 031.
031
04011
MOVD
#0000
When data is positive
#0210
If data is positive, stores "00" in leftmost
two digits of word 031.
031
XFRB
#0210
040
032
168
Transfers the temperature-units bit and
broken-wire bit information to word 032.
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-TS04T and DRT1TS04P Temperature Input Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Approx. 73
Unit: mm
(With connector installed)
50 max.
12
150 max.
40 max.
Mounting Hole Dimensions
40±0.3
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
140±0.3
4-9-3
Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount a Temperature Input
Terminal in a control panel.
Using Screws
Open mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the
Temperature Input Terminals with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening
torque is 0.6 to 0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the Temperature Input Terminal to a 35-mm DIN Track. To
mount the Terminal, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Terminal with a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Terminal, and
then secure the Terminal to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves
on both ends of the DIN Track with End Plates.
169
Section 4-9
Temperature Input Terminals
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
Vertical
MS
DRT1-TS04T
3
2
2
3
0
1
1
0
1
IN
0
2
NS
BROKEN
WIRE
MS
DRT1-TS04T
3
0
3
1
NS
BROKEN
WIRE
2
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
ANALOG TERMINAL
No.
IN
Mounting Direction
0
MS
NS
2
3
3
0
1
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
2
BROKEN
WIRE
DRT1-TS04T
1
IN
4-9-4
Wiring Internal Power Supplies and I/O Lines
The internal circuit power supplies and I/O lines are all wired to M3 screw terminals. Connect M3 crimp terminals and then connect them to the terminal
block. Tighten the screws fixing the crimp terminals to a torque of 0.3 to
0.5 N⋅m.
6.0 mm max.
170
6.0 mm max.
Section 4-10
CQM1 I/O Link Unit
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block. The following example shows the internal
power supply for a DRT1-TS04T Temperature Input Terminal.
DRT1-TS04T
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
BROKEN
WIRE
A
789
−
Wiring I/O
2
3456
BCD
F01
3
0
2
E
1
+
Refer to the wiring details for each Slave for information on the terminal
arrangement at the terminal block and external I/O wiring. The following
example shows the wiring to input 0 on a DRT1-TS04T Temperature Input
Terminal.
DRT1-TS04T
No.
ANALOG TERMINAL
BROKEN
WIRE
A
0
2
3456
BCD
F01
3
2
E
1
789
−
+
4-10 CQM1 I/O Link Unit
4-10-1 Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting, baud rate settings,
and hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are
made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
ON
Output hold/clear setting:Pin 10 (affects only outputs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs
Node address setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Baud rate setting
171
Section 4-10
CQM1 I/O Link Unit
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Pin 6
DIP switch setting
Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Node address
Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 (default)
1
0
1
0
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
62
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin 7
Note
Pin 8
Baud rate
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate may cause communications errors between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
Setting Pins 9 and 10
The functions of pins 9 and 10 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the
following diagram.
Pin 9:
Input:
Not used (Always OFF)
Output:
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 10: As follows:
Inputs:
Outputs:
OFF (Clear):
ON (Hold):
No function (Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
Pins 9 and 10 are factory-set to OFF.
172
Section 4-10
CQM1 I/O Link Unit
4-10-2 CQM1 I/O Link Unit: CQM1-DRT21
Specifications
The general specifications for the CQM1-DRT21 I/O Link Unit conform to
CQM1 specifications.
Item
Model number
CQM1-DRT21
Number of I/O points
Compatible PLCs
16 inputs, 16 outputs (32 I/O points total)
All CQM1 PLCs and all CQM1H PLCs.
Max. number of Units
11 Units max. with CQM1H-CPU51-E/61-E PLCs (512
points max.) or CQM1H-CPU11-E/21-E PLCs (256 points
max.)
7 Units max. with
[email protected] PLCs (256 points max.)
Connection to previous models:
[email protected]: 5 Units max. (192 points max.)
CQM1-CPU11-E/21-E: 3 Units max. (128 points max.)
Communications power: 40 mA max.
Internal circuits: 80 mA max. (5 V DC)
Current consumption
Weight
Specification
185 g max.
General Specifications
Conform to SYSMAC CQM1 specifications.
Components
Indicators (Refer to page 312.)
DIP switch (Refer to page 40.)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate
Pin 9: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 10: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications connector
CQM1 Word Allocation
In the CQM1 PLCs, an I/O Link Unit is treated just like an I/O Unit with one
input word and one output word, so word allocation is identical to a standard I/
O Unit. Words are allocated from the left side of the PLC, beginning with IR
173
Section 4-10
CQM1 I/O Link Unit
001 for inputs and IR 100 for outputs. The following diagram shows a word
allocation example.
PS: Power supply unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IN: Input Unit/Terminals
OUT: Output Unit
DRT: I/O Link Unit
Word allocation
Inputs
IR 000
IR 001
IR 002
Outputs
IR 100
IR 101
IR 102
From the Master's
output area
To the Master's
input area
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the CQM1-DRT21 I/O Link
Unit. Refer to the PLC’s Installation Guide for the dimensions of the Unit when
it is mounted to the Backplane. (All dimensions are in mm.)
(With the cover removed)
4-10-3 Mounting to Control Panels
The CQM1 I/O Link Unit is assembled with the rest of the Units in the CQM1
PLC for use as one assembled PLC. The CQM1 I/O Link Unit is connected to
the PLC just like any other PLC Unit. Refer to the operation manual for the
PLC for details.
Note No internal power, I/O power, or I/O wiring is required for the CQM1 I/O Link
Unit because it uses internal I/O bits in the CPU Unit to communicate with the
master.
174
SECTION 5
Environment-resistive and Waterproof Slaves
This section provides specifications and describes the components, indicators, switch settings, and other aspects of
Environment-resistive Slaves.
5-1
Environment-resistive Slave Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
5-2
5-3
Current Consumption, Weight, Degree of Protection. . . . . . . . . . . .
176
Connecting Communications Cables to Environment-resistive Slaves . . . . .
177
5-2-1
Example System Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
5-3-1
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
5-3-2
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID08C (NPN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 16 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-HD16C (NPN) and DRT1-HD16C-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Transistor Outputs:
DRT-OD08C (NPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
5-3-5
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 16 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-WD16C (NPN) and DRT1-WD16C-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
5-3-6
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Inputs 8 Outputs:
DRT1-MD16C (NPN) and DRT1-MD16C-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
5-3-7
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
5-3-8
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
198
Waterproof Terminals (IP67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
5-4-1
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings . . . . . .
200
5-4-2
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 4 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID04CL (NPN) and DRT1-ID04CL-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 8 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID08CL (NPN) and DRT1-ID08CL-1 (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
5-4-4
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 4 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-OD04CL (NPN) and DRT1-OD04CL-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . .
207
5-4-5
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 8 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-OD08CL (NPN) and DRT1-OD08CL-1 (PNP). . . . . . . . . . .
210
5-4-6
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
5-4-7
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
213
B7AC Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
5-5-1
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings (DIP Switch 1) . . . . . . . . . .
215
5-5-2
Example System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
217
5-5-3
B7AC Interface Unit: DRT1-B7AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
217
5-5-4
Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
5-5-5
Wiring the Internal Power Supply and Input Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
5-3-3
5-3-4
5-4
5-4-3
5-5
176
175
Section 5-1
Environment-resistive Slave Specifications
5-1
Environment-resistive Slave Specifications
This section shows the specifications that are the same for all Environmentresistive Slaves. Differences for particular Slaves are shown in the explanatory page for each Slave.
Item
Environment-resistive Slave Specifications
11 to 25 V DC (supplied from the communications connector)
Communications
power supply voltage
Internal power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15% to 10%)
I/O power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15% to 10%)
Noise resistance
±1.5 Vp-p, pulse width 0.1 to 1 µs, rise time 1-ns pulse at startup (by noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, double amplitude 1.0 mm, or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature Operating: −10 to 55°C
Storage: −20 to 65°C
Ambient humidity
25% to 85%
Ambient environment
No corrosive gases.
Degree of protection [email protected]@@C(-1): IP66
[email protected]@@CL(-1): IP67
DRT1-B7AC: IP66
5-1-1
Mounting method
For Slaves with IP66 protection:
M4 screws (front panel)
M5 screws (rear panel)
For Slaves with IP67 protection:
M5 screws for both front and rear panel
Mounting strength
Communications
connector strength
Screw tightening
torque
100 N
100 N
Round connector (communications connectors, power supply,
I/O): 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m
- For Slaves with IP66 protection
M4 (mounting unit from front panel): 0.6 to 1.18 N⋅m
M5 (mounting unit from rear panel): 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m
- For Slaves with IP67 protection
M5 (mounting unit from front panel): 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m
M5 (mounting unit from rear panel): 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m
Current Consumption, Weight, Degree of Protection
The power consumption, weight and degree of protection of Environmentresistive Slaves are shown below.
Model
176
DRT1-ID04CL(-1)
Communications Internal Power
Weight
Power Supply
Supply current
current
25 mA max.
(See note.)
180 g max.
Degree of
Protection
IP67
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-ID08CL(-1)
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
(See note.)
580 g max.
240 g max.
IP66
IP67
DRT1-HD16C(-1)
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
180 g max.
IP66
Section 5-2
Connecting Communications Cables to Environment-resistive Slaves
Model
Communications Internal Power
Power Supply
Supply current
current
Weight
Degree of
Protection
DRT1-OD04CL(-1) 35 mA max.
DRT1-OD08C
30 mA max.
(See note.)
50 mA max.
180 g max.
585 g max.
IP67
IP66
DRT1-OD08CL(-1) 40 mA max.
DRT1-WD16C(-1) 30 mA max.
(See note.)
60 mA max.
240 g max.
590 g max.
IP67
IP66
DRT1-MD16C(-1)
DRT1-B7AC
50 mA max.
500 mA max.
590 g max.
500 g max.
IP66
IP66
30 mA max.
70 mA max.
Note In these Slaves, the internal power supply shares the communications power
supply.
5-2
Connecting Communications Cables to Environmentresistive Slaves
Communications cables are connected to Environment-resistive Slaves
(Waterproof Terminals, Environment-resistive Transistor Terminals, and B7AC
Interface Units) using round shielded connectors.
Thin communications cable is used with the round shielded connectors, so
the cable characteristics (such as the power supply wiring limitations due to
voltage drop over distance) are the same as regular thin cable. Slaves that
use the regular square connectors can also be connected to the Master Unit
through a T-branch Tap.
System with Slaves using Round Shielded Connectors Only
DeviceNet Master Unit
[email protected]@H1 Cable
with shielded connector
on one end
DCN2-1 shielded
T-branch connector
T-branch Tap
[email protected]@W1 Cable
with shielded connectors
on both ends
DCN2-1 shielded
T-branch connector
Communications
power supply
I/O
[email protected]@81-A Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
Sensor with
attached
connector
Environmentresistive Terminal
DCN2-1 shielded
T-branch connector
[email protected]@81-A
Cables with shielded
socket on one end
and plug on the other
I/O
Environmentresistive Terminal
Sensor with
attached
connector
Power
supply
[email protected] Connector
with terminating
resistance
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connector
on one end.
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
I/O Power Supply
Cables (carry power
for internal circuitry)
177
Section 5-2
Connecting Communications Cables to Environment-resistive Slaves
System with Slaves using Round Shielded Connectors and Regular Square Connectors
DeviceNet Master Unit
[email protected]@H1 Cable
with shielded connector
on one end
DCN2-1 shielded
T-branch connector
T-branch Tap
T-branch Tap
Environment-resistive
Terminals or other Slaves
using shielded connectors
Slaves using different
kinds of connectors
can be connected
through a T-branch
Slave with normal
Tap
connector
Power supply
I/O Power Supply Cable
Always use the communications cables listed in the following table to connect
Waterproof Terminals, Environment-resistive Transistor Terminals, and B7AC
Interface Units.
Model
[email protected]@W1
Description
Cable with round shielded connectors on both ends
[email protected]@F1
Cable with round shielded connector (female socket) on one end
[email protected]@H1
Cable with round shielded connector (male plug) on one end
DCN2-1
Shielded T-branch Connector (for
1 branch line)
The blank spaces (@@) in the model numbers indicate the cable length in 0.1m units. For example, add “C5” for a cable 0.5 m long.
Note Standard thin DeviceNet cable is used for these cables, so the cables cannot
be used in an environment that is subject to spattering unless steps are taken
to protect the cables.
178
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following connectors with built-in terminating resistors are also available.
A Terminating Resistor can be connected to a T-branch Connector.
Note
Model
DRS2-1
Description
Shielded Connector (male plug)
with Terminating Resistor
DRS2-2
Shielded Connector (female
socket) with Terminating Resistor
1. Standard thin DeviceNet cable is used for cables with shielded connectors,
so maximum current is 3 A.
2. Multi-drop wiring cannot be used with shielded connectors. Use T-branch
wiring with DCN2-1 T-branch Connectors and cables that have shielded
connectors on both ends.
3. The T-branch Connector’s communications power supply pin has a rated
current capacity of 3 A.
4. A cable with a shielded connector (socket) on one end can be used to connect to a regular [email protected] T-branch Tap. A cable with a shielded connector (socket) on one end can also be used to connect to the communications
power supply from a T-branch Connector.
5-2-1
Example System Assembly
Male
Male
Female
[email protected]@H1
Cable with shielded
connector on one end
Power Supply Tap
Terminating
resistor
installed
Female
[email protected]@W1 Cable
with shielded connectors
on both ends
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
[email protected]@F1
Cable with shielded
connector on one end
T-branch Tap (with
terminating resistor)
DCN2-1 shielded
T-branch connector
Communications
power supply
Note Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental
resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or other tools
to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the connectors.
5-3
5-3-1
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings
This section describes the node address settings and baud rate settings that
are common to all of the Environment-resistive Terminals. These settings are
made on separate switches, as shown in the following diagrams.
179
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Rotary switches
DIP switch pins 1 and 2
9 0 1
O
N
8
7
1
9 0 1
2
3
6 5 4
2
Baud rate setting
8
7
2
3
6 5 4
Node address setting
Note The [email protected]@@C(-1) Terminals do not have an “output hold/clear setting”
for communications errors. When a communications error occurs with a Terminal that has outputs, the corresponding output data from the Master is
cleared to 0 (OFF).
Node Address Settings
Each Environment-resistive Terminal’s node address is set in two-digit decimal with the rotary switches. The 10’s digit is set on the left rotary switch and
the 1’s digit is set on right rotary switch.
Any node address within the allowed setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Note The Environment-resistive Terminal won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node address is used for the Master or another Slave
node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
DIP switch pins 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table. (These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin settings
Pin 1
Pin 2
Note
Baud rate
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
250 kbps
OFF
ON
ON
ON
500 kbps
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate setting may cause communications errors between nodes
with correct baud rate settings.
5-3-2
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID08C (NPN)
Input Specifications
Item
180
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-ID08C
NPN
Input points
ON voltage
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
OFF voltage
OFF current
5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and V)
1 mA max.
Input current
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
(between each input terminal and V)
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Item
ON delay time
1.5 ms max.
Specification
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
2.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
Components of the DRT1-ID08C
DeviceNet Indicators
Input indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DIP switch pins 1 and 2: Indicates the input status of each input.
Baud rate
(Lit when the input is ON.)
Not used
(Refer to page 179)
Rotary switches 1 and 2:
Node address
(Refer to page 179)
Internal Circuits
DeviceNet communications
connector
Input connector
External power supply connector
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID08C Environment-resistive Terminal.
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for internal circuits)
24 V
CN2
(for inputs) (External power
supply connector)
0V
(for inputs)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
CAN H
CAN L
4
DRAIN
CN1
(Communications
connector)
coupler
1
V–
V+
Internal circuitry
Input 0
Physical Photolayer
CN3
Photocoupler
Input 1
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
CN4
181
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Wiring
Input 2
Input 4
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Input 3
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Input 1
Black (white)
Input 0
(end surface)
Input 6
Input 5
Input 7
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
Note
1. External power supply line 0V and input line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and input line V. When input power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to
sensors from input lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 1.0 A. If the total current exceeds 1.0 A, the power must not be
supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
2. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
182
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID08C Environment-resistive Terminal. All dimensions are in mm.
Four, M5
Mounting Holes
When screw mounting
from the front
When screw mounting
from the rear
5-3-3
Mounting screw
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
Nut
Mounting
screw
Four, 5.4 dia.
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 16 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-HD16C (NPN) and DRT1-HD16C-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-HD16C-1
Model
DRT1-HD16C
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
16 points
PNP
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1 mA max.
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC 6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
(between each input termi- (between each input terminal and V)
nal and G)
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
2.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
16 points with one common
183
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Components of the DRT1-HD16C and DRT1-HD16C-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Input indicators
Indicates the input status of each input.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
DIP switch pins 1 and 2:
Baud rate
(Refer to page 179)
0 1
1
2
DR0 DR1
OFF OFF
ON OFF
OFF ON
ON ON
DR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MS
NS
Datarate
125kbps
250kbps
500kbps
Not in use.
8
7
6 5 4
9 0 1
2
3
9 0 1
6 5 4
2
3
ADR
Node Address
8
7
Rotary switches 1 and 2:
Node address
(Refer to page 179)
DeviceNet communications
connector
Input connector
External power
supply connector
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-HD16C Environment-resistive Terminal (NPN).
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
0 V (for internal circuits)
CN2
3
(External power
0V
4
2
24 V
supply connector)
(for inputs)
(for inputs)
1
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
CAN H
4
DRAIN
CN1
(Communications
connector)
1
CAN L
coupler
5
3
V−
2
V+
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
184
Internal circuitry
4 Input 0
Physical
Photolayer
3
G
1
V
2 Input 1
Photocoupler
CN3
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-HD16C-1
Environment-resistive Terminal (PNP).
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
Photocoupler
0 V (for internal circuits)
3
CN2
(External power
4
2
0V
24 V
(for inputs)
(for inputs) supply connector)
1
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
Photocoupler
4 Input 0
DRAIN
CAN L
Internal circuitry
CAN H
4
Physical
Photolayer
coupler
5
1
3
V−
2
V+
CN1
(Communications
connector)
3
G
1
V
CN3
2 Input 1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-HD16C Environmentresistive Terminal (NPN).
CN5
4 Input 0
3
G
2 Input 1
4 Input 2
3
G
1
V
1
V
3
G
2 Input 5
4 Input 6
3
G
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
CN10
CN2
4 Input 12
3
G
2 Input 9
4 Input 10
3
G
4
2 Input 13
2 Input 11
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
3
G
CN1
(end surface)
3
1
V
1
V
2 Input 7
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
CN9
1
V
1
V
2 Input 3
Blue (black)
CN8
4 Input 8
Brown (red)
1
V
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
CN7
4 Input 4
Black (white)
3
G
CN6
Brown (red)
CN4
Blue (black)
CN3
Black (white)
Wiring
2
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
1
4 Input 14
2
V+
1
V
2 Input 15
−
+
−
+
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
185
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-HD16C-1 Environmentresistive Terminal (PNP).
CN5
4 Input 0
4 Input 4
3
G
3
G
2 Input 5
4 Input 2
3
G
1
V
1
V
1
V
3
G
3
G
Blue (black)
2 Input 13
1
V
CN1
(end surface)
3
4
2
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
1
4 Input 14
3
G
2 Input 11
PNP output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
CN2
1
V
4 Input 10
2 Input 7
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
2 Input 3
CN10
4 Input 12
2 Input 9
4 Input 6
3
G
Note
CN9
1
V
Blue (black)
2 Input 1
CN8
4 Input 8
Brown (red)
1
V
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
CN7
Black (white)
3
G
CN6
2
V+
1
V
2 Input 15
Brown (red)
CN4
Black (white)
CN3
−
PNP output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
+
−
+
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
1. External power supply line 0V and input line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and input line V. When input power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to
sensors from input lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 1.0 A. If the total current exceeds 1.0 A, the power must not be
supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
2. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-HD16C and
DRT1-HD16C-1 Environment-resistive Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
57
196
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MS
NS
51
0
8
Four, M5
215
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
45
Mounting screw
Nut
28+
--0.3
Mounting Holes
When screw mounting
from the front
6
205+
--0.3
Mounting
screw
Four, 5.4 dia.
28+
--0.3
When screw mounting
from the rear
205+
--0.3
186
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
5-3-4
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Transistor Outputs:
DRT-OD08C (NPN)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
DRT1-OD08C
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A, between each output terminal
and G)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
Components of the DRT1-OD08C
DIP switch pins 1 and 2:
Baud rate
(Refer to page 179)
Rotary switches 1 and 2:
Node address
(Refer to page 179)
Not used
Output indicators
Indicates the output status
of each output.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
DeviceNet communications
connector
Output connector
External power supply connector
187
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD08C Environment-resistive Terminal.
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for internal circuits)
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
0V
(for outputs)
supply connector)
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
Photocoupler
Output 0
Physical
layer
Photo-
DRAIN
CN1
(Communications
connector)
CN3
coupler
CAN L
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
24 V
CN2
(for outputs) (External power
V–
Photocoupler
V+
Output 1
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
CN4
Wiring
Output 0
Output 4
Output 2
Output 1
Output 3
Valve
Solenoid
(End surface)
Output 6
Output 5
Output 7
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
Note External power supply line 0V and output line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and output line V. When output power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to output devices from output lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 2.4 A. If the total current exceeds 2.4 A, the power must not be supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
188
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD08C Environment-resistive Terminal. All dimensions are in mm.
Four, M5
Mounting Holes
Mounting screw
When screw mounting
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
from the front
When screw mounting
from the rear
Mounting
screw
Four, 5.4 dia.
5-3-5
Nut
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 16 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-WD16C (NPN) and DRT1-WD16C-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-WD16C-1
Model
DRT1-WD16C
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
16 points
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
16 points with one common
PNP
189
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Components of the DRT1-WD16C and DRT1-WD16C-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Output indicators
Indicates the output status of each output.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
DIP switch pins 1 and 2:
Baud rate
(Refer to page 179)
0 1
1
2
DR0 DR1
OFF OFF
ON OFF
OFF ON
ON ON
DR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MS
NS
Datarate
125kbps
250kbps
500kbps
Not in use.
8
7
6 5 4
9 0 1
2
3
9 0 1
6 5 4
2
3
ADR
Node Address
8
7
Rotary switches 1 and 2:
Node address
(Refer to page 179)
Output connector
External power
supply connector
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-WD16C Environment-resistive Terminal (NPN).
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for internal circuits)
3
24 V
0V
4
2
CN2
(for outputs) (External
(for outputs)
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
CN1
(Communications
connector)
coupler
3
V−
2
V+
1
V
2 Output 1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
190
3
G
Internal
circuitry
1
DRAIN
CAN L
5
1
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
power supply
connector)
4 Output 0
Physical
layer
PhotoCAN H
4
DeviceNet communications
connector
CN3
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-WD16C-1
Environment-resistive Terminal (PNP).
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for internal circuits)
3
24 V
CN2
0V
4
2
(for outputs) (External
(for outputs)
24 V
(for internal
circuits)
Photocoupler
Physical
Photolayer
5
1
DRAIN
CN1
(Communications
connector)
coupler
CAN L
3
V−
2
V+
4 Output 0
3
G
Internal
circuitry
CAN H
4
1
V
CN3
2 Output 1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
Wiring
Voltage
step-down
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-WD16C Environmentresistive Terminal (NPN).
CN3
CN4
CN5
1
V
3
G
2 Output 1
3
G
CN6
CN7
4 Output 4
4 Output 0
3
G
power supply
connector)
1
Photocoupler
4Output 2
1
V
3
G
4 Output 6
3
G
2Output 3
CN9
1
V
1
V
3
G
2 Output 9
3
G
2 Output 7
CN10
CN2
4 Output 12
4 Output 8
1
V
2 Output
5
CN8
4
Output 10
3
1
V
4
2 Output 13
1
V
2 Output
11
3
G
Solenoid
Solenoid
2
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
1
Output
414
2
V+
1
V
2 Output
15
−
Valve
CN1
(end surface)
+
−
+
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
191
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-WD16C-1 Environmentresistive Terminal (PNP).
CN3
CN4
CN5
1
V
3
G
2 Output 1
3
G
CN7
4Output 2
1
V
3
G
2 Output
5
1
V
CN8
CN9
4 Output 8
4 Output 4
4 Output 0
3
G
CN6
3
G
2Output 3
3
G
2 Output 9
1
V
CN2
4 Output 12
1
V
4 Output 6
CN10
3
G
4
2 Output 13
1
V
2 Output 7
3
1
V
4 Output 10
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
1
2
V+
1
V
2 Output
15
−
Valve
2
Output
414
3
G
2 Output
11
CN1
(end surface)
Solenoid
Solenoid
+
−
+
Internal power I/O power
supply
supply
Note External power supply line 0V and output line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and output line V. When output power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to output devices from output lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 2.4 A. If the total current exceeds 2.4 A, the power must not be supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-WD16C and
DRT1-WD16C-1 Environment-resistive Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
57
196
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MS
NS
51
0
8
Four, M5
215
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
45
Mounting screw
Nut
28+
--0.3
Mounting Holes
When screw mounting
from the front
6
205+
--0.3
Mounting
screw
Four, 5.4 dia.
28+
--0.3
When screw mounting
from the rear
205+
--0.3
192
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
5-3-6
Environment-resistive Terminal (IP66) with 8 Inputs 8 Outputs:
DRT1-MD16C (NPN) and DRT1-MD16C-1 (PNP)
Specifications
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Internal I/O common
DRT1-MD16C
NPN
Input points
ON voltage
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
15 V DC min. (between
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V) each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V) each input terminal and G)
1 mA max.
OFF voltage
OFF current
DRT1-MD16C-1
PNP
Input current
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC 6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
(between each input termi- (between each input terminal and V)
nal and G)
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
2.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
8 points with one common
Output Specifications
Item
Components
Model
DRT1-MD16C
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
PNP
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.3 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.3 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
The following diagram shows the main components of the DRT1-MD16C and
DRT1-MD16C Environment-resistive Terminals.
Input indicators
DIP switch pins 1 and 2: Indicates the input status
of each contact.
Baud rate
(Lit when the input is ON.)
(Refer to page 179)
Rotary switches 1 and 2:
Node address
(Refer to page 179)
Specification
DRT1-MD16C-1
Input connector
Output indicators
DeviceNet indicators
Indicates the output
status of each contact.
(Refer to page 312.)
(Lit when the output is ON.)
DeviceNet communications
Output connector
connector
External power supply connector
193
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16C (NPN)
Environment-resistive Terminal.
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for inputs and internal circuits)
CN2
24 V
(for outputs) (External power
0V
supply connector)
(for outputs)
CAN L
CAN H
V–
Physical layer
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
CN3
(Input connector)
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
Internal circuitry
DRAIN
CN1 V+
(Communications
connector)
24 V
(for inputs and
internal circuits)
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
Photocoupler
Output 0
CN7
(Output connector)
Photocoupler
194
Output 1
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-MD16C-1
(PNP) Environment-resistive Terminal.
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
0 V (for inputs and internal circuits)
3
24 V
0V
4
2 (for outputs)
(for outputs)
1
CAN H
4
CN1
(Communications
connector)
1
3
24 V
(for inputs and
internal circuits)
Photocoupler
4 Input 0
Photocoupler
3
G
Photocoupler
V−
1
V
CN3
(Input connector)
2 Input 1
2
V+
DC-DC
converter
(Not
isolated)
Internal circuitry
DRAIN
CAN L
5
Physical layer
Photocoupler
CN2
(External power
supply connector)
Photocoupler
4 Output 0
3
G
1
V
CN7
(Output connector)
2 Output 1
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
195
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16C Environmentresistive Terminal (NPN).
Input 0
Input 5
Input 2
Input 7
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Input 3
Blue (black)
Output 1
Input 6
Output 5
Output 2
Solenoid
Valve
Output 6
Output 7
Internal circuits Output power
power supply
supply
NPN output
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
(End surface)
Output 4
Output 3
Brown (red)
Input 1
Output 0
Input 4
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-MD16C-1 Environmentresistive Terminal (PNP).
Input
CN3
CN4
CN5
4 Input 0
3
G
Output
CN6
CN7
3
G
2 Input 1
4 Input 2
3
G
1
V
3
G
2 Input 5
4 Input 6
3
G
1
V
2 Input 3
CN9
4 Output 0
4 Input 4
1
V
CN8
1
V
CN10
CN2
4 Output 4
1
V
3
G
2 Output 1
Output
42
3
G
2 Input 7
3
1
V
4
2 Output 5
1
V
2 Output
CN1
(End surface)
2
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
1
4 Output 6
3
G
2
V+
1
V
2 Output 7
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
3
−
Valve
Solenoid
+
−
+
Internal circuits Output power
power supply
supply
PNP output
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or
proximity sensor)
Note
1. External power supply line 0V and input line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and input line V. When input power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to
sensors from input lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 1.0 A. If the total current exceeds 1.0 A, the power must not be
supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
2. External power supply line 0V and output line G are connected internally,
as are external power supply line 24V and output line V. When output power is supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied
to output devices from output lines G and V provided that the total current
196
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Section 5-3
does not exceed 2.4 A. If the total current exceeds 2.4 A, the power must
not be supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
3. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-MD16C and
DRT1-MD16C-1 Environment-resistive Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
Four, M5
Mounting Holes
When screw mounting
from the front
When screw mounting
from the rear
5-3-7
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
Four, 5.4 dia.
Mounting screw Nut
Mounting
screw
Mounting in Control Panels
Use screws to mount an Environment-resistive Terminal in a control panel.
These Terminals cannot be mounted on a DIN Track.
Attaching the Terminal from the Front
The Terminals are tapped with M5 threads, so use M4 screws to clear the
threads and attach the Terminal to the control panel from the front. Drill the
mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions shown in the
dimensions diagrams and secure the Terminal with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6 to 1.18 N⋅m.
Attaching the Terminal from the Rear
Drill the mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions
shown in the dimensions diagrams and secure the Terminal with M5 screws.
The appropriate tightening torque is 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m.
197
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Installation Direction
The Terminal can be mounted in any direction. Any one of the following 6
directions is acceptable.
Vertical
5-3-8
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply and I/O Power
Supply
The internal power supply and I/O power supply are supplied from the external power supply connectors. Connect the external power supply to the Terminal with an XS2-series Round Waterproof Connector listed in the following
table.
Compatible Connectors
Connector
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Model number
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connector on one end (female socket)
Connector socket assembly (female)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
DRT1-OD08C
CS2R-D427-5
DRT1-ID08C
Shared I/O and
internal power supply
Shared I/O and
internal power supply
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cables with shielded
socket on one end
and plug on the other
Power
supply
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable with
shielded socket on one end
Note
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
1. Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or
other tools to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the
connectors.
2. The same I/O power supply can be used for both input and output devices,
but the noise from the output devices may cause the input devices to malfunction. Use separate power supplies if possible.
I/O Wiring
Connect the I/O Wiring to the Environment-resistive Terminal with the XS2series Round Waterproof Connectors listed in the following table.
Compatible Connectors
198
Connector
Cable with connector on one end (male plug)
Model number
[email protected]
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Connector plug assembly (male)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
[email protected]@81-A
[email protected]@
Section 5-3
Environment-resistive Terminals (IP66)
Sensors that are pre-wired with a connector can be connected directly.
Refer to the Catalog or manual for details on the device’s connections before
connecting any device.
[email protected]@81-A Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
[email protected] Cable with
shielded plug on one end
Sensor with attached connector
[email protected]@
Pre-wired Sensor
Pre-wired Sensor with connector
Note
1. Refer to the OMRON Sensors Catalog (X42-E1-3) for more details on the
sensor connections and Round Waterproof Connectors.
2. One of the Y-joints listed in the following table will be needed when connecting sensors or limit switches to an Environment-resistive Terminal with
16 inputs (DRT1-HD16C(-1)) or 16 outputs (DRT1-WD16C(-1)).
Connector
Model number
Y-joint with plug/socket (with cable)
Y-joint with plug/socket (no cable)
[email protected]
XS2R-D426-1
[email protected]
Y-joint with cable
Terminal with 16
inputs or 16 outputs
XS2R-D426-1 Y-joint
without cable
Note An XS2G Connector Assembly (screw-in wire connection) cannot be connected to a Y-joint Connector. A crimp-connector or soldered connector can
be connected to a a Y-joint Connector.
[email protected] Y-joint Connector with Cable
Wiring diagram
45.5
15
4.6 dia.
CN1
35
1
2
3
4
CN2
6 dia.
18
CN2
8.5
Blue mark
44.7
13.6
1
2
3
4
CN1
L
4
3
2
1
XS2R-D426-1 Y-joint Connector without Cable
7
15
Wiring diagram
27
4.5 dia.
CN2
CN0
(37)
CN2
4
3
2
1
CN1
4
3
2
1
24.5
18
12.5
CN1
58.3
4
3
CN0
2
1
Blue mark
199
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental
resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or other tools
to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the connectors.
Always cap unused connectors with an XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover or XS2Z15 Dust Cover, shown in the following diagram.
XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover
The connector will meet IP66
standards if a Waterproof Cover is
attached. Tighten the connector by
hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m.
Press the Dust Cover onto the
connector firmly. The Dust Cover
will protect the connector from dust,
but does not meet IP66 standards.
Maintaining Environmental Resistance
• The IP66 environmental resistance level will be lost if the surfaces where
the contact block and cover meet are subjected to excessive force. Protect the contact block and cover from excessive force or shock.
• The IP66 standard is lower than waterproof standards. Do not submerge
the system components.
• The body of the components is plastic resin. Do not place objects on the
components or allow the components to be stepped on.
There are two kinds of wiring for OMRON 2-wire Proximity Switches (prewired with connector). One kind has IEC pin allocation (M1GJ type) and the
other has OMRON pin allocation (M1J type). Refer to the following table to
determine the appropriate Environment-resistive Terminal to use with each
kind of switch.
Proximity Switch
5-4
5-4-1
Compatible Terminals
IEC pin allocation (M1GJ type)
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-MD16C-1
OMRON pin allocation (M1J type)
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-HD16C
DRT1-MD16C
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Node Address, Baud Rate, and Output Hold/Clear Settings
This section describes the node address setting, baud rate setting, and the
hold/clear outputs for communications error setting. These settings are common to all of the Waterproof Terminals and are made on the shown in the following diagrams.
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
Output hold/clear setting:
O
N
0 1
1
2
3
4
2 3
7 8
9
5 6
2 3
7 8
0 1
4
9
Rotary switches
Pins 1 and 2
Pin 4 (affects only outputs)
Output hold/clear setting for
communications errors (for outputs)
4
5 6
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node address setting
200
Baud rate setting
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Node Address Setting
Each Waterproof Terminal’s node address is set in two-digit decimal with the
rotary switches. The 10’s digit is set on the left rotary switch and the 1’s digit is
set on right rotary switch.
Any node address within the allowed setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
The Waterproof Terminal won’t be able to participate in communications if the
same node address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node
address duplication error).
Note The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin settings
Pin 1
Note
Baud rate
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate setting may cause communications errors between nodes
with correct baud rate settings.
ON
The functions of pins 3 and 4 differ for inputs and outputs, as shown in the following diagram. (Pins 3 and 4 are factory-set to OFF.)
3
4
Output Hold/Clear Setting
Input: Not used (Always OFF)
Output: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Reserved: Always OFF
Pin 3:
Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 4:
As follows:
Inputs:
No function (Always OFF)
Outputs:
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
OFF (Clear): All output data from the Master will be cleared to 0 when a
communications error occurs.
ON (Hold):
All output data from the Master will be retained when a
communications error occurs.
201
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
5-4-2
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 4 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID04CL (NPN) and DRT1-ID04CL-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-ID04CL-1
Model
DRT1-ID04CL
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
PNP
4 points (Uses one word in Master.)
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Input current
1 mA max.
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA max./point at 17 V DC
(between each input terminal and V)
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA max./point at 17 V DC
(between each input terminal and G)
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits
4 points with one common
Components of the DRT1-ID04CL and DRT1-ID04CL-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Input indicators
Indicate the input status of each contact.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
Bus
DRT1
Rotary Switches 1 and 2:
Node address setting
(Refer to page 200.)
DeviceNet communications
connector
MS
NS
IN
Internal Circuits
I/O PWR
DIP switch:
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
(Refer to page 200.)
External power
supply connector
Input connector
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID04CL Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
G
3
4
2
1
V
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
DRAIN
Internal circuitry
CAN-H
IN0
G
4
3
1
IN1
G
4
3
1
2
202
V
2
V
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID04CL-1
Waterproof Terminal (PNP).
G
3
4
2
1
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
V
IN0
G
4
3
1
V
2
IN1
G
DRAIN
4
3
1
V
2
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID04CL Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
3 G
4
Input 0
2
NC
1 V
1 V
1 V
2
3
1
4
4
Input
1
1 V
2
NC
4
Input
3
3 G
2
NC
3 G
+
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
I/O power
supply
Brown (white)
−
4
Input
2
Black (white)
Wiring
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID04CL-1 Waterproof
Terminal (PNP).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
2
3
1
4
3 G
4
Input 0
1 V
1 V
1 V
4
Input
1
2
NC
Input
2
4
2
NC
Input
3
3 G
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
+
I/O power
supply
Note
4
1 V
3 G
−
2
NC
PNP output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
1. External power supply line 0V and input line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and input line V. When input power is
203
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to
sensors from input lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 1.0 A. If the total current exceeds 1.0 A, the power must not be
supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
2. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID04CL and
DRT1-ID04CL-1 Waterproof Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
45
114
10
MS
54
Bus
DRT1
NS
IN
I/O PWR
30
Mounting holes
10.5±0.1
10.5±0.1
Three, 4.0 dia. or M4
5-4-3
104±0.2
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 8 Transistor Inputs:
DRT1-ID08CL (NPN) and DRT1-ID08CL-1 (PNP)
Input Specifications
Item
Model
DRT1-ID08CL
Internal I/O common
Input points
NPN
PNP
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
ON voltage
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and V)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and V)
1 mA max.
15 V DC min. (between
each input terminal and G)
5 V DC max. (between
each input terminal and G)
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA max./point at 17 V DC
(between each input terminal and G)
ON delay time
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA max./point at 17 V DC
(between each input terminal and V)
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
204
Specification
DRT1-ID08CL-1
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Components of the DRT1-ID08CL and DRT1-ID08CL-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Input indicators
Indicate the input status of each contact.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
Bus
DRT1
Rotary Switches 1 and 2:
Node address setting
(Refer to page 200.)
DeviceNet communications
connector
MS
NS
IN
External power
supply connector
Input connector
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID08CL Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
G
3
4
2
1
V
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
CAN-H
DRAIN
IN0
G
4
3
1
V
2
IN1
G
4
3
1
V
2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-ID08CL-1
Waterproof Terminal (PNP).
G
3
4
2
1
V
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
DRAIN
Internal circuitry
Internal Circuits
I/O PWR
DIP switch:
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
(Refer to page 200.)
IN0
G
4
3
1
V
2
IN1
G
4
3
1
V
2
205
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID08CL Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
2
3
1
3 G
4
Input 0
2
NC
2
NC
3 G
4
Input 4
2
NC
4
Input
6
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
4
2
NC
Input 1
4
4
Input
3
3 G
2
NC
4
Input 5
3 G
2
NC
4
Input
7
3 G
2
NC
3 G
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
I/O power
supply
Black (white)
+
Brown (white)
−
3 G
4
Input 2
NPN output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-ID08CL-1 Waterproof
Terminal (PNP).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
4
Input 0
2
NC
1 V
1
4
Input 1
3 G
4
Input 2
2
NC
4
Input
3
3 G
4
Input 4
2
NC
1 V
1 V
2
NC
4
3 G
1 V
1 V
2
3
3 G
4
Input 5
1 V
2
NC
3 G
4
Input
6
1 V
1 V
2
NC
4
Input
7
2
NC
3 G
2-wire sensor
(limit switch)
Note
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
I/O power
supply
Blue (black)
+
Brown (white)
−
3 G
PNP output 3-wire sensor
(photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
1. External power supply line 0V and input line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and input line V. When input power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to
sensors from input lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 1.0 A. If the total current exceeds 1.0 A, the power must not be
supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
2. Wire colors in parentheses are the previous JIS colors for photoelectric
and proximity sensors.
206
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-ID08CL and
DRT1-ID08CL-1 Waterproof Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
45
160
10
MS
54
Bus
DRT1
NS
IN
I/O PWR
30
Mounting holes
10.5±0.1
10.5±0.1
Three, 4.0 dia. or M5
5-4-4
150±0.2
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 4 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-OD04CL (NPN) and DRT1-OD04CL-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
Specification
DRT1-OD04CL-1
Model
DRT1-OD04CL
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
PNP
4 points (Uses one word in Master.)
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
4 points with one common
207
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Components of the DRT1-OD04CL and DRT1-OD04CL-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
Bus
DRT1
Rotary Switches 1 and 2:
Node address setting
(Refer to page 200.)
DeviceNet communications
connector
MS
NS
OUT
Internal Circuits
I/O PWR
DIP switch
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
(Refer to page 200.)
External power
supply connector
Output connector
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD04CL
Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
Voltage
step-down
3
G
4
2
V
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
1
DRAIN
OUT0
4
G
3
1
V
2
OUT1
4
G
3
1
V
2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD04CL-1
Waterproof Terminal (PNP).
Voltage
step-down
G
3
4
2
V
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
1
OUT0
G
4
3
1
OUT1
DRAIN
G
4
3
1
2
208
V
2
V
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD04CL Waterproof
Terminal (NPN).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
2
3
1
2
NC
1 V
1 V
1 V
2
NC
4
Output
3
3 G
−
4
Output
2
1 V
4
Output
1
4
3 G
4
Output 0
2
NC
3 G
+
I/O power
supply
Solenoid
Valve
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD04CL-1 Waterproof
Terminal (PNP).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
3 G
4
Output 0
2
NC
1 V
1 V
1 V
2
3
1
4
Output
1
4
1 V
2
NC
3 G
−
4
Output
2
4
Output
3
2
NC
3 G
+
I/O power
supply
Solenoid
Valve
Note External power supply line 0V and output line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and output line V. When output power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to output devices from output lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 2.0 A. If the total current exceeds 2.0 A, the power must not be supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
209
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD04CL and
DRT1-OD04CL-1 Waterproof Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
45
114
10
MS
54
Bus
DRT1
NS
OUT
I/O PWR
30
Mounting holes
10.5±0.1
10.5±0.1
Three, 4.0 dia. or M5
5-4-5
104±0.2
Waterproof Terminal (IP67) with 8 Transistor Outputs:
DRT1-OD08CL (NPN) and DRT1-OD08CL-1 (PNP)
Output Specifications
Item
210
Specification
DRT1-OD08CL-1
Model
DRT1-OD08CL
Internal I/O common
Output points
NPN
PNP
8 points (Uses one word in Master.)
Rated output current
Residual voltage
0.5 A/point, 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
1.2 V max. (at 0.5 A,
between each output termi- between each output terminal and G)
nal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Number of circuits
1.5 ms max.
8 points with one common
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Components of the DRT1-OD08CL and DRT1-OD08CL-1
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
Output indicators
Indicate the output status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
Bus
DRT1
Rotary Switches 1 and 2:
Node address setting
(Refer to page 200.)
DeviceNet communications
connector
MS
NS
OUT
External power
supply connector
Output connector
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD08CL
Waterproof Terminal (NPN).
Voltage
step-down
3
G
4
2
V
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
1
DRAIN
OUT0
4
G
3
1
V
2
OUT1
4
G
3
1
V
2
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the DRT1-OD08CL-1
Waterproof Terminal (PNP).
Voltage
step-down
G
3
4
2
V
1
CAN-H
CAN-L
4
V1 5 3
2
V+
Internal circuitry
Internal Circuits
I/O PWR
DIP switch
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate setting
Pin 3: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
(Refer to page 200.)
OUT0
G
4
3
1
V
2
OUT1
DRAIN
G
4
3
1
V
2
211
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Wiring
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD08CL Waterproof
Terminal (NPN).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
2
3
1
3 G
4
Output 0
2
NC
2
NC
3 G
4
Output 4
2
NC
4
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
4
Output 1
2
NC
4
4
Output
3
3 G
−
3 G
4
Output 2
2
NC
4
Output 5
3 G
2
NC
Output
6
4
Output
7
3 G
2
NC
3 G
+
I/O power
supply
Solenoid
Valve
The following diagram shows the wiring of the DRT1-OD08CL-1 Waterproof
Terminal (PNP).
CAN H
CAN L
4 5
1
3
DRAIN
V−
3 G
2
NC
2
V+
2
3
1
2
NC
3 G
4
Output 2
2
NC
3 G
4
Output 4
2
NC
4
Output
6
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
4
Output 1
2
NC
4
3 G
−
3 G
4
Output 0
4
Output
3
2
NC
3 G
4
Output 5
2
NC
3 G
4
Output
7
2
NC
3 G
+
I/O power
supply
Solenoid
Valve
Note External power supply line 0V and output line G are connected internally, as
are external power supply line 24V and output line V. When output power is
supplied to external power supply connectors, power can be supplied to output devices from output lines G and V provided that the total current does not
exceed 2.4 A. If the total current exceeds 2.4 A, the power must not be supplied from the connector; it must be supplied externally instead.
212
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-OD08CL and
DRT1-OD08CL-1 Waterproof Terminals. All dimensions are in mm.
45
160
10
MS
54
Bus
DRT1
NS
OUT
I/O PWR
30
Mounting holes
10.5±0.1
10.5±0.1
Three, 4.0 dia. or M5
5-4-6
150±0.2
Mounting in Control Panels
Use screws to mount a Waterproof Terminal in a control panel. These Terminals cannot be mounted on a DIN Track.
Drill the mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions
shown in the dimensions diagrams and secure the Terminal with M5 screws.
The appropriate tightening torque is 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m.
IN
Bus
DRT1
I/O PWR
The Terminal can be mounted in any direction. Any one of the following 6
directions is acceptable.
MS
NS
Vertical
Bus
DRT1
NS
IN
I/O PWR
MS
MS
Installation Direction
NS
Bus
DRT1
IN
I/O PWR
Bus
DRT1
I/O PWR
MS
5-4-7
NS
IN
Wiring Internal Power Supplies, I/O Power Supplies, and I/O Lines
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply and I/O Power
Supply
The internal power supply shares the communications power supply, so it isn’t
necessary to connect a separate internal power supply.
To provide the I/O power supply, connect the external power supply to the Terminal with an XS2-series Round Waterproof Connector listed in the following
table.
213
Section 5-4
Waterproof Terminals (IP67)
Compatible Connectors
Connector
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Model
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connector on one end (female socket)
Connector socket assembly (female)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
DRT1-ID04CL
CS2R-D427-5
DRT1-OD04CL
I/O power supply
I/O power supply
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cables with shielded
socket on one end
and plug on the other
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable with
shielded socket on one end
Note
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
1. Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or
other tools to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the
connectors.
2. The same I/O power supply can be used for both input and output devices,
but the noise from the output devices may cause the input devices to malfunction. Use separate power supplies if possible.
I/O Wiring
Connect the I/O Wiring to the Environment-resistive Terminal with the XS2series Round Waterproof Connectors listed in the following table.
Compatible Connectors
Connector
Cable with connector on one end (male plug)
Model number
[email protected]
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Connector plug assembly (male)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
[email protected]@81-A
[email protected]@
Sensors that are pre-wired with a connector can be connected directly.
Refer to the Catalog or manual for details on the device’s connections before
connecting any device.
[email protected]@81-A Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
[email protected] Cable with
shielded plug on one end
Sensor with attached connector
[email protected]@
Pre-wired Sensor with connector
Note
Pre-wired Sensor
1. Refer to the OMRON Sensors Catalog (X42-E1-3) for more details on the
sensor connections and Round Waterproof Connectors.
2. Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environ-
214
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
mental resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or
other tools to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the
connectors.
3. Always cap unused connectors with an XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover or
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover, shown in the following diagram.
XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover
The connector will meet IP67
standards if a Waterproof Cover is
attached. Tighten the connector by
hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m.
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover
Press the Dust Cover onto the
connector firmly. The Dust Cover
will protect the connector from dust,
but does not meet IP67 standards.
Maintaining Environmental Resistance
• The IP67 environmental resistance level will be lost if the surfaces where
the contact block and cover meet are subjected to excessive force. Protect the contact block and cover from excessive force or shock.
• The IP67 standard is not completely waterproof. Do not submerge the
system components.
• The body of the components is plastic resin. Do not place objects on the
components or allow the components to be stepped on.
Note There are two kinds of wiring for OMRON 2-wire Proximity Switches (prewired with connector). One kind has IEC pin allocation (M1GJ type) and the
other has OMRON pin allocation (M1J type). Refer to the following table to
determine the appropriate Waterproof Terminal to use with each kind of
switch.
Proximity Switch
IEC pin allocation (M1GJ type)
OMRON pin allocation (M1J type)
5-5
Compatible Terminal
DRT1-ID04CL-1
DRT1-ID08CL-1
DRT1-ID04CL
DRT1-ID08CL
B7AC Interface Units
The B7AC Interface Unit acts as an interface between I/O Connector-type
B7AC Link Terminal Units and the DeviceNet Master Unit. Up to 3 B7AC Link
Terminal Units (3 Units × 10 inputs/Unit) can be connected to the B7AC Interface Unit.
The B7AC Interface Unit uses shielded connectors to connect to both the
DeviceNet Master Unit and B7AC Link Terminal Units, so the cable connections can be made easily without tools and the connections meet the high
IP66 environmental resistance standards.
5-5-1
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings (DIP Switch 1)
This section explains the B7AC Interface Unit’s node address and baud rate
settings. These settings are made using the following pins on DIP switch 1.
215
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
SW1
DIP switch 1, pins 1 through 6
DIP switch 1, pins 7 and 8
SW2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Node address
setting
DIP switch 1
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
ON
Pins 7 to 8: Baud rate setting
DIP switch 2
Pins 1 to 3: B7AC transmission delay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pins 4 to 5: Reserved (Always OFF)
Pins 6 to 8: B7AC communications error
signal setting
B7AC
B7AC communications
transmission
error signal setting
delay setting
Baud rate setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
The settings on DIP switch 2 are communications settings for the individual
B7AC Interface Unit. Refer to Settings on DIP Switch 2 on page 219 for details
on these settings.
Node Address Settings
The B7AC Interface Unit’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of DIP
switch 1. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
DIP switch setting
Node address
Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 (default)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
61
62
1
1
1
1
1
1
63
0: OFF, 1: ON
Note
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 of DIP switch 1 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table. (These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin Settings
Pin 7
Note
Baud rate
Pin 8
OFF
OFF
125 kbps
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps (default)
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications. Furthermore, a node with an incorrect baud rate setting may cause communications errors between nodes
with correct baud rate settings.
216
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
5-5-2
Example System Configuration
DeviceNet Master Unit
DCN2-1 Shielded
T-branch connector
T-branch Tap
DRT1-B7AC
B7AC Interface Unit
Internal power supply
DeviceNet communications cable
[email protected]@W1 Cable with
shielded connectors on both ends
B7AC-series
I/O Connector-type
Link Terminal Units
(10 points/Unit)
Sensors with
attached
connectors
10 sensors
10 inputs
10 sensors
Communications media
[email protected]@[email protected] Cables
with shielded connector plugs
10 inputs
10 sensors
10 inputs
Compatible B7AC Link
Terminal Units
The following B7AC Link Terminal Units (Sensor I/O Connector type) can be
connected to the B7AC Interface Unit.
Model
5-5-3
Number of
inputs
Input format
Transmission delay with the
B7AC Interface Unit
B7AC-T10A1
B7AC-T10A1-A
10 inputs
10 inputs
NPN
NPN
19.2 ms
19.2 ms or 3 ms (switchable)
B7AC-T10A1-B
10 inputs
PNP
19.2 ms or 3 ms (switchable)
B7AC Interface Unit: DRT1-B7AC
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Model
Specification
DRT1-B7AC
Number of I/O points 30 B7AC inputs max. (up to 3 B7AC Link Terminal Units can
be connected with 10 inputs/Unit)
Uses two input words in Master.
Internal current consumption
24-V DC communications power supply: 70 mA max.
24-V DC internal power supply: 500 mA max.
(This is the current when 3 B7AC Link Terminal Units are connected and all inputs are OFF. It does not include the current
consumed by connected external devices.)
Dielectric strength
500 V AC for 1 min. (between insulated circuits, detected leakage current 1 mA)
Internal power supply normal:
±600 V, 10 min., with pulse widths of 100 ns to 1 µs
Internal power supply common:
±1.5 kV, 10 min., with pulse widths of 100 ns to 1 µs
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Malfunction:
10 to 150 kHz, single amplitude 0.5 mm, or 70 m/s2
Destruction:
10 to 150 kHz, single amplitude 0.75 mm, or 100 m/s2
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
−10 to 55°C
Ambient operating
temperature
217
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Item
Ambient operating
humidity
Specification
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Degree of protection IP66
Mounting method
M5 screws
Mounting strength
Communications
connector strength
Weight
100 N for 10 s
100 N pull for 10 s
Approx. 500 g max.
Communications Specifications (with B7AC-series Units)
Item
Specification
Number of ports
3 ports for communications with B7AC Link Terminal Units
(Round shielded connectors)
Number of I/O points 30 inputs (10 inputs/port × 3 ports)
Communications
Split multiplex transmission in one direction
method
Transmission delay
Standard: 19.2 ms typical (31 ms max.)
High-speed: 3 ms typical (5 ms max.)
Communications
path
0.5 mm VCTF cable, 1 A current max. on +/− lines
Communications dis- With standard transmission delay: 50 m max.
tance
With high-speed transmission delay: 30 m max.
Components of the DRT1-B7AC
DIP switch 1:
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate setting
(Refer to page 215.)
B7A
ERR OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
1 2 3 8 1632 0 1 A B C NCNC A B C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
B7A
ONNODE ADDRESSDR SPEED
ERR A ERR B ERR C MS
A
NC
DIP switch 2:
Not used.
Pins 1 to 3: B7AC transmission delay setting
Pins 4 and 5: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pins 6 to 8: B7AC communications error signal setting
(Refer to page 219.)
218
DeviceNet indicators
(Refer to page 312.)
B7AC-series indicators
Indicate the status of each port.
NS
C
B
B7AC-series Unit
connectors
P
DeviceNet communications
connector
External power
supply connector
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
LED Indicators
Usage
DeviceNet
indicators
Name
MS
Status
Lit
Flashing
Lit
Flashing
Not lit
NS
Color
Green
Normal status
Red
Settings not made.
Fatal error
---
Non-fatal error
Power is not being supplied.
Lit
Flashing
Green
Normal status
Communications not established (negotiating with Master)
Lit
Red
Fatal communications error (such as a node address
duplication error)
Non-fatal communications error
Not lit
Lit
--Green
Power is not being supplied.
Normal status
Lit
Lit
Red
Orange
Not lit
---
Communications error
A communications error occurred but the error was
resolved later. (See note 1.)
Power is not being supplied.
A B7AC Link Terminal Unit was not connected when the
power was turned ON. (See note 2.)
Flashing
B7AC-series
indicators
ERR A
ERR B
ERR C
(for ports A,
B, and C)
Meaning
Note
1. The indicator can be restored to green by resetting the power (turning the
power OFF and then ON again.)
2. The indicator will become green or orange if a B7AC-series Unit is connected after the power was turned ON.
Depending on the B7AC communications timing at startup, a momentary
communications error may occur and cause the indicator to become orange after the error is resolved. It the indicator is orange, it can be restored
to green by resetting the power (turning the power OFF and then ON
again.)
Settings on DIP Switch 2
The settings on DIP switch 2 are B7AC communications settings for the individual B7AC Interface Unit.
For details on the DIP switch 1 settings, refer to 5-5-1 Node Address and
Baud Rate Settings (DIP Switch 1).
SW1
SW2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Node address
setting
DIP switch 1
Pins 1 to 6: Node address setting
ON
Pins 7 to 8: Baud rate setting
DIP switch 2
Pins 1 to 3: B7AC transmission delay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pins 4 to 5: Reserved (Always OFF)
Pins 6 to 8: B7AC communications error
signal setting
B7AC
B7AC communications
transmission
error signal setting
delay setting
Baud rate setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
219
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
B7AC Transmission Delay Setting (Pins 1 to 3)
Pins 1 to 3 set the transmission delay time for communications with the B7AC
Link Terminal Unit at each port, as shown in the following table. These pins
are set to ON (high-speed) at the factory.
Pin 1
Port A
OFF
ON
Pin 2
Port B
Pin 3
Port C
OFF
ON
Transmission delay time
OFF
ON
19.2 ms typical
3 ms typical (factory setting)
B7AC Communications Error Signal Setting
Pins 6 to 8 specify whether an error signal (notification) will be sent to the
Master Unit when an error occurs in B7AC communications through the corresponding port. These pins are set to ON (send error signal) at the factory
Pin 6
Port A
OFF
ON
Pin 7
Port B
Pin 8
Port C
OFF
ON
B7AC communications error signal
setting
OFF
ON
Do not send error signal.
Send error signal. (factory setting)
If an error occurs in a port and the corresponding pin is ON (send error signal), the B7AC Communications Error Flag will be turned ON in the words
allocated in the Master Unit. See I/O Allocation below for details on the location of the B7AC Communications Error Flag.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Unit’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing any DIP switch settings.
2. Set the appropriate transmission delay time for the B7AC Link Terminal
Unit connected to each port.
3. Always turn OFF the B7AC communications error signal setting for a port
if there isn’t a B7AC Link Terminal Unit connected to the port.
I/O Allocation
The B7AC Interface Unit is allocated two input words in the Master Unit. The
following table shows the usage of these two words when word “m+0” is the
first word allocated and “m+1” is the second word allocated.
Port on B7AC
Interface Unit
Input connector 0 to 9
Input connector 0 to 5
Word m+0, bits 00 to 09
Word m+0, bits 10 to 15
Port C
Input connector 6 to 9
Input connector 0 to 9
Word m+1, bits 00 to 03
Word m+1, bits 04 to 13
9
8
5
4
ERR
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
8
7
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
3
2
1
0
Inputs for B7AC Unit
connected to port B
Inputs for B7AC Unit
connected to port C
9
3
Inputs for B7AC Unit
connected to port A
Inputs for B7AC Unit
connected to port B
Note 1
Wd m+1
15 14 13 12 11 10
Note 2
Wd m+0
220
I/O bits allocated to Master Unit
Port A
Port B
Bit:
Note
Connector on B7AC Link
Terminal Unit
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
1. Bit 14 of word m+1 is the B7AC Communications Error Flag for the B7AC
Interface Unit. This flag will be turned ON if there is a communications error
in any one of the ports set to “send error signal” in pins 6 to 8 of DIP switch
2. The flag will be reset to 0 automatically when the communications error
is resolved.
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
2. This bit is always 0 (OFF).
I/O Allocation Example
When the Master Unit is mounted in a C200HX/HG/HE PLC and fixed allocation is used for DeviceNet, IR area words IR 350 through IR 399 are allocated
to inputs from Slaves with node addresses 0 through 49.
If the B7AC Interface Unit’s node address is set to 01, the first allocated word
(m+0) will be IR 351. Ports A, B, and C will be allocated the following bits:
Port on B7AC
Interface Unit
Port A
Connector on B7AC Link
Terminal Unit
Input connector 0 to 9
I/O bits allocated to Master Unit
IR 35100 to IR 35109
Port B
Input connector 0 to 5
Input connector 6 to 9
IR 35110 to IR 35115
IR 35200 to IR 35203
Port C
Input connector 0 to 9
IR 35204 to IR 35213
IR 35214 is the B7AC Communications Error Flag for the B7AC Interface
Unit.
Note If a communications error occurs in communications with a B7AC Link Terminal Unit, normal communications will be restored automatically when the communications error is resolved. The time required to restore communications
depends on the error continuation time (time from error occurrence to error
resolution), as shown below.
• Error continuation time less than 500 ms:
The B7AC Communications Error Flag will be turned OFF 500 ms after
the error occurred.
• Error continuation time greater than 500 ms:
The B7AC Communications Error Flag will be turned OFF after the error is resolved.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m+0: Wd 351
m+1: Wd 352
0 ERR
B7AC Communications Error Flag
B7AC Unit connected to port A
B7AC Unit connected to port B
B7AC Unit connected to port C
221
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Internal Circuits
DC-DC
converter
(Isolated)
24 V (for internal circuits)
1
2
3
Photocoupler
Communications
connector
V−
2
V+
DC-DC
converter
(Not isolated)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
CN1
3
B7AC
SIG-IN
Input A power supply +24 V
B7AC trans. delay switch
Input A power supply 0 V
1
4
2
B7AC
SIG-IN
Input B power supply +24 V
B7AC trans. delay switch
Input B power supply 0 V
A
Port A
connector
1
B
4
2
Port B
connector
3
B7AC
SIG-IN
Input C power supply +24 V
B7AC trans. delay switch
Input C power supply 0 V
1
4
2
3
222
External
power supply
connector
3
Photocoupler
1
DRAIN
CAN L
5
0 V (for internal circuits)
Internal circuitry
CAN H
4
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
P
4
C
Port C
connector
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the DRT1-B7AC Interface
Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
57
115
8
ERR AERR BERR C MS
51
A
NC
NS
C
B
P
Four, M5
135
6
45
Mounting Holes
Four, 4.2 dia. or M4
Mounting screw
Nut
28+
--0.5
When mounting from the front
with M4 screws and nuts
125+
--0.5
Four, 5.4 dia.
Mounting
screw
28+
--0.5
When mounting directly from
the rear with M5 screws
125+
--0.5
5-5-4
Mounting in Control Panels
Use screws to mount a B7AC Interface Unit in a control panel. These Units
cannot be mounted on a DIN Track.
Attaching the Unit from the Front
The Units are tapped with M5 threads, so use M4 screws to clear the threads
and attach the Unit to the control panel from the front. Drill the mounting holes
in the control panel according to the dimensions shown in the dimensions diagrams and secure the Unit with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque
is 0.6 to 1.18 N⋅m.
Attaching the Unit from the Rear
Drill the mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions
shown in the dimensions diagram and secure the Unit with M5 screws. The
appropriate tightening torque is 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m.
223
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
The Unit can be mounted in any direction. Any one of the following 6 directions is acceptable.
P
C
P
P
Vertical
NC
C
A
B
B
P
NC
A
C
5-5-5
B
C
B
A
A
NC
NC
Installation Direction
Wiring the Internal Power Supply and Input Lines
Wiring the Internal Power
Supply
Connect the external power supply to the B7AC Interface Unit with an XS2series Round Waterproof Connector listed in the following table.
Compatible Connectors
Connector
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Model
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connector on one end (female socket)
Connector socket assembly (female)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
DRT1-B7AC
CS2R-D427-5
DRT1-B7AC
I/O power supply
I/O power supply
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cables with shielded
socket on one end
and plug on the other
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable with
shielded socket on one end
XS2R-D427-5
T-joint
[email protected]@[email protected] Cable
with shielded socket on one
end and plug on the other
Note Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental
resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or other tools
to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the connectors.
Connecting to B7AC Link
Terminal Units
(Communications Media)
224
Connect the I/O Wiring to the B7AC Interface Unit with the XS2-series Round
Waterproof Connectors listed in the following table.
Compatible Connectors
Connector
Cable with connector on one end (male plug)
Model
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connectors on both ends (socket and plug)
Connector plug assembly (male)
(Crimp-connector or solder type)
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Refer to the Catalog or manual for details on the device’s connections before
connecting any device.
DRT1-B7AC
B7AC Interface Unit
B7AC-series
I/O Connector-type
Link Terminal Units
(10 points/Unit)
Sensors with
attached connectors
(See note 3.)
10 sensors
10 inputs
Communications media
[email protected]@[email protected] Cables
with shielded connector plugs
10 sensors
10 inputs
10 sensors
10 inputs
Note
1. Refer to the OMRON Sensors Catalog (X42-E1-3) for more details on the
sensor connections and Round Waterproof Connectors.
2. A separate power supply cannot be connected to a B7AC Link Terminal
Unit to supplement the power from the B7AC Interface Unit’s internal power supply.
3. Limit Switches, Proximity Switches, Photoelectric Switches, etc. (Sensors
with attached connectors, Pre-wired Sensors with connectors, and regular
Pre-wired Sensors can be used.
4. Tighten the connector by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the connector is not tightened sufficiently, it will not provide the expected environmental resistance and may come loose from vibration. Do not use pliers or
other tools to tighten the connectors, because the tools may damage the
connectors.
5. Always cap unused connectors with an XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover or
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover, shown in the following diagram.
XS2Z-12 Waterproof Cover
The connector will meet IP66
standards if a Waterproof Cover is
attached. Tighten the connector by
hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m.
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover
Press the Dust Cover onto the
connector firmly. The Dust Cover
will protect the connector from dust,
but does not meet IP66 standards.
Maintaining Environmental Resistance
• The IP66 environmental resistance level will be lost if the surfaces where
the contact block and cover meet are subjected to excessive force. Protect the contact block and cover from excessive force or shock.
• The IP66 standard is lower than waterproof standards. Do not submerge
the system components.
• The body of the components is plastic resin. Do not place objects on the
components or allow the components to be stepped on.
225
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Tables of Compatible Connectors
Connector 1
(DeviceNet communications
connector)
ERR AERR BERR C MS
A
NC
NS
C
B
P
Connector 2
(Connector for power supply
to internal circuitry)
Connector 3
(Port A)
Connector 4
(Port B)
Connector 5
(Port C)
Connector 1 (DeviceNet Communications Connector)
Connector type
Cable with shielded connectors on both ends
Model
Plug
(male)
Cable with shielded connector [email protected]@F1
(socket) on one end
Cable with shielded connector [email protected]@H1
(plug) on one end
Shielded T-branch connector
Appearance
[email protected]@W1
Socket
(female)
Socket
(female)
Plug
(male)
DCN2-1
Socket
(female)
Socket
(female)
Plug
(male)
Connector 2 (Connector for Power Supply to Internal Circuitry)
Connector type
Model
Cable with connectors on both [email protected]@[email protected]
ends (socket and plug)
Cable with connector on one
end (female socket)
[email protected]@[email protected]
Connector socket assembly
(female)
(Crimp-connector or solder
type)
T-joint
[email protected]@
Appearance
Plug
(male)
Socket
(female)
Socket
(female)
XS2R-D427-5
Socket
(female)
Socket
(female)
226
Socket
(female)
Plug
(male)
Section 5-5
B7AC Interface Units
Connectors 3, 4, and 5 (Connectors for Ports A, B, and C) (Connectors to
Connect the B7AC)
Connector type
Cable with connector on one
end (male plug)
Model
[email protected]@[email protected]
Plug
(male)
Cable with connectors on both [email protected]@[email protected]
ends (socket and plug)
Connector socket assembly
(male)
(Crimp-connector or solder
type)
Appearance
Plug
(male)
Socket
(female)
[email protected]@
Plug
(male)
227
B7AC Interface Units
228
Section 5-5
SECTION 6
Special I/O Slave Units Specifications
This section provides specifications for the C200H I/O Link Unit and the RS-232C Unit.
6-1
6-2
C200H I/O Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
6-1-1
Communications Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
6-1-2
Node Address Setting (Rear DIP Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
6-1-3
Baud Rate and Hold/Clear Write Area Settings (Front DIP Switch)
231
6-1-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
6-1-5
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
6-1-6
Rotary Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
6-1-7
Special I/O Area Function and Read/Write Area Allocation . . . . . .
235
6-1-8
Explicit DeviceNet Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
6-1-9
Using Explicit DeviceNet Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
6-1-10 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
6-1-11 Installing in a Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
6-1-12 C200H I/O Link Unit Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
RS-232C Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
6-2-1
Communications Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
6-2-2
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
6-2-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
6-2-4
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
6-2-5
Word Allocations for Communications Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
6-2-6
Using the RS-232C Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
6-2-7
Explicit DeviceNet Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269
6-2-8
Using Explicit DeviceNet Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280
6-2-9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
6-2-10 Mounting in Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
6-2-11 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
6-2-12 RS-232C Unit Application Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
6-2-13 Reading RS-232C Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
6-2-14 Reading Data Received by RS-232C Unit Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
229
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
The C200H I/O Link Unit is a Special I/O Slave Unit that allows data from any
area in the CPU Unit of the PLC to be read or written from the Master Unit.
Using the C200H I/O Link Unit, a Slave PLC can be controlled by the Master
through the DeviceNet Network.
Memory areas being used by other Special I/O Units can also be specified,
allowing Special I/O Units mounted to the Slave PLCs to also be controlled
indirectly from the Master.
6-1-1
Communications Cable Connections
Wire communications cables to the C200H I/O Link Unit using the standard
Square Connectors, just like General-purpose Slaves. This section does not
explain how to connect communications cables. For details on connecting the
cables, refer to 4-2 Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose
Slaves.
6-1-2
Node Address Setting (Rear DIP Switch)
The DIP switch on the rear panel of the Unit is used to set the node address
for the C200H I/O Link Unit.
Node address setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
The node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the DIP switch, as shown in
the following table. Any node address within the setting range can be used as
long as it isn’t already set on another node.
DIP switch setting
Node address
Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 (default)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
61
62
1
1
1
1
1
1
63
Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it is not
already set on another node in the network.
Note
1. (Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch and baud rate settings.)
2. The default setting is 0. Because the node address setting for the C200H
I/O Link Unit is made on the rear panel DIP switch, the Unit must be removed before the setting can be changed. For this reason, be sure the setting is correct before configuring the network.
3. Pins 7 and 8 are reserved for system use. They must always be set to OFF.
4. If the same node address is used for two different nodes, a node duplication error will occur.
230
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
6-1-3
Baud Rate and Hold/Clear Write Area Settings (Front DIP Switch)
The DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit is used to set the baud rate and
Hold/Clear Write Area data for communications error. The functions and setting for the front panel DIP switch are as shown in the following diagram.
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Hold/Clear Write Area data for communications error
Baud rate
Pin
Function
1
2
Baud rate
3
Hold/Clear Write Area data for com- OFF:
munications error
ON:
4
Baud Rate
Setting
See the next table.
Reserved
Clear (default)
Hold
Leave this pin set to OFF.
Pins 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 Pin 2
OFF OFF 125 kbps (default)
Note
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
Baud rate
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate will not
be able to participate in communications, and may cause communications
errors to occur between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
6-1-4
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Model
Connectable PLCs
Specification
C200HW-DRT21
CS1H/G, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
Communications power 11 to 25 V DC
supply voltage
(Supplied from the communications connector.)
Internal current consumption
Mounting
Communications: 45 mA max.
Internal circuits: 250 mA max. (5 V DC supplied via PLC’s
Backplane.)
Mounted on a CS1H/G or C200HX/HG/HE Backplane.
Weight
250 g max.
Note All other specifications except those listed correspond to those of the
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
231
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Communications
Specifications
Item
I/O points
Specification
Input:
512 points max. (32 words)
Output: 512 points max. (32 words)
Memory areas that can C200HX/HG/HE:
be allocated
CIO, DM, HR, AR, LR, TIM/CNT, and EM (bank 0 only)
CS1H/CS1G:
CIO, D, H, T (PVs), and EM (bank 0 only)
Default allocation area Write area: One word, IR 350
Read area: One word, IR 50
Maximum message
Read: 200 bytes
length
Write: 200 bytes
6-1-5
Settings
Rotary switch:
Unit number (Machine No.)
Rear panel DIP switch:
Node address
Front panel DIP switch:
Baud rate, Hold/Clear Write
Area data for communications error.
Indicators
MS, NS indicators (2-color):
7-segment display (2-digit:):
Dot indicators:
Components
Front panel
Rear panel
Indicators
DIP switch (Rear panel)
Pins 1 to 6: Node address
Pins 7 and 8: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Rotary switch
Sets the Unit No. as a
single-digit hexadecimal
DIP switch (Front panel)
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate
Pin 3: Hold/Clear Write Area data for communications error
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications connector
232
Unit status
Node address, error codes
Read/Write Area, default
settings
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Indicators
Indi- Color
cator
MS
Green
NS
The indicators display the status of the C200H I/O Link Unit and the Network.
When the Network is operating normally, the 7-segment display shows the
C200H I/O Link Unit’s node address; when an error has occurred, it shows an
error code and the faulty node’s node address.
Status
Definition
Meaning
ON
Device Operational
Normal operating status.
Red
Flashing
ON
Device in Standby
Unrecoverable Fault
Reading switch settings.
Unit hardware error: Watchdog timer error.
---
Flashing
OFF
Minor Fault
No Power
Green
ON
Flashing
Link OK.
On-line, Connected.
On-line, Not Connected
Switch settings incorrect, etc.
CPU Unit error, power isn’t being supplied, waiting for initial processing to start, or the Unit is being reset.
Network is operating normally (communications established)
ON
Critical Link Failure
Flashing
Connection Time-out
A fatal communications error has occurred. Network communications are not possible. Check for a node address duplication or Bus
Off error.
Communications timeout.
OFF
Not Powered/
Not On-Line
Checking for node address duplication on the Master, switch settings are incorrect, or the power supply is OFF.
Red
---
Network is operating normally, but communications have not yet
been established.
Seven-Segment Display
In addition to the MS and NS indicators, a C200H I/O Link Unit has a 2-digit,
7-segment display that normally displays the C200H I/O Link Unit’s node
address. When an error occurs, the display will alternate between the error
code and the node address of the faulty Slave. The dots at the lower-right of
each digit indicate the Read/Write Area setting status (default/user settings).
Normal: C200H I/O Link Unit's node address
Error: Error code and C200H I/O Link Unit's node address
Read/Write Area: Default/user settings
Error
Status
Watchdog timer
Display
Not lit
Memory or system
error
Error code only
Lit
Other errors
Error code and error node address alternate
(see diagram below)
233
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Dot Indicators
Status
Read/Write Area default settings
Both dots lit.
Read/Write Area user settings
Both dots not lit.
Error code
(1 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
Error code
(1 s)
Display
OFF (0.3 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
Faulty node
address (1 s)
If several errors occur at the same time, the error codes will be displayed in
order of node address.
6-1-6
Rotary Switch Settings
The rotary switch is used to set the C200H I/O Link Unit’s unit number
(Machine No.).
MACHINE No.
PLC
C200HX/[email protected]/[email protected]/[email protected] (-Z)
C200HX/[email protected]/[email protected](-Z)
C200HE (-Z) all models
Setting method
Set as a one-digit
hexadecimal value.
Setting range
0 to F
0 to 9
Provided the unit number is not being used by another Special I/O Unit
mounted to the same PLC, the settings can be made anywhere within the setting range. Use a small flat-blade screw driver, and take care not to scratch
the rotary switch when making the setting.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before changing the rotary
switch setting.
2. The unit number determines which words will be allocated to the Unit in the
Special I/O Area.
3. If the C200H I/O Link Unit and another Special I/O Unit mounted to the
same PLC have the same unit number, an error will occur on the PLC and
the Unit will not be able to participate in the DeviceNet Network.
4. When a C200H I/O Link Unit and a DeviceNet Master Unit are mounted to
the same PLC, set the C200H I/O Link Unit’s unit number higher than the
Master Unit’s unit number. When the C200H I/O Link Unit has a higher unit
number, it will recognize the Master Unit when the PLC is turned ON, so
you can set Read/Write Areas that do not overlap.
If the C200H I/O Link Unit is mistakenly given a lower unit number, the
Master Unit will recognize the C200H I/O Link Unit when the PLC is turned
ON and it will not be possible to use fixed allocation. In this case, you must
use the Configurator to customize the Master Unit’s Input/Output Areas so
that they do not overlap with the C200H I/O Link Unit’s areas.
234
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
6-1-7
Special I/O Area Function and Read/Write Area Allocation
The C200H I/O Link Unit allows data from any area in the CPU Unit of the
PLC to be read or written from the Master Unit, depending on the Special I/O
Area settings. In order for the C200H I/O Link Unit and the Master to operate
together, the Read/Write Area on the C200H I/O Link Unit and the allocated
words on the Master are linked, as illustrated in the following diagram.
IN Area OUT Area
Master
Slave
Read Area Write Area
C200H I/O Link Unit
Note When using the Read Area only, set the size of the Write Area to zero bytes.
Similarly, if using the Write Area only, then set the size of the Read Area to
zero bytes.
Special I/O Area Words
and Configuration
Words are allocated in the PLC’s Special I/O Area according to the Unit number, as illustrated in the following table.
Unit number
Special I/O Area words
C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)
CS1H/G
0
IR 100 to IR 109
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
1
2
IR 110 to IR 119
IR 120 to IR 129
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
3
4
IR 130 to IR 139
IR 140 to IR 149
CIO 2030 to CIO 2039
CIO 2040 to CIO 2049
5
6
IR 150 to IR 159
IR 160 to IR 169
CIO 2050 to CIO 2059
CIO 2060 to CIO 2069
7
8
IR 170 to IR 179
IR 180 to IR 189
CIO 2070 to CIO 2079
CIO 2080 to CIO 2089
9
A
IR 190 to IR 199
IR 400 to IR 409
CIO 2090 to CIO 2099
CIO 2100 to CIO 2109
B
C
IR 410 to IR 419
IR 420 to IR 429
CIO 2110 to CIO 2119
CIO 2120 to CIO 2129
D
E
IR 430 to IR 439
IR 440 to IR 449
CIO 2130 to CIO 2139
CIO 2140 to CIO 2149
F
IR 450 to IR 459
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
In the C200H I/O Link Unit, the Special I/O Area is used as illustrated below.
Bit 15
+ 0 words
+ 1 to 4 words
+ 5 words
+ 6 to 9 words
Bit 0
Software switches
Read/Write Setting Area
Status
Read/Write Reference Area
235
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Software Switches
The functions of the software switches are illustrated in the following diagram.
Bit
Not used
Read/Write Area user settings
Read/Write Area default settings
Bit 00: Read/Write Area User Settings
To enable user settings for the Read and Write Areas, turn ON software
switch bit 00. The result of the operation (normal completion or error completion) will be indicated in status bit 09 or bit 10 (first word + 5 words). Before
turning OFF software switch bit 00, check whether status bit 09 or bit 10 is
ON.
The sizes of the Read and Write Areas and the first words in the Read and
Write Areas that have been set in the Read/Write Setting Area will be stored
in the Master Unit’s non-volatile memory when bit 00 changes from OFF to
ON.
Note
1. The Read/Write Area user settings software switch is effective only when
the PLC is in PROGRAM mode. If used in other operating modes, an error
will occur (error code C0 Hex). When a C0 error occurs, switch the PLC to
PROGRAM mode and try the operation again.
2. Read/Write Area settings will not become effective by manipulating the
software switch alone. After changing the settings, either reset the Unit or
restart the PLC to enable the new settings.
3. The Read/Write Area user settings are stored in the C200H I/O Link Unit’s
EEPROM memory. Once they have been set, they will not change when
the Unit is turned OFF or reset, and data from the set areas can be sent
and received from the next time the Unit is started.
4. There is a limit to the number of times data can be written to EEPROM. Do
not exceed the EEPROM write life (1 million writes).
Bit 01: Read/Write Area Default Settings
To return the Read and Write Areas to the default settings, turn software
switch bit 01 ON.
Note
1. The Read/Write Area default settings software switch is effective only
when the PLC is in PROGRAM mode. If used in other operating modes,
an error will occur (error code C0 Hex). When a C0 error occurs, switch the
PLC to PROGRAM mode and try the operation again.
2. Read/Write Area default settings do not become effective by changing this
bit setting alone. The Read/Write Area default settings will not become effective by manipulating the software switch alone. After changing the settings, either reset the Unit or restart the PLC to enable the new settings.
3. The default settings for the Read and Write Areas are as follows:
Read Area: IR 50 (No. of words: 1)
Write Area: IR 350 (No. of words: 1)
236
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Read/Write Setting Area
The Read/Write Setting Area is configured as shown in the following illustration. After setting data for the Read and Write Areas, turn software switch bit
00 ON, and then restart the Unit to set the Read Area and Write Area.
Word Bit 15
+0
+1
Bit 0
Software switch
Write Area Setting
+2
+3
Read Area Setting
+4
Specify the area size, area, and address of the first word for the Read Area
and the Write Area.
Bit 15
Bit 0
Area
Area size
Address of first word
Area Size: Set in hexadecimal in byte units.
The setting range is 0 to 40 Hex (0 to 64 decimal, 0 to 32 words).
Area:
The area is set as follows:
Setting
Area
Word range
01 Hex
IR Area 1 (CIO)
Write Area: IR 000 to IR 235
Read Area: IR 000 to IR 235
02 Hex
03 Hex
IR Area 2 (CIO)
Data Memory Area (DM or D)
IR 300 to IR 511
DM 0000 to DM 4095
(C200HE-CPU11-E only)
DM 0000 to DM 5999
(All except C200HE-CPU11-E)
04 Hex
05 Hex
LR Area
HR Area (HR or H)
LR 00 to LR 63
HR 00 to HR 99
06 Hex
C200HX/HG/HE AR Area
(-Z)
CS1H/G
Holding Area (H)
AR 00 to AR 27
(Can be set for Read Area only)
H100 or H102 to H127
(Specify the starting word with
00 Hex or 02 to 1B Hex.)
07 Hex
C200HX/HG/HE Timer/Counter
(-Z)
Area (TIM/CNT)
CS1H/G
Timer Area (T)
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
08 Hex
EM Area (bank 0 only)
EM 0000 to EM 6143
T 000 to T 511
Address of First Word: The address first word of the memory area is set in
hexadecimal. Areas that can be specified differ depending on the model of
PLC used and the area.
Example: Setting DM 1000 to DM 1015 (16 words = 32 bytes).
Bit 15
Bit 0
237
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Status Area
The Status Area indicates the operating status of the C200H I/O Link Unit.
The meaning of each bit is as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
Not used
Incorrect Switch Settings/EEPROM Error
Node Address Duplication/Bus Off Error Detected
PLC Mounting Error
Network Power Supply Error
Communications Error
Hold/Clear Write Area Data for Communications Error
Read/Write Area Settings Normal Completion
Read/Write Area Settings Error Completion
Explicit Connection Established
Read/Write Area Default Settings
Error
I/O Link Executing
Bit
Name
ON
OFF
0
Incorrect Switch Settings/
EEPROM Error Flag
Turns ON when an incorrect switch setting or an error in EEPROM is detected.
Turns OFF when the PLC or C200H I/O
Link Unit is restarted.
1
Node Address Duplication/
Bus Off Error Flag
Turns OFF when the PLC or C200H I/O
Link Unit is restarted.
2
PLC Mounting Error Flag
Turns ON when the same node address
is set for more than one Unit or a Bus Off
(communications are halted by many
communications errors) error is detected.
Turns ON when a PLC mounting error is
detected. (When another Communications Unit is mounted to the same PLC
and it’s Read/Write Area settings are set
to default.)
3
Network Power Supply Error
Flag
6
Communications Error Flag
8
Hold/Clear Write Area Data
for Communications Error
Flag
Read/Write Area Settings
Normal Completion Flag
9
10
Read/Write Area Settings
Error Completion Flag
12
Explicit Connection Established Flag
13
Read/Write Area Default Settings Flag
14
Error Flag
15
I/O Link Executing Flag
238
Turns OFF when the Read/Write Area is
set to user settings and the C200H I/O
Link Unit is restarted.
Turns ON when power OFF is detected in Turns OFF when the communications
the DeviceNet Network.
power supply returns to a normal voltage.
Turns ON when a DeviceNet communiTurns OFF when communications return
cations error is detected.
to normal.
Turns ON when the Unit is restarted after
pin 3 on the front panel DIP switch has
been set to ON (Hold).
Turns ON when changes to the Read/
Write Area settings have been completed
normally using software switch bit 0 or 1.
Turns ON when an error has occurred
attempting to make changes to the Read/
Write Area settings using software switch
bit 0 or 1.
Turns OFF when the Unit is restarted
after pin 3 on the front panel DIP switch
has been set to OFF (Clear).
Turns OFF when software switch bits 0
and 1 are both set to OFF.
Turns ON when an explicit connection
has been established with the Master
Unit.
Turns ON when Read/Write Area default
settings are used.
Turns OFF when the explicit connection
with the Master Unit is broken.
Turns ON when any kind of error occurs.
(When Status bits 00, 01, 02, 06, or 10
are ON.)
Turns ON when a connection is established with the Master Unit.
Turns OFF when all errors have been
resolved. (When Status bits 00, 01, 02,
06, and 10 are all OFF.)
Turns OFF when a connection with the
Master Unit is broken.
Turns OFF when software switch bits 0
and 1 are both set to OFF.
Turns OFF when Read/Write Area user
settings are used.
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Read/Write Reference Area
The current setting status of the Read Area and Write Area are indicated as
shown in the following diagram. (The Read/Write Area settings are not output
to this area unless the C200H I/O Link Unit is restarted after software switch
bit 00 is turned ON.)
Bit 15
+6
+7
+8
+9
Bit 0
Current Write Area setting
Current Read Area setting
Data is stored in these words in the same form as it is for the Read/Write Setting Area. Refer to page 237 for details.
Setting the Read and Write
Areas
Use the following procedure to set the Read and Write Areas.
Using Control bits
This procedure uses the Read/Write Setting Area and the software switch in
the C200H I/O Link Unit’s Special I/O Area to set the Read and Write Areas.
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the PLC to which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted
and set the PLC to PROGRAM mode.
2. Using a Peripheral Device, such as a Programming Console, set the Read
Area and Write Area in the Read/Write Setting Area in Special I/O Area
words +2 to +4. Example: Read Area: IR 100 to IR 119, Write Area: DM
0160 to DM 0189.
+1
Write Area: 58 bytes, DM Area
+2
Write Area: First word address 160
+3
Read Area: 40 bytes, IR Area
+4
Read Area: First word address 100
3. Using the Peripheral Device, turn ON software switch bit 00 in Special I/O
Area word +0 (Read/Write Area user settings). If it is already ON, turn it
OFF and then ON again.
4. Check that Status Area bit 09 in Special I/O Area word +5 is ON (Read/
Write Area Setting Normal Completion Flag).
Note At this point, the Read/Write Area settings are written to memory in
the C200H I/O Link Unit, but they are not yet effective. Operation will
continue using the previous Read/Write Area settings. (The contents
of the Read/Write Reference Area will also remain at the previous
settings.)
5. Reset the C200H I/O Link Unit, or restart the PLC to which the C200H I/O
Link Unit is mounted.
Note a) When the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted in a C200HX/HG/HE
PLC, it can be reset by turning ON the corresponding Special I/O
Unit Restart Bit in AR 01 or SR 281. When the Unit is mounted in
a CS1H/G PLC, it can be reset by turning ON the corresponding
Special I/O Unit Restart Bit in A502 to A507.
b) When the Unit is restarted, the Read/Write settings will become
effective and the number of IN/OUT words for the C200H I/O Link
Unit will be set.
6. Correct the C200H I/O Link Unit’s scan list registration in the Master’s scan
list. There are two methods of registering the scan list.
• Turn ON the Enable Scan List software switch on the Master Unit.
239
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
• Create a scan list and register the Unit using a DeviceNet Configurator.
If the scan list is registered correctly, data will automatically be transferred
and received between the Master Unit and the C200H I/O Link Unit. For
further details on Master Unit operations, refer to the Master Unit’s Operation Manual or the DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual.
7. When necessary, it is possible to read and write IN/OUT Areas on the Master, and control the PLC (Slave) to which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted. By writing data to the C200H I/O Link Unit OUT Area on the Master,
data can be written to the Slave’s Write Area, and by reading data from the
IN Area, data can be read from the Read Area of the Slave.
Note Once the Read and Write Areas has been set, data will be automatically
transferred and received when the Master and Slaves are restarted.
Using the DeviceNet Configurator
The Read/Write Area can be set using the OMRON DeviceNet Configurator
(version [email protected] or later). When using a version earlier than [email protected], contact your
local sales office before use. (Version information can be confirmed from the
Help Menu.)
1,2,3...
1. Connect a DeviceNet Configurator to the DeviceNet Network and go online.
2. Turn ON the power to the PLC to which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted, and place the PLC into PROGRAM mode.
3. Locate the C200H I/O Link Unit’s icon in the Network Configuration window
and double click the icon.
The Device Parameters Editing Screen (Read/Write Area parameter setting screen) will be displayed.
240
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
4. Either double click on the Read/Write parameter that you want to change
or select the desired parameter and press the Enter Key.
It will become possible to change the parameter.
5. Set or change parameters.
a) Size Setting Screen
Input the new value and press the Enter Key, or click another location
in the window.
241
C200H I/O Link Units
Section 6-1
b) Area Setting Screen
Select a data area from the pull-down menu and press the Enter Key,
or click another location in the window. (When using a CS1H/G, words
AR 00 to AR 27 correspond to H100 to H127.)
c) First Word Address Setting Screen
Input the new value and press the Enter Key, or click another location
in the window.
6. When the desired parameter changes and settings have been completed,
click the Download Button. The edited parameters will be written to the
C200H I/O Link Unit.
242
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
7. Click the Reset button to enable the edited parameters.
A reset confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to
confirm. When the C200H I/O Link Unit is reset, the corresponding Special
I/O Unit Restart Bit in AR 01 of the PLC will be turned ON.
If the Read/Write Area sizes have been changed, you must correct the
Master’s I/O allocation settings.
Note Once the Read/Write Area has been set, data will be automatically transferred
and received when the Master and Slaves are restarted.
6-1-8
Explicit DeviceNet Messages
Explicit DeviceNet messages (commands) can be sent from the Master to
write data to any area of the CPU Unit of the PLC to which the C200H I/O Link
Unit is mounted.
This section the explicit messages supported by the C200H I/O Link Unit, and
provides usage examples. For further details on using explicit messages on
the Master Unit, refer to the Master Unit’s Operation Manual.
C200H I/O Link Unit Explicit Message List
Explicit message
BYTE DATA READ
BYTE DATA WRITE
WORD DATA READ
WORD DATA WRITE
Error response
Function
Reads the specified node’s data in bytes.
Word data is read from the leftmost bit to
the rightmost bit.
The maximum data size for read data is 200
bytes.
Writes the specified node’s data in byte.
Word data is written from the leftmost bit to
the rightmost bit.
The maximum data size for write data is 200
bytes.
Reads the specified node’s data in words.
Word data is read from the rightmost bit to
the leftmost bit.
The maximum data size for read data is 100
words.
Writes the specified node’s data in words.
Word data is written from the rightmost bit
to the leftmost bit.
The maximum data size for write data is 100
words.
When an error occurs in an explicit message (command), an error response is sent
returned by the C200H I/O Link Unit.
Page
243
245
247
248
250
Use BYTE DATA READ and BYTE DATA WRITE when sending explicit messages (commands) from an OMRON DeviceNet Master. When using other
manufacturer’s DeviceNet Masters to send explicit messages (commands),
use WORD DATA READ and WORD DATA WRITE.
The number of bytes specified for Class ID and Instance ID differ according to
the type of Master used. For an OMRON DeviceNet Master, 2 bytes (4 digits)
are specified. For an example of this, see 6-1-9 Using Explicit DeviceNet Messages.
BYTE DATA READ
BYTE DATA READ will read data from any area of CPU Unit of the PLC to
which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted. Data is returned from the leftmost
bit to the rightmost bit.
243
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Command Block
Class ID
Address L No. of read bytes
Service code
Address H
Destination node address
Instance ID
Response Block
Word data H
Service code
Word data L
Source node address
Word data H
Word data L
Read data
(Maximum: 200 bytes)
No. of received bytes
Parameters
Destination Node Address (Command)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit reading the data, in single-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
Service Code (Command, Response)
In the command, IC Hex is specified. In the response, the leftmost bit is
turned ON and 9C Hex is returned.
Class ID (Command)
Always 2F Hex.
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the data area to be read, in hexadecimal, as shown in the following
table.
244
Setting
01 Hex
IR Area 1 (CIO)
Area
02 Hex
IR Area 2 (CIO)
03 Hex
Data Memory Area (DM or D)
04 Hex
LR Area
05 Hex
06 Hex
HR Area (HR or H)
C200HX/HG/HE AR Area
(-Z)
CS1H/G
Holding Area (H)
07 Hex
C200HX/HG/HE Timer/Counter
(-Z)
Area (TIM/CNT)
CS1H/G
Timer Area (T)
08 Hex
EM Area (bank 0 only)
Word range
Write Area: IR 000 to IR 235
Read Area: IR 000 to IR 235
IR 300 to IR 511
DM 0000 to DM 4095
(C200HE-CPU11-E only)
DM 0000 to DM 5999
(All except C200HE-CPU11-E)
LR 00 to LR 63
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
(Can be set for Read Area only)
H100 or H102 to H127
(Specify the starting word with
00 Hex or 02 to 1B Hex.)
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
T 000 to T 511
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Address L, Address H (Command)
The address in hexadecimal of the first word of data to be read.
Address L: Rightmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Address H: Leftmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
When specifying a Holding Area word (H100 or H102 to H127) in a CS1H/G
PLC, specify the first word in hexadecimal with 0000 Hex for H100 or 0002 to
001B Hex for H102 to H127.
No. of Read Bytes (Command)
The number of bytes of read data, in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal. The
specified range is 01 to C8 Hex (1 to 200 in decimal).
No. of Received Bytes (Response)
The number of bytes received from the source node address is returned in
hexadecimal.
Source Node Address (Response)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit that returned the response is
returned in hexadecimal.
Read Data (Response)
The specified data (area, words, and number of bytes) is returned from word
H (leftmost byte: bits 08 to 15) to word L (rightmost byte: bits 00 to 07). If an
odd number of read bytes have been specified, the last byte of data moves
into word H.
Precautions
Actual addresses for Address H and Address L and actual number of bytes to
be read differ according to the model of PLC to which the C200H I/O Link Unit
is mounted and the memory area. Be sure to specify bytes within the data
area range.
BYTE DATA WRITE
BYTE DATA WRITE will write data to any area in the CPU Unit of the PLC to
which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted. Write data is specified from the
leftmost byte to the rightmost byte.
Command Block
Word data H
Class ID
Service code
Address L
Address H Word data L
Destination node address
Instance ID
Word data H
Word data L
Write data (Maximum 200 bytes)
Response Block
Service code
Source node address
No. of received bytes
245
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Parameters
Destination Node Address (Command)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit writing the data in single-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
Service Code (Command, Response)
In the command, IE Hex is specified. In the response, the leftmost bit is turned
ON and 9E Hex is returned.
Class ID (Command)
Always 2F Hex.
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the data area to be written, in hexadecimal, as shown in the following table.
Setting
01 Hex
IR Area 1 (CIO)
02 Hex
IR Area 2 (CIO)
03 Hex
Data Memory Area (DM or D)
04 Hex
LR Area
05 Hex
06 Hex
HR Area (HR or H)
C200HX/HG/HE AR Area
(-Z)
CS1H/G
Holding Area (H)
07 Hex
C200HX/HG/HE Timer/Counter
(-Z)
Area (TIM/CNT)
CS1H/G
Timer Area (T)
08 Hex
Area
EM Area (bank 0 only)
Word range
Write Area: IR 000 to IR 235
Read Area: IR 000 to IR 235
IR 300 to IR 511
DM 0000 to DM 4095
(C200HE-CPU11-E only)
DM 0000 to DM 5999
(All except C200HE-CPU11-E)
LR 00 to LR 63
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
(Can be set for Read Area only)
H100 or H102 to H127
(Specify the starting word with
00 Hex or 02 to 1B Hex.)
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
T 000 to T 511
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Address L, Address H (Command)
The address in hexadecimal of the first word of data to be written.
Address L: Rightmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Address H: Leftmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Write Data (Command)
Specify the data to be written to the specified area and words from word H
(leftmost byte: bits 08 to 15) to word L (rightmost byte: bits 00 to 07). If an odd
number of read bytes have been specified, the last byte of data moves into
word H.
No. of Received Bytes (Response)
The number of bytes received from the source node address is returned in
hexadecimal.
Source Node Address (Response)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit that returned the response is
returned in hexadecimal.
Note Actual addresses for Address H and Address L and actual number of bytes to
be written differ according to the model of PLC to which the C200H I/O Link
246
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Unit is mounted and the memory area. Be sure to specify bytes within the
data area range.
WORD DATA READ
WORD DATA READ will read data from any area of the CPU Unit of the PLC
to which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted. Data is returned from the rightmost byte to the leftmost byte.
Command Block
Class ID
Address L No. of read words
Service code
Destination node address
Address H
Instance ID
Response Block
Service code
Word data H
Word data H
Word data L
Word data L
Source node address
Read data
(Maximum: 200 bytes)
No. of received bytes
Parameters
Destination Node Address (Command)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit reading the data, in single-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
Service Code (command, response)
In the command, ID Hex is specified. In the response, the leftmost bit is
turned ON and 9D Hex is returned.
Class ID (Command)
Always 2F Hex.
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the data area to be read, in hexadecimal as shown in the following
table.
Setting
Area
01 Hex
IR Area 1 (CIO)
02 Hex
IR Area 2 (CIO)
03 Hex
Data Memory Area (DM or D)
04 Hex
LR Area
05 Hex
06 Hex
HR Area (HR or H)
C200HX/HG/HE AR Area
(-Z)
CS1H/G
Holding Area (H)
Word range
Write Area: IR 000 to IR 235
Read Area: IR 000 to IR 235
IR 300 to IR 511
DM 0000 to DM 4095
(C200HE-CPU11-E only)
DM 0000 to DM 5999
(All except C200HE-CPU11-E)
LR 00 to LR 63
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
(Can be set for Read Area only)
H100 or H102 to H127
(Specify the starting word with
00 Hex or 02 to 1B Hex.)
247
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Setting
07 Hex
08 Hex
Area
C200HX/HG/HE Timer/Counter
(-Z)
Area (TIM/CNT)
Word range
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
CS1H/G
Timer Area (T)
EM Area (bank 0 only)
T 000 to T 511
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Address L, Address H (Command)
The address in hexadecimal of the first word of data to be read.
Address L: Rightmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Address H: Leftmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
When specifying a Holding Area word (H100 or H102 to H127) in a CS1H/G
PLC, specify the first word in hexadecimal with 0000 Hex for H100 or 0002 to
001B Hex for H102 to H127.
No. of read words (Command)
The number of words of read data, in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal. The
specified range is 01 to 64 Hex (1 to 100 in decimal).
No. of received bytes (Response)
The number of bytes received from the destination node address is returned
in hexadecimal.
Source node address (Response)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit that returned the response is
returned in hexadecimal.
Read data (Response)
The specified area type, words, and number of bytes of data are returned
from word L (rightmost byte: bits 0 to 7) to word H (leftmost byte: bits 8 to 15).
Note Actual addresses for Address H and Address L and actual number of bytes to
be read differ according to the model of PLC to which the C200H I/O Link Unit
is mounted and the memory area. Be sure to specify data bytes within the
data area range.
WORD DATA WRITE
WORD DATA WRITE will write data to any area of the CPU Unit of the PLC to
which the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted. Write data is specified from the
rightmost byte to the leftmost byte.
Command Block
Class ID
Word data L
Address L
Service code
Word data H
Destination node address Instance ID Address H
Word data L
Word data H
Write data (Maximum 200 bytes)
Response Block
Service code
Source node address
No. of received bytes
248
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Parameters
Destination Node Address (Command)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit writing the data, in single-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
Service Code (Command, Response)
In the command, IF Hex is specified. In the response, the leftmost bit is turned
ON and 9F Hex is returned.
Class ID (Command)
Always 2F Hex.
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the data area to be written in hexadecimal as shown in the following
table.
Setting
01 Hex
IR Area 1 (CIO)
02 Hex
IR Area 2 (CIO)
03 Hex
Data Memory Area (DM or D)
04 Hex
LR Area
05 Hex
06 Hex
HR Area (HR or H)
C200HX/HG/HE AR Area
(-Z)
CS1H/G
Holding Area (H)
07 Hex
C200HX/HG/HE Timer/Counter
(-Z)
Area (TIM/CNT)
CS1H/G
Timer Area (T)
08 Hex
Area
EM Area (bank 0 only)
Word range
Write Area: IR 000 to IR 235
Read Area: IR 000 to IR 235
IR 300 to IR 511
DM 0000 to DM 4095
(C200HE-CPU11-E only)
DM 0000 to DM 5999
(All except C200HE-CPU11-E)
LR 00 to LR 63
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
(Can be set for Read Area only)
H100 or H102 to H127
(Specify the starting word with
00 Hex or 02 to 1B Hex.)
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
T 000 to T 511
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Address L, Address H (Command)
The address in hexadecimal of the first word of data to be written.
Address L: Rightmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Address H: Leftmost 2 digits of the address in 4-digit hexadecimal.
When specifying a Holding Area word (H100 or H102 to H127) in a CS1H/G
PLC, specify the first word in hexadecimal with 0000 Hex for H100 or 0002 to
001B Hex for H102 to H127.
Write Data (Command)
Specify the data to be written to the specified area and words from word H
(leftmost byte: bits 08 to 15) to word L (rightmost byte: bits 00 to 07).
No. of Received Bytes (Response)
The number of bytes received from the source node address is returned in
hexadecimal.
Source Node Address (Response)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit that returned the response is
returned in hexadecimal.
Note Actual addresses for Address H and Address L and actual number of words to
be written differ according to the model of PLC to which the C200H I/O Link
249
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Unit is mounted and the memory area. Be sure to specify bytes within the
data area range.
Error Response
When there is an error in the explicit command, the C200H I/O Link Unit will
return an error response as illustrated below.
Response Block
General error
code
Additional error code
(FF Hex: fixed)
Source
node address
No. of received bytes
Parameters
No. of Received Bytes (Response)
The number of bytes received from the source node address is returned in
hexadecimal.
Source Node Address (Response)
The node address of the C200H I/O Link Unit that returned the response is
returned in hexadecimal.
General Error Code (Response)
The error code is returned in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal, as shown in
the following table.
Error code
08 Hex
Name
Service not supported
15 Hex
Too much data
13 Hex
Not enough data
20 Hex
Invalid parameter
11 Hex
Reply data too large
16 Hex
Object does not exist
Details
There is an error in the service
code.
There is too much data. (The
data specified by the data write
command exceeds the area
range.)
There is not enough data (e.g.,
an odd number of bytes of data
was specified for the WORD
DATA WRITE command).
An error was made specifying
the word address.
The data specified by the data
read command exceeds the
area range.
There is an error in the Class ID
or Instance ID.
Additional Error Code (Response)
Always FF Hex.
6-1-9
Using Explicit DeviceNet Messages
Using CMND to Read Data
(CS-series and CV-series)
In the following example, the CMND instruction is used to read words CIO 010
to CIO 029 (20 words) on the Slave Unit, from the Master in a CS-series or
CV-series PLC.
Note If a CS-series PLC is being used, this example is applicable only when a CSseries Master Unit is mounted. Use the IOWR instruction when a C200HX/
250
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
HG/HE or C200HS Master Unit is mounted. In this case, refer to the
DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual for details on using the IOWR
instruction.
For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the DeviceNet
Master Unit Operation Manual. For information on the CMND instruction, refer
to the PLC’s Operation Manual or Programming Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 63
Slave network address: 1
Slave node address:
2
Example: Using the CMND Instruction
Command Words (S: First Command Word)
Word
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
S
28 01
S+1
02 1C
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA READ command service code:
1C Hex
S+2
S+3
00 2F
00 01
Class ID: 002F Hex
Instance ID: For IR Area 1: 0001 Hex
S+4
0A 00
S+5
28 00
Read start address: 10 = 000A Hex
Address L: 0A Hex, Address H: 00 Hex
No. of bytes of read data: 40 bytes = 28 Hex
(The rightmost byte is not used.)
D: Response Words (D: First Response Word)
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
D
Contents (Hex)
28 01
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
D+1
00 00
D+2
00 2A
No. of received bytes (data length after D+3):
42 bytes
D+3
02 9C
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA READ response service code:
9C Hex
D+4
HH LL
to
to
D+23
HH LL
Data read from the Slave’s IR10 to IR29.
When the BYTE DATA READ command is
used from an OMRON Master, data is stored
in the Master in the same sequence as the
Slave; leftmost byte to rightmost byte.
Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
C
00 08
No. of bytes of command data: 11 bytes of
command data, S
C+1
00 30
C+2
00 01
No. of bytes of response data: 48 bytes of
response data, D
Destination node network address: 1
251
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Word
Using CMND to Write Data
(CS-series and CV-series)
C+3
Contents (Hex)
3F FE
Meaning
Master’s node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
C+4
00 00
Response returned, communications port
No.: 0, No. of retries: 0
C+5
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
In the following example, the CMND instruction is used to write data to words
CIO 10 to CIO 29 (20 words) on the Slave Unit from the Master in a CS-series
or CV-series PLC.
Note If a CS-series PLC is being used, this example is applicable only when a CSseries Master Unit is mounted. Use the IOWR instruction when a C200HX/
HG/HE or C200HS Master Unit is mounted. In this case, refer to the
DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual for details on using the IOWR
instruction.
For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the DeviceNet
Master Unit Operation Manual. For information on the CMND instruction, refer
to the PLC’s Operation Manual or Programming Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 63
Slave network address: 1
Slave node address:
2
Example: Using the CMND Instruction
Command Words (S: First Command Word)
S
Word
Contents (Hex)
28 01
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
S+1
02 1E
S+2
00 2F
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA WRITE command service code:
1E Hex
Class ID: 002F Hex
S+3
S+4
00 01
0A 00
S+5
HH LL
to
to
S+24
HH LL
Instance ID: For IR Area 1: 0001 Hex
Write start address: 10 = 000A Hex
Address L: 0A Hex, Address H: 00 Hex
Data written to the Slave’s IR10 to IR29.
When the BYTE DATA WRITE command is
used from an OMRON Master, data is written
to the Slave in the same sequence it is
stored in the Master; leftmost byte to rightmost byte.
D: Response Words (D: First Response Word)
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
252
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
D
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
D+1
00 00
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
D+2
Word
Contents (Hex)
00 02
Meaning
No. of received bytes (data length after D+3):
2 bytes
D+3
02 9E
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA WRITE response service code:
9E Hex
Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
Using the IOWR
Instruction to Read Data
(C200HX/HE PLCs)
C
Contents (Hex)
00 32
C+1
00 08
C+2
C+3
00 01
3F FE
C+4
00 00
C+5
00 64
Meaning
No. of bytes of command data: 50 bytes of
command data, S
No. of bytes of response data: 8 bytes of
response data, D
Destination node network address: 1
Master’s node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Response returned, communications port
No.: 0, No. of retries: 0
Response monitoring time: 10 s
n the example, the IOWR instruction is used to read words IR 010 to IR 029
(20 words) on the Slave Unit, and store them in the Master (C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs) from DM 2000 onwards. For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual. For information
on the IOWR instruction, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PLCs Operation Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: 0
Slave node address:
2
Example: Using the IOWR Instruction
C: Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C
Contents (Hex)
3F FE
Meaning
Master’s node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Source Words (S: First Source Word)
Word
S
Contents (Hex)
82 07
Meaning
Response storage words: DM2000
82 Hex: DM Area, 0700 Hex: 2000 words
(For more detail, refer to the PLC Operation
Manual.)
S+1
D0 00
S+2
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
S+3
00 0B
No. of bytes of command data: 11 bytes (No.
of bytes from S+4 onwards.)
S+4
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
S+5
02 1C
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA READ response service code:
1C Hex
S+6
00 2F
Class ID: 002F Hex
253
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
S+7
Word
Contents (Hex)
00 01
Meaning
Instance ID: For IR Area 1: 0001 Hex
S+8
0A 00
S+9
28 00
Read start address: 10 = 000A Hex
Address L: 0A Hex, Address H: 00 Hex
No. of bytes of read data: 40 bytes = 28 Hex
(The rightmost byte is not used.)
D: Destination Information
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
D
Contents (Hex)
00 10
(0 010)
Meaning
Master’s Unit address: 0, No. of words of
command data: 10 words (specified in BCD)
(No. of words from S onwards)
Response Storage Words
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Using the IOWR
Instruction (C200HX/HG/
HE PLCs) to Write Data
Word
DM 2000
Contents (Hex)
28 01
DM 2001
00 00
DM 2002
00 2A
DM 2003
02 9C
DM 2004 to
DM 2023
HH LL...
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
No. of received bytes (data length after
DM 2003): 42 bytes
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA READ response service code:
9C Hex
Data read from the Slave’s IR 010 to IR 029.
When the BYTE DATA READ command is
used from an OMRON Master, data is stored
in the Master in the same sequence as the
Slave; leftmost byte to rightmost byte.
In the following example, the IOWR instruction is used to write data to words
IR 010 to IR 029 (20 words) on the Slave Unit, from the Master (C200HX/HG/
HE PLCs). For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the
DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual or for information on the IOWR
instruction, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PLCs Operation Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: 0
Slave node address:
2
Example: Using IOWR
C: Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C
254
Contents (Hex)
3F FE
Meaning
Master’s node address: 63
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Source Words (S: First Source Word)
Word
S
Contents (Hex)
82 07
Meaning
Response storage words: DM2000
82 Hex: DM Area, 0700 Hex: 2000 words
(For more detail, refer to the PLC Operation
Manual.)
S+1
D0 00
S+2
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
S+3
00 32
No. of bytes of command data: 50 bytes (No.
of bytes from S+4 onwards.)
S+4
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
S+5
02 1E
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA WRITE response service code:
1E Hex
S+6
S+7
00 2F
00 01
Class ID: 002F Hex
Instance ID: For IR Area 1: 0001 Hex
S+8
0A 00
Write start address: 10 = 000A Hex
Address L: 0A Hex, Address H: 00 Hex
S+9
to
HH LL
to
S_28
HH LL
Data written to the Slave’s IR10 to IR29.
When the BYTE DATA WRITE command is
used from an OMRON Master, data is written
to the Slave in the same sequence it is
stored in the Master; leftmost byte to rightmost byte.
D: Destination Information
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
D
Contents (Hex)
00 29
(0 029)
Meaning
Master’s Unit address: 0, No. of words of
command data: 29 words (specified in BCD)
(No. of words from S onwards)
Response Storage Words
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
DM2000
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code: 28 01 Hex
DM2001
00 00
DM2002
00 02
DM2003
02 9E
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
No. of received bytes (data length after
DM2003): 2 bytes
Slave node address: 2
BYTE DATA READ response service code:
9E Hex
255
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
6-1-10 Dimensions
(With connector attached)
Unit: mm
DRT21
130
13
101
35
For dimensions of the Unit when mounted to a Backplane, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PLC Operation Manual or the SYSMAC CS1G/H PLC
Operation Manual.
6-1-11 Installing in a Control Panel
The C200H I/O Link Unit must be mounted in the Backplane of a CS1H/G or
C200HX/HG/HE PLC. The Unit mounts in the Backplane just like standard
Units. Refer to the PLC’s Operation Manual or Installation Guide for details on
mounting the Unit in the Backplane and installing the PLC in a control panel.
Note The C200H I/O Link Unit uses work words in the PLC (CS1H/G or C200HX/
HG/HE) to exchange I/O data with the Master, so it isn’t necessary to wire an
internal power supply, I/O power supply, or I/O lines.
6-1-12 C200H I/O Link Unit Application Examples
This section explains the procedure for using explicit messages with a C200H
I/O Link Unit. The following system configuration example is used in this
example. When explicit messages are used with a C200H I/O Link Unit, the
areas in the Slave’s PLC can be read or written.
256
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Unit
(node address 00, unit number 0)
24-V DC power supply
C200HW-DRT21 I/O Link Unit
(node address 07)
C200HX PLC
T-branch Tap
Terminating Resistor
T-branch Tap
Reading Data from a Slave
Terminating Resistor
T-branch Tap
With the following program, 10 words (20 bytes) of data is read from DM 1000
of the Slave (PLC to which C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted) when IR 00000
turns ON in the CPU Unit of the Master Unit. The data that is read is stored in
the response storage words DM 0104 to DM 0113.
Ladder Program
25315
BSET (71)
#0000
00001
Clears the response storage words (DM 0100 to
DM 0113) when the program starts or data reading
starts.
DM0100
DM0113
25315
MOV (21)
#8200
DM0000
Response storage word: DM 0100
(82 Hex: DM; 0064 Hex: word 100; 00 Hex: Word data)
MOV (21)
#6400
DM0001
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV (21)
#0064
DM0002
Number of command data bytes: 12 bytes
MOV (21)
#000B
DM0003
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
MOV (21)
#2801
DM0004
Slave node address: 07
BYTE DATA READ command service code: 1C Hex
MOV (21)
#071C
DM0005
257
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Class ID: 2F Hex
MOV (21)
#002F
DM0006
Instance ID: DM Area (03 Hex)
MOV (21)
#0003
DM0007
First read address: 03E8 Hex (word 1000)
MOV (21)
#E803
DM0008
Number of bytes read: 20 bytes (10 words)
MOV (21)
#1400
DM0009
When IR 00000 turns ON, IR 00001 will turn ON
for one cycle (as a differentiated bit).
00000
DIFU (13)
00001
When differentiated bit IR 00001 turns ON, the sequential processing control bit IR 03000 will turn ON.
00001
MOV (21)
#0001
030
03000
10112
IOWR
#00FE
DM0000
When IR 03000 turns ON, the CPU Unit will check that
IR 10112 (Unit number 0 Master's Message Communications Execution Enabled Flag) is ON, and message
transmission will start.
#0010
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit address
FE Hex
#0000
DM 0000: Command data storage words
0010 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 10 command data
words (BCD)
25506
MOV (21)
030
25506
MOV (21)
#0001
030
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has been
completed normally), IR 03000 will be cleared (message
transmission completed).
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the Master),
IR 03000 will be turned ON, and the data will be transmitted again.
END (01)
Note When transmitting explicit messages from an OMRON Master Unit, specify 2
bytes each for the Class ID and the Instance ID.
Response
When data is read properly, the response will be stored as shown in the following table.
258
Words
DM 0100
Contents (Hex)
28 01
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
DM 0101
00 00
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
DM 0102
00 16
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0103 onwards) is 22 bytes.
DM 0103
07 9C
Slave node address is 07.
BYTE DATA READ response service
code is 9C Hex.
DM 0104
to
xx xx
to
Data read from word DM 1000 of Slave.
---
DM 0113
xx xx
Data read from word DM 1009 of Slave.
Section 6-1
C200H I/O Link Units
Writing Data to Slave
With the following example, DM 0009 to DM 0018 in the Master’s CPU Unit
are written to IR 000 to IR 009 (20 bytes) in the Slave (CPU Unit to which
C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted) when IR 00002 turns ON in the CPU Unit of
the Master Unit. Before IR 00002 turns ON at the Master Unit, make sure that
the data to be written to the Slave is stored in DM 0009 to DM 0018.
Ladder Program
25315
Clears the response storage words (DM 0100 to DM
0103) when the program starts or data writing starts.
BSET(71)
#0000
DM0100
00003
DM0103
25315
MOV(21)
#8200
DM1000
MOV(21)
Response storage word: DM 0100
(82 Hex: DM; 0064 Hex: word 100; 00 Hex: Word data)
#6400
DM1001
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV(21)
#0064
DM1002
Number of command data bytes: 30 bytes
MOV(21)
#001E
DM1003
MOV(21)
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
#2801
DM1004
MOV(21)
Slave node address: 07
BYTE DATA READ command service code: 1E Hex
#071E
DM1005
Class ID=2F Hex
MOV(21)
#002F
DM1006
Instance ID: IR Area 1 (01 Hex)
MOV(21)
#0001
DM1007
First write address: 0000 Hex (word 000)
MOV(21)
#0000
DM1008
00002
DIFU(13)
When IR 00002 turns ON, IR 00003 will turn ON
for once cycle (as differentiated bit).
00003
When IR 00003 turns ON, the sequential processing
control bit IR 04000 will turn ON.
00003
MOV(21)
#0001
040
259
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
04000
10112
IOWR
#00FE
DM1000
#0019
When IR 04000 turns ON, the CPU Unit will check that
IR 10112 (Unit number 0 Master's Message Communications Execution Enabled Flag) is ON, and message transmission will start.
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit address FE Hex
DM 1000: Command data storage words
25506
MOV(21)
#0000
040
25506
MOV(21)
#0001
040
0019 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 19 command data
words (BCD)
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 04000 will be cleared
(message transmission completed).
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the Master), IR 04000 will be turned ON, and the data will be
transmitted again.
END(01)
Note When transmitting explicit messages from an OMRON Master Unit, specify 2
bytes each for the Class ID and the Instance ID.
Response
When data is written properly, the response will be stored as shown in the following table.
Words
6-2
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
DM 0100
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
DM 0101
00 00
DM 0102
00 02
DM 0103
07 9E
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0103 onwards) is 2 bytes.
Slave node address is 07.
BYTE DATA READ response service
code is 9E Hex.
RS-232C Units
The RS-232C Unit is a Special I/O Unit that uses the DeviceNet Network to
exchange I/O between the Master Unit and an RS-232C port. Explicit messages are used to set the Unit and perform I/O. There are two RS-232C ports
which can be used separately with the RS-232C Unit.
6-2-1
Communications Cable Connections
Wire communications cables to the RS-232C Unit using the standard Square
Connectors, just like General-purpose Slaves. This section does not explain
how to connect communications cables. For details on connecting the cables,
refer to 4-2 Connecting Communications Cables to General-purpose Slaves.
6-2-2
Node Address and Baud Rate Settings
This section describes the Slaves’ node address setting and baud rate setting. These settings are made using the following pins on the DIP switch.
260
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Pins 1 through 6
Pins 7 and 8
ON
Node address setting:
Baud rate setting:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node address
setting
Baud rate setting
Node Address Settings
Each Slave’s node address is set with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP
switch. Any node address within the setting range can be used as long as it
isn’t already set on another node.
Pin 6
DIP switch setting
Pin 5 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Pin 1
Node address
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 (default)
1
0
1
0
2
:
:
Note
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
62
63
1. Refer to Appendix A Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of
DIP switch settings.
2. The Slave won’t be able to participate in communications if the same node
address is used for the Master or another Slave node (node address duplication error).
Baud Rate Setting
Pins 7 and 8 are used to set the baud rate as shown in the following table.
(These pins are factory-set to OFF.)
Pin settings
Pin 7
Note
Baud rate
Pin 8
OFF
OFF
125 kbps (factory setting)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
250 kbps
500 kbps
ON
ON
Not allowed.
1. Always turn OFF the Slave’s power supply (including the communications
power supply) before changing the baud rate setting.
2. Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) in the Network. Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master’s rate won’t be
able to participate in communications, and may cause communications errors to occur between nodes with correct baud rate settings.
261
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-3
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Models
Specification
DRT1-232C2
Input points
Inputs: 2 ports max.
(One word is used in the IN Area to detect the communications status.)
Communications power 11 to 25 V DC
supply voltage
(Supplied from the communications connector.)
Internal power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC, –15 to +10%)
Current consumption
Communications: 50 mA max.
Internal circuits: 100 mA max.
Noise immunity
Internal power supply normal: ±600 V
Internal power supply common: ±1.5 kV
Pulse width: 0.1 to 1 µs
Pulse rise time: 1 ns
(via noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 69 m/s2
Shock resistance
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
500 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min, leakage current: 1 mA max.
(between DC power supply and FG)
20 MΩ min. at 100 V DC (between DC power supply and
FG)
–10 to 55°C
Ambient humidity
Operating atmosphere
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Storage temperature
Mounting
–25 to 65°C
M4 screw mounting or DIN 35-mm track mounting
Mounting strength
100 N
Track direction: 10 N
Terminal strength
Weight
100 N
250 g max.
Insulation resistance
RS-232C Communications Specifications
Item
262
Specification
Communications
method
All dual communications, Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate
Transmission code
19,200/9,600/4,800/2,400/1,200 bps
ASCII (7-bit), JIS (8-bit)
Parity
No. of stop bits
Even, odd, none
1 or 2 bits
RS-232C ports
Connectors
2 ports
D-sub 9-pin connector for 2 ports
Transmission memory
capacity
Frame length
1,024 bytes for 2 ports
Header code
Enable/disable
(Header code: 1 byte when enabled.)
Delimiter code
Enable/disable
(Delimiter code: 1 byte when enabled.)
1,024 bytes max. (FIFO)
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Item
Flow control
Transmission distance
6-2-4
Specification
Enable/Disable (RS/CS control only)
Flow Control Enabled
The RS (Request Send) signal is normally ON, but it turns
OFF when the receive buffer reaches 75% of capacity. CS
is always checked.
Flow Control Disabled
The RS (Request Send) signal is always ON. The Receive
Buffer Overflow Flag turns ON if the receive buffer overflows. CS is always checked.
Note: The CS signal is always checked. Data will not be
output if CS is not connected. Short-circuit the RS-CS signals when they are not used.
15 m max.
Components
RS-232C
connector
Indicators port 1
RS-232C connector port 2
Power supply DIP switch (Refer to page 260.)
terminal
Pins 1 to 6:
Node address
Communications connector Pins 7 and 8: Baud rate
Pins 9 and 10: Reserved (Always OFF)
Indicators
The indicators display the status of the RS-232C Unit and the network.
Indicator Color
MS
Green
(Module
status)
Red
---
ON
Status
Normal
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
Flashing
Settings
incomplete
Settings are being read.
ON
Fatal error
Flashing
Non-fatal
error
No power
supply
A fatal error (hardware error) has
occurred.
A non-fatal error, such as a switch
setting error, has occurred.
Unit error, power is not being supplied, the Unit is being reset, or waiting for initial processing to start.
OFF
263
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Indicator Color
NS
Green
(Network
status)
ON
Flashing
Red
ON
Flashing
---
OFF
ERR
Red
ON
RD1
Orange
OFF
ON
RD2
SD2
Orange
Orange
Orange
Offline/communications
connection
not yet
established
Fatal communications
error
The Network is normal, but the communications connection is not established.
Non-fatal
communications error
Offline/
power OFF
Unit error
A fatal communications error has
occurred.
Network communications are not
possible. Check for a node address
duplication or Bus Off error.
A communications error with the
Master Unit has occurred.
The power supply to the Master Unit
is not ON, etc.
Unit hardware error.
Unit hardware is normal.
Data is being received at
RS-232C port 1.
No data is being received at
RS-232C port 1.
ON
Port 1 transmitting
Data is being transmitted from
RS-232C port 1.
OFF
Port 1 not
transmitting
No data is being transmitted from
RS-232C port 1.
ON
Port 2 receiv- Data is being received at
ing
RS-232C port 2.
OFF
Port 2 not
receiving
Port 2 transmitting
Port 2 not
transmitting
ON
OFF
264
Meaning
Normal Network status
(Communications connection established.)
Normal
Port 1 receiving
Port 1 not
receiving
OFF
SD1
Status
Online/communications
connection
established
No data is being received at
RS-232C port 2.
Data is being transmitted from
RS-232C port 2.
No data is being transmitted from
RS-232C port 2.
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-5
Word Allocations for Communications Status
The RS-232C Unit is allocated one word (16 points) in the IN Area of the Master Unit. This word is configured as illustrated in the following diagram, and is
used to communicate the communications status of RS-232C ports 1 and 2 to
the Master Unit.
Port 2 status
Port 1 status
Bit
Bits 0, 8: Transmission Ready Flag
Bits 1, 9: System Parameter Setup Error Flag
Bits 2, 10: Receiving Flag
Bits 3, 11: Received Flag
Bits 4, 12: Parity Error Flag
Bits 5, 13: Overrun Error Flag
Bits 6, 14: Framing Error Flag
Bits 7, 15: Receive Buffer Overflow Flag
0
Bit
8
Name
Transmission
Ready Flag
Function
1
9
PLC Setup Error
Flag
0: System parameter setup normal
1: System parameter setup error
2
10
Receiving Flag
0: No data is being received
1: Data is being received
3
11
Received Flag
0: No data in the reception buffer
1: Data in the reception buffer
When reading data from other ports (RECEIVE
READ DATA command), check to make sure this
bit is 1 (ON) before starting.
4
12
Parity Error Flag
5
13
6
14
7
15
0: Transmitting data
1: Transmission enabled (no data transmitted)
When writing data to other ports (SEND command), check to make sure this bit is 1 (ON)
before starting.
0: No parity error
1: Parity error
When a parity error occurs, make sure that the
parity setting for the RS-232C Unit and the RS232C device are the same.
Overrun Error Flag 0: No overrun error
1: Overrun error
When an overrun error occurs, make sure that
the baud rate setting for the RS-232C Unit and
the RS-232C device are the same.
Framing Error Flag 0: No framing error
1: Framing error
When a framing error occurs, make sure that the
character format setting (data length, parity, No.
of stop bits) for the RS-232C Unit and the RS232C device are the same.
Receive Buffer
0: No overflow in the reception buffer
Overflow Flag
1: Reception buffer overflow (Not possible to read
receive data)
When the reception buffer overflows it is necessary to either reset or restart the RS-232C Unit,
or reset (initialize) the RS-232C port at which the
overflow occurred.
265
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-6
Using the RS-232C Unit
The RS-232C Unit is set and controlled using explicit DeviceNet messages or
the DeviceNet Configurator. When the default communications settings for the
RS-232C port are not used, the settings must be changed using explicit messages or the DeviceNet Configurator.
Making Settings with
Explicit Messages
1,2,3...
The general operating procedure for the RS-232C Unit is as follows:
1. Turn ON the power to the Master Unit and all Slaves, including the RS232C Unit.
2. When necessary, explicit messages can be sent from the Master to set the
parameters of the RS-232C ports 1 and 2 on the RS-232C Unit.
Note a) Communications setting do not become effective even after the
explicit message has been completed normally. For the settings to
be effective, the RS-232C port must be reset using the PORT RESET command, or by restarting the RS-232C Unit. The previous
settings will be in effect until the new settings are enabled.
b) The communications settings are held internally by the RS-232C
Unit, so once they have been set, they will not change when the
Unit is turned OFF or reset, and once set, it is not necessary to set
the parameters again, unless there are changes to be made.
3. Register the RS-232C Unit in the Master’s scan list. There are two methods of registering on the scan list.
• Turn ON the Enable Scan List software switch on the Master Unit.
• Create a scan list and registering the Unit using a DeviceNet Configurator.
For further details on Master Unit operations, refer to the DeviceNet Master
Unit Operation Manual or the DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual.
4. When necessary, explicit messages can be sent from the Master to control
the flow of data through the RS-232C ports 1 and 2 on the RS-232C Unit.
Note a) When sending or receiving data through ports 1 and 2, it is necessary to check the status word allocated to the RS-232C Unit for
communications status in the Master’s IN Area.
b) Ports 1 and 2 can send and receive data independently but because the RS-232C Unit itself can only process one explicit message at a time, even if the SEND/RECV commands to be sent are
for another port, always make sure that the previous explicit message has been processed before sending the next message.
Making Settings with the
DeviceNet Configurator
1,2,3...
The communications settings can be made using the OMRON DeviceNet
Configurator (version [email protected] or later). When using a version earlier than [email protected],
contact your local sales office before use. (Version information can be confirmed from the Help Menu.)
1. Connect a DeviceNet Configurator to the DeviceNet Network and go online.
2. Turn ON the power to the RS-232C Unit.
266
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
3. Locate the RS-232C Unit’s icon in the Network Configuration window and
double click the icon.
The Device Parameters Editing Window (Communications Settings parameter setting window) will be displayed.
4. Either double click on the Communications parameter that you want to
change or select the desired parameter and press the Enter Key.
It will become possible to change the parameter.
267
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
5. Set or change parameters.
• frame format
Put check marks next to the items that you want to disable and press the
Enter Key, or click another location in the window.
• Data size
Input the new value and press the Enter Key, or click another location in
the window.
• Settings other than frame format and Data size
Select the desired parameter setting from the corresponding pull-down
menu and press the Enter Key, or click another location in the window. (In
this example, the character format is being set.)
268
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6. When the desired parameter changes and settings have been completed,
click the Download Button. The edited parameters will be written to the
RS-232C Unit.
7. Click the Reset Button to enable the edited parameters.
A reset confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to
confirm.
Note
1. When exchanging data through ports 1 and 2, it is necessary to confirm the
status of the data transfer (communications status) in the words allocated
to the RS-232C Unit in the Master Unit’s Input Area.
2. It is possible to operate ports 1 and 2 independently, but the RS-232C Unit
can process only one explicit message at a time. Even if you are going execute a send command or receive command for the other port, confirm that
the previous explicit message processing has been completed before executing the next explicit message.
6-2-7
Explicit DeviceNet Messages
Explicit DeviceNet messages sent from the Master Unit can be used to control
the parameters of the RS-232C Unit’s ports 1 and 2 and to control the flow of
data.
The RS-232C Unit processes the commands received from the Master Unit
and returns responses.
Master
RS-232C Unit
Command
Command
Response
269
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
RS-232C Unit Explicit
Message List
The explicit messages that can be processed by the RS-232C Unit are as
listed in the following table. For the RS-232C Unit, the service code and the
Instance ID determine the processing content and object. The Class ID is
always 0094 Hex.
Explicit
message
PARAMETER
SET
Function
Sets the parameters for an
RS-232C port.
Service code
(See note)
10 Hex (90 Hex)
Instance ID
Page
01 Hex
272
PARAMETER
READ
Reads the parame- 0E Hex (8E Hex) 01 Hex
ters set for an
RS-232C port.
275
INITIALIZE
PARAMETERS
Initializes the
parameters for an
RS-232C port.
05 Hex (85 Hex)
01 Hex
276
RS-232C DATA
SEND
Transmits data
from an
RS-232C port.
Reads data
received by an
RS-232C port.
Resets an
RS-232C port.
When an error
occurs in an
explicit message
(command), an
error response is
sent from the
RS-232C Unit.
10 Hex (90 Hex)
Port 1: 02 Hex
Port 2: 03 Hex
276
0E Hex (8E Hex) Port 1: 02 Hex
Port 2: 03 Hex
277
05 Hex (85 Hex)
278
RS-232C
RECEIVE DATA
READ
PORT RESET
Error response
--- (94 Hex)
Port 1: 02 Hex
Port 2: 03 Hex
---
279
Note The parentheses indicate the response values.
Explicit Message Format
This section explains the common features of explicit commands and
responses. Details and usage examples will only be provided however, for
those explicit messages that the RS-232C Unit can process. For details on
using explicit messages with a Master Unit, refer to the DeviceNet Operation
Manual.
The number of bytes designated for Class ID, Instance ID, and Attribute ID
differ depending on the Master. When sent from an OMRON DeviceNet Master, Class ID and Instance ID are 2 bytes (4 digits), and Attribute ID is 1 byte
(2 digits). For an example using this case, see 6-2-8 Using Explicit DeviceNet
Messages.
Command Block
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
151 bytes max.
Instance ID
Attribute
ID
Data
Destination Node Address
The node address of the RS-232C Unit controlled by the explicit message
(command) in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal.
270
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Service Code, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID
The parameters for specifying command, processing object, and processing
content. For the RS-232C Unit, however, Class ID is always 94 Hex. Attribute
ID is not necessary for some commands. If the specified codes and ID area
are outside the permitted range, an error response will be returned (08FF
Hex), and the command will not be executed.
Data
Data set when necessary. A maximum of 151 bytes can be set. Some commands do not require this data.
Response Block
• The normal response block is shown below.
1,024 bytes max.
No. of received
bytes
Service
code
Data
Source node address
• The error response block is shown below. This response block is returned
when an error occurs for an explicit message.
Error code
No. of received Service code
bytes
(94 Hex: Fixed)
Source node address
• If an explicit message fails (timeout etc.), an explicit message response
will not be returned. When the command has been sent using the FINS
command EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND, only an FINS error response is
returned.
No. of Received Bytes
The number of bytes received from the source node address is returned in
hexadecimal. When an error response is returned for an explicit message, the
number of bytes is 0004 Hex.
Source Node Address
The node address of the node from which the command was sent is returned
in hexadecimal.
Service Code
For normal completion, the value when leftmost bit of the service code specified by the command is ON is stored as shown in the table below.
Command service code
Response service code
10 Hex
0E Hex
90 Hex
8E Hex
05 Hex
85 Hex
When an error response is returned for an explicit message, the value is
94 Hex.
271
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Data
Data read when the PARAMETER EAD or RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ
commands are used. The maximum number of bytes is 1,024. Only a maximum of 152 bytes can be read using an OMRON DeviceNet Master. Be sure
not to exceed the maximum of 152 bytes.
Error Code
The explicit message error code. For details see Error Response on
page 279.
PARAMETER SET
Sets the parameters for the specified RS-232C port.
Command Block
10
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
00
01
Instance ID
Attribute
ID
Response Block
No. of received Service code
bytes
Source node address
272
6 bytes max.
Set values
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Parameters
Attribute ID, Set Values (Command)
The parameters and set values are set as shown in the following table.
Port
Port 1
Parameters
Set all parameters
Attribute ID
64 Hex
Set values
ALL PARAMETER SET (See below)
Initial values
Initial values for
each parameter
Data bit length, par- 65 Hex
ity, No. of stop bits
Specify the appropriate set values from the
Data bit length:
parameters in the table, as single-byte (2-digit) 7 bits
hexadecimal. (See note.)
Parity: Even
No. of stop bits:
2 bits
Header code
66 Hex
enable/disable,
delimiter code
enable/disable, flow
control enable/disable
Specify bit data in single-byte (2-digit)
hexadecimal, as shown in the following
diagram.
Baud rate
Specified in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal
as follows:
00 Hex: 1,200 bps
01 Hex: 2,400 bps
02 Hex: 4,800 bps
03 Hex: 9,600 bps
04 Hex: 19,200 bps
05 to 07 Hex: Not allowed
Specifies the header code in single-byte (2digit) hexadecimal.
2,400 bps
Specifies the delimiter code in single-byte (2digit) hexadecimal.
03 Hex (ETX code)
67 Hex
Header code (only 68 Hex
when header code
is enabled)
Delimiter code (only 69 Hex
when delimiter code
is enabled)
No. of bytes
6A hex
received after the
delimiter (when the
delimiter code is
enabled) or the No.
of bytes received
per frame (when the
delimiter code is
disabled).
Bit
Always 0
Header code and
delimiter code
enabled, flow control disabled
Header code: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Delimiter code: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Flow control (RS/CS control)
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
02 Hex (STX code)
Specifies the number of bytes in single-byte (2- 00 Hex
digit) hexadecimal.
273
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Port
Port 2
Parameters
Set all parameters
Attribute ID
6B Hex
Set values
ALL PARAMETER SET (See below)
Initial values
Initial values for
each parameter
Data bit length, par- 6C Hex
ity, No. of stop bits
Specify the appropriate set values from the
parameters in the table, as single-byte (2-digit)
hexadecimal).
(See note.)
Data bit length:
7 bits
Parity: Even
No. of stop bits:
2 bits
Header code
6D Hex
enable/disable,
delimiter code
enable/disable, flow
control enable/disable
Specify bit data in single-byte (2-digit)
hexadecimal, as shown in the following
diagram.
Header code and
delimiter code
enabled, flow control disabled
Baud rate
6E Hex
Header code (only
when header code
is enabled)
6F Hex
Bit
Always 0
Header code: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Delimiter code: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Flow control (RS/CS control)
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Specified in single-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal
as follows:
00 Hex: 1,200 bps
01 Hex: 2,400 bps
02 Hex: 4,800 bps
03 Hex: 9,600 bps
04 Hex: 19,200 bps
05 to 07 Hex: Not allowed
Specifies the header code in single-byte (2digit) hexadecimal.
2,400 bps
Delimiter code (only 70 Hex
when delimiter code
is enabled)
Specifies the delimiter code in single-byte (2digit) hexadecimal.
03 Hex (ETX code)
No. of bytes
71 hex
received after the
delimiter (when the
delimiter code is
enabled) or the No.
of bytes received
per frame (when the
delimiter code is
disabled).
Specifies the number of bytes in single-byte (2- 00 Hex
digit) hexadecimal.
02 Hex (STX code)
Note Port 1 and 2 parameter settings for data bit length, parity, and No. of stop bits:
Set value
274
Data bit length
Parity
No. of stop bits
00 Hex
01 Hex
7
7
Even
Odd
1
1
02 Hex
03 Hex
7
7
None
Even
1
2
04 Hex
05 Hex
7
7
Odd
None
2
2
06 Hex
07 Hex
8
8
Even
Odd
1
1
08 Hex
09 Hex
8
8
None
None
1
2
0A Hex to 0F Hex
7
Even
2
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
ALL PARAMETER SET
Writes all the Attribute ID set values to consecutive words, and transmits all
the settings at the same time, as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
First word
First word +1
First word +2
First word +3
Data bit length
65 Hex (6C Hex)
Attribute code
64 Hex (6 B Hex)
Header code enable/disable
66 Hex (6D Hex)
Baud rate
67 Hex (6E Hex)
Delimiter code
69 Hex (70 Hex)
Header code
68 Hex (6F Hex)
No. of bytes received after the delimiter
/per frame 6A Hex (71 Hex)
00 Hex: Fixed
Note The hexadecimal values displayed above are the set values for Attribute ID.
The values in parentheses are the Attribute ID values for port 2
• The new set values will become effective if the PORT RESET command
is sent or the RS-232C Unit is restarted after the command is completely
normally.
PARAMETER READ
Reads the parameters set for the RS-232C port. If the PARAMETER SET
command has not been sent, or the RS-232C Unit has not been reset, this
command will read the previously set parameters, not the new settings. (The
RS-232C port will also operate according to the previous settings.)
Command Block
0E
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
00
01
Instance ID
Attribute
ID
Response Block
6 bytes max.
Service Set values
No. of received
code
bytes
Source node address
Parameters
Attribute ID (Command)
Specifies the Attribute ID for reading the set values. For details on what to
specify, see PARAMETER SET on page 272. It is also possible to specify all
parameters at once (Port 1: 64 Hex, Port 2: 6B Hex).
Set Values (Response)
Reads the values that are set in Attribute ID and stores them. For details on
the meaning of the stored values, see PARAMETER SET on page 272.
275
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
INITIALIZE PARAMETERS
Initializes the parameters for the RS-232C Unit.
Command Block
05
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
00
01
Instance ID
Response Block
No. of received
bytes
Service code
Source node address
Initializes all parameters set for the RS-232C Unit and returns the initial values.
RS-232C DATA SEND
Transmits data to the RS-232C Unit from the specified port.
Command Block
10
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
00
××
64
151 bytes max.
Instance ID
Attribute
ID
Send data
Response Block
No. of received Service code
bytes
Source node address
Parameters
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the port to which the data is being sent, in hexadecimal as follows:
02 Hex: Port 1
03 Hex: Port 2
Send Data (Command)
Specifies the data to be sent from the specified port. Word data is sent from
the leftmost bits to the rightmost bits as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
First word
First word +1
First word +2
Note
276
(1)
(3)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(6)
1. When an odd number of bytes of data are sent, the last data will be set in
the last word of the leftmost bits.
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
2. The number of bytes of data to be sent is specified when the parameters
for the CMND(194) instruction (CV-series PLCs) or the IOWR instruction
(C200HX/HG/HE PLCs) are set (No. of bytes of command data). It is not
necessary to set this parameter for explicit messages.
3. Before using this command, be sure that the communications status
Transmission Ready Flag (Port 1: bit 00, Port 2: bit 08), allocated in the
Master’s IN Area is ON (transmission enabled). If the command is executed while the Flag is OFF (transmitting data), and error will occur (error
code 02FF Hex).
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA
READ
Receives data from the specified RS-232C Unit port, and reads the data
stored in the reception buffer. Depending on whether or not the header code
and delimiter code are enabled or disabled, the data read is treated as shown
in the following table. (When the delimiter header is disabled, the number of
bytes set in No. of bytes per frame is read.)
Header
code
Disabled
Delimiter
code
Disabled
Data read
The "No. of bytes per frame" is read from the
RS-232C Unit's reception buffer, starting with the first
word. First
Second
Third
N bytes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Second
Second
N-1 bytes
Enabled
Third
Data from the RS-232C Unit's reception buffer is
read, from the header code to the "No. of bytes per
frame." In this case, the data before the header code
is discarded
First
Enabled
N bytes
Data from the RS-232C Unit's reception buffer is
read, from the first word to the delimiter code. (There
is no limit to the amount of data read.)
First
Enabled
N bytes
N-1 bytes
Third
N-1 bytes
Data from the RS-232C Unit's reception buffer is
read, from the header code to the delimiter code.
(There is no limit to the amount of data read.) In this
case, the data before the header code is discarded.
First
Second
Third
Note H: Header code, D: Delimiter code, N: No. of bytes per frame, Shaded area:
trashed data.
The above explanation is very brief, but if the number. of bytes received after
the delimiter code is set, data after the delimiter code can also be read.
Command Block
0E
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
00
××
64
Instance ID
Attribute
ID
277
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Response Block
1,024 bytes max.
No. of received
bytes
Service
code
Receive data
Source node address
Parameters
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the port that reads the reception buffer data in hexadecimal as follows:
02 Hex: Port 1
03 Hex: Port 2
Receive Data (Response)
Stores the data read from the specified port’s reception buffer. The data is
stored in words from the leftmost byte to the rightmost byte as shown in the
following diagram.
Bit
(1)
(3)
(5)
First word
First word +1
First word +2
Note
(2)
(4)
(6)
1. RS-232C ports 1 and 2 of the RS-232C Unit each have a reception buffer
of 1,024 bytes, and up to a maximum of 1,024 bytes of data can be read
from the Master at any given time. From an OMRON DeviceNet Master
however, the maximum amount of data that can be read at one time is 152
bytes. Be sure to configure the data so that the 152-byte read data limit is
not exceeded.
2. When data is read from an OMRON DeviceNet Master, the number of read
bytes is stored as a CMND instruction (CV-series PLCs) or IOWR instruction (C200HX/HG/HE PLCs) parameter, so it will be requested.
3. When an odd number of bytes of data are sent, the last data will be set in
the leftmost bits of the last word.
4. Before using this command, be sure that the communications status Received Flag (Port 1: bit 3, Port 2: bit 11) allocated in the Master’s IN Area
is ON (data in the reception buffer). If the command is executed while the
Flag is OFF (no data in the reception buffer), and error will occur (error
code 1800 Hex).
PORT RESET
Resets the RS-232C Unit’s specified port. To change the parameter settings
using the PARAMETER SET command, either reset the port using the PORT
RESET command or restart the RS-232C Unit.
Command Block
05
00
94
Class ID
Service Code
Destination
node address
278
00
××
Instance ID
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Response Block
No. of received Service code
bytes
Source node address
Parameters
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the port to be reset, in hexadecimal as follows:
02 Hex: Port 1
03 Hex: Port 2
Note
1. When the port is reset, the transmission buffer and the reception buffers
are cleared and the port’s status is initialized. The parameter settings,
however, are maintained.
2. When an error occurs at a port, find the cause of the error and then use
this command to reset the port.
Error Response
If there is an error in the explicit command, the RS-232C Unit will return an
error response as illustrated below.
Response Block
No. of received
bytes
Error code
Service code
(94 Hex: fixed)
Source node address
Parameters
No. of Received Bytes (Response)
Always 0004 Hex.
Source Node Address (Response)
The node address of the node that sent the command is returned in hexadecimal.
Error Code (Response)
The error code is returned in double-byte (4-digit) hexadecimal, as shown in
the following table.
Error code
02FF Hex
Error details
The RS-232C port is transmitting
data and therefore busy.
Appropriate command
RS-232C DATA SEND
08FF Hex
The service code, Class ID, and
Instance ID are not supported.
All commands
09FF Hex
Data formatting error.
PARAMETER SET
RS-232C DATA SEND
1800 Hex
There is no receive data at the
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ
RS-232C port.
There is a parameter setting error
between RS-232C devices.
279
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-8
Error code
1801 Hex
Error details
An error frame was received from
a RS-232C device.
Appropriate command
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ
19FF Hex
Write not possible due to a hardware error etc.
PARAMETER SET
Using Explicit DeviceNet Messages
Using CMND to Change
Settings
(CS-series and CV-series)
The following example shows how to use the CMND instruction to change all
the parameters of port 1 of the RS-232C Unit at once from the Master Unit in
a CS-series or CV-series PLC.
Note If a CS-series PLC is being used, this example is applicable only when a CSseries Master Unit is mounted. Use the IOWR instruction when a C200HX/
HG/HE or C200HS Master Unit is mounted. In this case, refer to the
DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual for details on using the IOWR
instruction.
For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the DeviceNet
Master Unit Operation Manual. For information on the CMND instruction, refer
to the PLC’s Operation Manual or Programming Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 27
Slave network address: 2
Slave node address:
14
Example: Using the CMND Instruction
Command Words (S: First Command Word)
Word
S+2
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
0E 10
Slave node address: 14
PARAMETER SET command service code: 10
Hex
00 94
Class ID: 0094 Hex
S+3
S+4
00 01
64 06
S+5
00 00
S+6
02 03
S+7
00 00
S
S+1
Instance ID: 0001 Hex
ALL PARAMETER SET Attribute ID: 64 Hex,
(8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit): 06 Hex
Header code, delimiter code, and flow control all
enabled: 00 Hex, 1,200 bps: 00 Hex.
Header code STX: 02 Hex, Delimiter code ETX:
03 Hex.
No. of bytes after delimiter = 0 (00 Hex)
D: Response Words (D: First Response Word)
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
D
D+1
280
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
00 00
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
D+2
Word
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
00 02
No. of received bytes (data length after D+3): 2
bytes
D+3
0E 90
Slave node address: 14
PARAMETER SET response service code: 90
Hex
Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C
C+1
Using CMND to Read Data
(CS-series and CV-series)
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
00 0F
No. of bytes of command data: S (15 bytes of
command data)
00 08
No. of bytes of response data: D (8 bytes of
response data)
C+2
C+3
00 02
1B FE
C+4
00 00
C+5
00 64
Destination node network address: 2
Master’s node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Response returned, communications port No.:
0, No. of retries: 0
Response monitoring time: 10 s
The following example shows how to use the CMND instruction to read the
RS-232C Unit’s port 1 reception data from the Master Unit in a CS-series or
CV-series PLC. An OMRON DeviceNet Master can read a maximum of 152
bytes of data at a time.
Note If a CS-series PLC is being used, this example is applicable only when a CSseries Master Unit is mounted. Use the IOWR instruction when a C200HX/
HG/HE or C200HS Master Unit is mounted. In this case, refer to the
DeviceNet Master Unit Operation Manual for details on using the IOWR
instruction.
Before using the RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ command, be sure that the
communications status Received Flag (Port 1: bit 3, Port 2: bit 11), allocated
in the Master’s IN Area is ON.
For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the DeviceNet
Master Unit Operation Manual. For information on the CMND instruction, refer
to the PLC’s Operation Manual or Programming Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 27
Slave network address: 2
Slave node address:
14
Example: Using the CMND Instruction
Command Words (S: First Command Word)
Word
S+2
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
0E 0E
Slave node address: 14
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ command service code: 0E Hex
00 94
Class ID: 0094 Hex
S+3
S+4
00 02
64 00
S
S+1
Instance ID: Port 1 = 0002 Hex
Attribute ID: 64 Hex
281
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
D: Response Words (D: First Response Word)
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
D+1
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
00 00
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
D+2
D+3
00 xx
0E 8E
D+4
HH LL
to
to
D
No. of received bytes (data length after D+3)
Slave node address: 14
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ response service code: 8E Hex
The receive data read from RS-232C port 1 is
stored in sequence from the leftmost bit to the
rightmost bit.
Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C+1
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
00 09
No. of bytes of command data: S (9 bytes of
command data)
00 xx
No. of bytes of response data: D
C+2
C+3
00 02
1B FE
Destination node network address: 2
Master’s node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
C+4
00 00
Response returned, communications port No.:
0, No. of retries: 0
C+5
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
C
Using IOWR to Write Data
(C200HX/HG/HE PLCs)
The following example shows how to use the IOWR instruction to change all
the parameters of port 1 of the RS-232C Unit at once from the Master Unit
(C200HX/HG/HE PLC). For more detailed information on explicit messages,
refer to the Master Unit’s Operation Manual. For information on the IOWR
instruction, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PLCs Operation Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: 5
Slave node address:
14
Example: Using IOWR
C: Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
1B FE
Master’s node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Source Words (S: First Source Word)
Word
S
S+1
282
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
82 07
Response storage words: DM2000
82 Hex: DM Area, 07D0 Hex: 2000 words
(For more detail, refer to the PLC Operation
D0 00
Manual.)
S+2
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
S+3
00 0F
No. of bytes of command data: 15 bytes (No. of
bytes from S+4 onwards.)
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
S+4
Word
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
S+5
0E 10
Slave node address: 14
PARAMETER SET response service code: 10
Hex
Class ID: 0094 Hex
S+6
00 94
S+7
S+8
00 01
64 06
Instance ID: For IR Area 1: 0001 Hex
ALL PARAMETER SET Attribute ID: 64 Hex,
(8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit): 06 Hex.
S+9
06 00
Header code, delimiter code, and flow control all
enabled: 00 Hex, 1,200 bps: 00 Hex.
S+10
02 03
Header code STX: 02 Hex, Delimiter code ETX:
03 Hex.
S+11
00 00
No. of bytes after delimiter = 0 (00 Hex)
D: Transmission Information (Destination Unit and Number of Words).
Word
D
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
05 12
Master’s Unit address: 5, No. of words of command data: 12 words (specified in BCD) (No. of
words from S onwards)
Response Storage Words
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
DM2000
Using IOWR to Read Data
(C200HX/HG/HE PLCs)
DM2001
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
00 00
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
DM2002
00 02
No. of received bytes (data length after
DM2003): 2 bytes
DM2003
0E 90
Slave node address: 14
PARAMETER SET response service code:
90 Hex
The following example shows how to use the IOWR instruction to read the
reception data of port 1 of the RS-232C Unit, from the Master Unit (C200HX/
HG/HE PLC). The maximum amount of data that can be read from an
OMRON DeviceNet Master at one time is 152 bytes.
Before using the RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ command, be sure that the
communications status Received Flag (Port 1: bit 03, Port 2: bit 11), allocated
in the Master’s IN Area is ON.
For more detailed information on explicit messages, refer to the Master Unit’s
Operation Manual. For information on the IOWR instruction, refer to the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PLCs Operation Manual.
Example Conditions
Master node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: 5
Slave node address:
14
Example: Using IOWR
283
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
C: Control Words (C: First Control Word)
Word
C
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
1B FE
Master’s node address: 27
Master’s Unit address: FE Hex
Source Words (S: First Source Word)
Word
S
S+1
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
82 07
Response storage words: DM2000
82 Hex: DM Area, 07D0 Hex: 2000 words
(For more detail, refer to the PLC Operation
D0 00
Manual.)
S+2
00 64
Response monitoring time: 10 s
S+3
00 09
No. of bytes of command data: 9 bytes (No. of
bytes from S+4 onwards.)
S+4
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
S+5
0E 0E
Slave node address: 14
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ response service code: 0E Hex
S+6
S+7
00 94
00 02
Class ID: 0094 Hex
Instance ID: For port 1: 0002 Hex
S+8
64 00
Attribute ID: 64 Hex
D: Transmission Information (Destination Unit and Number of Words).
Word
D
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
05 09
Master’s Unit address: 5, No. of words of command data: 9 words (specified in BCD) (No. of
words from S onwards)
Response Storage Words
Results are stored as shown in the following table.
Word
DM2000
284
DM2001
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code: 28
01 Hex
00 00
Response code (0000 Hex: Normal completion)
DM2002
DM2003
00 xx
0E 8E
DM2004 on
HH LL...
No. of received bytes (data length after D+3)
Slave node address: 14
RS-232C RECEIVE DATA READ response service code: 8E Hex
The receive data read from RS-232C port 1 is
stored in sequence from the leftmost bit to the
rightmost bit.
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-9
Dimensions
Mounting holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Unit: mm
6-2-10 Mounting in Control Panels
Either of the following methods can be used to mount an RS-232C Unit in a
control panel.
Using Screws
Drill mounting holes in the control panel according to the dimensions provided
for mounting holes in the dimensions diagrams and then secure the RS-232C
Unit with M4 screws. The appropriate tightening torque is 0.6 to 0.98 N⋅m.
Using DIN Track
Mount the back of the RS-232C Unit to a 35-mm DIN Track. To mount the
Unit, pull down on the mounting hook on the back of the Unit with a screwdriver, insert the DIN Track on the back of the Unit, and then secure the Unit
to the DIN Track. When finished, secure all Slaves on both ends of the DIN
Track with End Plates.
285
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Connecting End Plates
Hook the bottom of the End Plate onto the DIN Track, as shown at (1) in the
following diagram, then hook the top of the End Plate as shown at (2).
2
1
End Plate
Note Always attach End Plate to both ends of Slaves connected to DIN Track.
Mounting Direction
Unless specific restrictions are given for the Slave, it can be mounted in any
direction. Any of the following directions are okay.
PORT1
Vertical
PORT2
DRT1-232C2
RS232C UNIT
SD2
No.
No.
RD2
SD2
PORT2
SD1
NS
RD1
ERR
PORT1
MS
SD1
SD2
RD2
PORT1
PORT1
SD2
NS
RS232C UNIT
RD2
RD1
RS232C UNIT
MS
DRT1-232C2
ERR
DRT1-232C2
SD1
PORT2
No.
RD1
No.
NS
RD2
RS232C UNIT
SD1
DRT1-232C2
RD1
ERR
NS
ERR
MS
MS
PORT2
6-2-11 Wiring
Internal Power Supply
The recommended Power Supply Units are as follows:
• S82K-05024 (OMRON) or equivalent.
• [email protected] (OMRON) or equivalent.
Source
24 V DC
–
+
+ –
Internal power supply
Note
1. Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect wires directly to the terminals.
3. Tighten terminal screws to a torque of 0.3 to 0.5 N • m.
4. Use the following M3 crimp terminals.
6.0 mm max.
286
6.0 mm max.
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
RS-232C Connector
Pin Arrangement (Same for Ports 1 and 2)
Pin No.
Symbol
Signal name
Signal direction
RS-232C Unit ↔ External
devices
1
2
--RD
Not used
Receive data
--←
3
4
SD
---
Send data
Not used
→
---
5
6
SG
---
Signal ground
Not used
-----
7
8
RS
CS
Request send (See note.)
Can send (See note.)
→
←
9
---
Not used
---
Note The CS signal is always checked. Data will not be output if CS is not connected. Short-circuit the RS-CS signals when they are not used.
A connection example using applicable connectors and recommended cables
is provided below. Refer to the following explanation when creating cables.
Applicable Connectors
Plug: XM2D-0901 (OMRON, 9-pin female) or equivalent.
Hood: XM2S-0913 (OMRON, 9-pin inch-pitch screws) or equivalent.
Recommended Cables
UL2464 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product, Fujikura)
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB (Non-UL products, Fujikura)
UL2464-SB 5P × AWG28 (UL product, Hitachi)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × AWG28 (Non-UL product, Hitachi)
Connection Example
The following diagram gives an connection example. Connection methods
however, may differ depending on the connected devices, so refer to the connected device’s instruction manual for further information.
Connecting an OMRON [email protected] Bar Code Reader
RS-232C Unit end
Bar Code Reader end
Abbreviation Pin No.
Pin No. Abbreviation
-----
RS-232C
interface
RS-232C
interface
----------Hood
metal
(9-pin)
(9-pin, male)
Shield
287
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
6-2-12 RS-232C Unit Application Examples
This section explains the procedure for using explicit messages with an RS232C Unit. The following system configuration example is used in this example. When explicit messages are used with an RS-232C Unit, the communications conditions for ports 1 and 2 on the RS-232C Unit can be set individually,
and data can be read or written to the RS-232C Unit.
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Unit
(node address 00, unit number 0)
24-V DC power supply
C200HX PLC
T-branch Tap
Terminating Resistor
T-branch Tap
Terminating Resistor
T-branch Tap
Port 1 Port 2
DRT1-232C2 RS-232C Unit
(node address 08)
Bar Code Bar Code
Reader 1 Reader 2
Setting Port Parameters
When IR 00000 (port 1 settings) or IR 00001 (port 2 settings) turns ON in the
CPU Unit of the Master Unit, the RS-232C Unit’s port parameters will be set.
For details on Bar Code Reader settings, refer to the Bar Code Reader’s
Operation Manual.
Set the port parameters as follows:
• Port 1 Parameters
Data length:
8 bits
Parity:
None
Stop bits:
1
Header code:
Disabled
Delimiter code:
Enabled
Flow control:
Enabled
Baud rate:
9,600 bps
Delimiter code
CR code:
0D Hex
Number of bytes received after delimiter:0
• Port 2 Parameters
288
Data length:
7 bits
Parity:
Even
Stop bits:
2
Header code:
Enabled
Delimiter code:
Enabled
Flow control:
Disabled
Baud rate:
2,400 bps
Header code
STX code:
02 Hex
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Delimiter code
ETX code:
03 Hex
Number of bytes received after delimiter:0
If any of the port parameters are changed, the changed settings will become
valid only when the port is reset or the RS-232C Unit is started up again. In
the following programming example, the ports are reset after the parameters
are set.
Ladder Program
25315
Clears the DM Area words being used when the
program starts.
BSET(71)
#0000
DM0000
DM0999
Port 1 and 2 parameter setting common data
25315
MOV(21)
#8200
DM0000
MOV(21)
Response storage word: DM 0100
(82 Hex: DM; 0064 Hex: word 100; 00 Hex: Word
data)
#6400
DM0001
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV(21)
#0064
DM0002
Number of command data bytes: 15 bytes
MOV(21)
#000F
DM0003
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
MOV(21)
#2801
DM0004
Slave node address: 08
PARAMETER SET command service code: 10 Hex
MOV(21)
#0810
DM0005
Class ID: 94 Hex
MOV(21)
#0094
DM0006
Instance ID: 01 Hex
MOV(21)
#0001
DM0007
289
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
25315
Port 1 and 2 resetting common data
MOV(21)
#8201
DM0400
MOV(21)
Response storage words: DM 0450
(82 Hex: DM; 01C2 Hex: word 450; 00 Hex: Word data)
#C200
DM0401
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV(21)
#0064
DM0402
Number of command data bytes: 8 bytes
MOV(21)
#0008
DM0403
MOV(21)
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
#2801
DM0404
MOV(21)
Slave node address: 08
RS-232C PORT RESET command service code:
05 Hex
#0805
DM0405
Class ID: 94 Hex
MOV(21)
#0094
DM0406
25315
MOV(21)
#6408
Port 1 parameter setting data
ALL PARAMETER SET Attribute ID: 64 Hex
8-bit data length, no parity, 1 stop bit: 08 Hex
DM0020
MOV(21)
#0103
Disabled header code, enabled delimiter code,
enabled flow control: 01 Hex
9,600-bps baud rate: 03 Hex
DM0021
MOV(21)
Delimiter code: CR code (0D Hex)
#000D
DM0022
MOV(21)
Number of transmission bytes after delimiter: 0
#0000
DM0023
Port 2 parameter setting data
MOV(21)
#6B03
DM0024
MOV((21)
#0401
DM0025
MOV(21)
#0203
ALL PARAMETER SET Attribute ID: 6B Hex
7-bit data length, even parity, 2 stop bits: 03 Hex
Enabled header code, enabled delimiter code, disabled flow control: 04 Hex
2,400-bps baud rate: 01 Hex
Header code: STX code (02 Hex)
Delimiter code: ETX code (03 Hex)
DM0026
Number of transmission bytes after delimiter: 0
MOV(21)
#0000
DM0027
290
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
00000
00001
Writing data from port 1 to command data area
XFER(70)
#0004
DM0020
DM0008
When IR 00000 turns ON, data held at port 1 will
be written to the command data area.
MOV(21)
#0002
DM0407
DIFU(13)
00002
00000
IR 00002 turned ON for one cycle (as a differentiated
bit).
Writing data from port 2 to command data area
00001
XFER(70)
#0004
DM0024
DM0008
When IR 00001 turns ON, data held at port 2 will
be written to the command data area.
MOV(21)
#0003
DM0407
IR 00003 turned ON for one cycle (as a differentiated
bit).
DIFU(13)
00003
00002
MOV(21)
#0001
00003
When IR 00002 or IR 00003 turns ON, the sequential processing control bit IR 03000 will turn ON.
030
03001
IOWR
#00FE
DM0400
#0008
25506
MOV(21)
#0002
When IR 03001 turns ON, the port reset message
will be transmitted.
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit address FE Hex
DM 0400: Command data storage words
0008 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 8 command data
words (BCD)
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the Master), IR 03001 will be turned ON, and the data will be
transmitted again.
030
25506
MOV(21)
#0000
030
03000
10112
MOV(21)
#0000
030
IOWR
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 03001 will be cleared
(message transmission completed).
When IR 03000 turns ON, the CPU Unit will check
that IR 10112 (unit no. 0 Master's Message Communications Enabled Flag) is ON, and the ALL PARAMETER SET message is transmitted.
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit
address FE Hex
DM 0000: Command data storage words
#00FE
DM0000
#0012
25506
MOV(21)
#0001
030
25506
0012 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 12 command
data words (BCD)
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the
Master), IR 03001 will be turned ON, and the data
will be transmitted again.
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 03001 will be turned
ON (the port will be reset).
MOV(21)
#0002
030
END(01)
291
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Note
1. When transmitting explicit messages from an OMRON Master Unit, specify 2 bytes each for the Class ID and the Instance ID. Set 1 byte as the Attribute ID for the parameter setting command.
2. The parameters that are set are held internally.
3. To enable the parameters that have been set, the RS-232C PORT RESET
command has been used in the program examples. The parameters can
also be enabled, however, by turning OFF the power to the RS-232C Unit
and then turning it ON again.
Responses
The following responses will be stored if the parameters are set properly.
PARAMETER SET Response
Words
DM 0100
Contents (Hex)
28 01
DM 0101
00 00
DM 0102
00 02
DM 0103
08 90
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0103 onwards) is 2 bytes.
Slave node address is 08.
PARAMETER SET response service
code is 90 Hex.
PORT RESET Response
Words
Contents (Hex)
DM 0450
28 01
DM 0451
00 00
DM 0452
00 02
DM 0453
08 85
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0453 onwards) is 2 bytes.
Slave node address is 08.
PORT RESET response service code is
85 Hex.
6-2-13 Reading RS-232C Unit Parameters
With the following example, the port parameters that are set for the RS-232C
Unit are all read for the port when IR 00004 (port 1) or IR 00005 (port 2) turns
ON in the CPU Unit of the Master Unit.
When the RS-232C Unit’s PARAMETER READ command is used, the parameters that are valid at that time will be read. After setting the parameters, the
RS-232C Unit must be turned OFF and then ON again, or the ports must be
reset for the new parameters to be enabled.
292
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Ladder Program
25315
BSET(71)
#0000
Clears all DM Area words being used when the
program starts.
M0000
DM0999
25315
MOV(21)
#8200
DM0050
MOV(21)
Response storage words: DM 0150
(82 Hex: DM; 0096 Hex: word 150; 00 Hex: Word data)
#9600
DM0051
MOV(21)
Response monitoring time: 10 s
#0064
DM0052
MOV(21)
Number of command data bytes: 9 bytes
#0009
DM0053
MOV(21)
#2801
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
DM0054
MOV(21)
#080E
Slave node address: 08
PARAMETER READ command service code: 0E Hex
DM0055
Class ID: 94 Hex
MOV(21)
#0094
DM0056
MOV(21)
Instance ID: 01 Hex
#0001
DM0057
00004
00005
MOV(21)
#6400
When IR 00004 turns ON, the ALL PARAMETER
READ command for port 1 and Attribute ID (64 Hex)
are written as command data.
DM0058
00006
IR 00006 is turned ON for one cycle (as a differentiated
bit).
#6B00
When IR 00005 turns ON, the ALL PARAMETER
READ command for port 2 and Attribute ID (6B Hex)
are written as command data.
DIFU(13)
00004
00005
MOV((21)
DM0058
DIFU(13)
00007
IR 00007 is turned ON for one cycle (as a differentiated
bit).
When IR 00006 or IR 00007 turns ON, the sequential
processing control bit IR 03100 turns ON.
00006
MOV(21)
#0001
031
00007
293
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
03100
10112
IOWR
#00FE
DM0050
When IR 03100 turns ON, the CPU Unit will check
that IR 10112 (unit no. 0 Master's Message Communications Enabled Flag) is ON, and message
transmission will start.
#0009
25506
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit
address FE Hex
MOV(21)
#0000
031
25506
MOV(21)
#0001
031
END(01)
DM 0050: Command data storage words
0009 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 9 command
data words (BCD)
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 03101 will be cleared
(message transmission completed).
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the
Master), IR 03101 will be turned ON, and the data
will be transmitted again.
Note When transmitting explicit messages from an OMRON Master Unit, specify 2
bytes each for the Class ID and the Instance ID. Set 1 byte as the Attribute ID
for the PARAMETER READ command.
Response
The following response will be stored if the parameters are read properly.
Words
DM 0150
Contents (Hex)
28 01
Meaning
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
DM 0151
00 00
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
DM 0152
00 08
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0153 onwards) is 8 bytes.
DM 0153
08 8E
Slave node address is 08.
PARAMETER READ response service
code is 8E Hex.
DM 0154
xx xx
DM 0155
xx xx
Leftmost byte: Setting for the data bit
length
Rightmost byte: Setting for the header
code enable/disable
Leftmost byte: Setting for the baud rate
Rightmost byte: Setting for the header
code
DM 0156
xx xx
Leftmost byte: Setting for the delimiter
code
Rightmost byte: Setting for the number of
bytes/frames received after the delimiter
6-2-14 Reading Data Received by RS-232C Unit Ports
In the following example, the data received by the Bar Code Reader is stored
in the receive buffer of the RS-232C Unit and read to the Master Unit. If there
is data already in the receive buffer of the RS-232C Unit, it will be read to the
Master Unit. Response data from port 1 is stored in DM 0300 onwards, and
response data from port 2 is stored in DM 0350 onwards. In the following program example, however, the data received is no more than 50 words (100
bytes).
294
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
Ladder Program
25315
BSET(71)
#0000
Clears all DM Area words being used when the
program starts.
DM0000
DM0999
25315
MOV(21)
#8201
DM0200
Setting data for executing the RECEIVE DATA READ
command for port 1
Response storage word: DM 0300
(82 Hex: DM; 012C Hex: word 300; 00 Hex: Word
data)
MOV(21)
#2C00
DM0201
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV(21)
#0064
DM0202
Number of command data bytes: 9 bytes
MOV(21)
#0009
DM0203
MOV(21)
#2801
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
DM0204
MOV(21)
#080E
Slave node address: 08
RECEIVE DATA READ command service code: 0E Hex
DM0205
Class ID: 94 Hex
MOV(21)
#0094
DM0206
Port 1 RECEIVE DATA READ Instance ID: 02 Hex
MOV(21)
#0002
DM0207
Attribute ID: 64 Hex
MOV(21)
#6400
DM0208
295
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
25315
Setting data for executing the RECEIVE DATA READ
command for port 2
MOV(21)
#8201
DM0250
MOV(21)
Response storage words: DM 0350
(82 Hex: DM; 015E Hex: word 350; 00 Hex: Word data)
#5E00
DM0251
Response monitoring time: 10 s
MOV(21)
#0064
DM0252
Number of command data bytes: 9 bytes
MOV(21)
#0009
DM0253
MOV(21)
#2801
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code (FINS):
2801 Hex
DM0254
MOV(21)
#080E
Slave node address: 08
RECEIVE DATA READ command service code: 0E Hex
DM0255
Class ID: 94 Hex
MOV(21)
#0094
DM0256
Port 1 RECEIVE DATA READ Instance ID: 03 Hex
MOV(21)
#0003
DM0257
Attribute ID: 64 Hex
MOV(21)
#6400
DM0258
35802
35803
MOV(21)
#0001
032
03200
10112
Reading Data Received at Port 1
If SR 35802 (Port 1 RS-232C Receiving Flag) is OFF
and SR 35803 (Port 1 RS-232C Received Flag) is
ON, the sequential processing control bit IR 03200
will be turned ON.
MOV(21)
#0000
032
When IR 03200 turns ON, the CPU Unit will
check that IR 10112 (unit no. 0 Master's Message Communications Enabled Flag) is ON,
and message transmission will start.
IOWR
#00FE
DM0200
#0009
25506
MOV(21)
#0001
032
25506
0009 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 9 command data
words (BCD)
MOV(21)
#0000
35810
032
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the Master), IR 03200 will be turned ON, and the data will be
transmitted again.
#0001
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 03200 will be cleared
(message transmission completed).
35811
MOV(21)
033
296
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit address FE Hex
DM 0200: Command data storage words
Section 6-2
RS-232C Units
03300
10112
Reading Data Received at Port 2
MOV(21)
#0000
033
IOWR
#00FE
DM0250
#0009
25506
If SR 35810 (Port 2 RS-232C Receiving Flag) is OFF
and SR 35811 (Port 2 RS-232C Received Flag) is ON,
the sequential processing control bit IR 03300 will be
turned ON.
When IR 03300 turns ON, the Unit will check
that IR 10112 (unit no. 0 Master's Message
Communications Enabled Flag) is ON, and
message transmission starts.
00FE: Master's node address 00, Master's unit
address FE Hex
DM 0250: Command data storage words
MOV(21)
#0001
033
25506
MOV(21)
#0000
033
END(01)
0009 Hex: Master's unit number 00, 9 command
data words (BCD)
If the Equals Flag is OFF (error in writing to the
Master), IR 03300 will be turned ON, and the data
will be transmitted again.
If the Equals Flag is ON (writing to the Master has
been completed normally), IR 03300 will be
cleared (message transmission completed).
Note When transmitting explicit messages from an OMRON Master Unit, specify 2
bytes each for the Class ID and the Instance ID. Set 1 byte as the Attribute ID
for the RECEIVE DATA READ command.
Responses
The following responses will be stored if the data is read properly.
Port 1 Response
Words
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
DM 0300
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
DM 0301
00 00
DM 0302
xx xx
DM 0303
08 8E
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0203 onwards).
Slave node address is 08.
RECEIVE DATA READ response service
code is 8E Hex.
DM 0304 on
xx xx...
Data received from port 1 of the RS232C Unit and read is stored in order
from the leftmost byte to the rightmost
byte.
Port 2 Response
Words
Contents (Hex)
Meaning
DM 0350
28 01
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command
code is 28 01 Hex.
DM 0351
00 00
Response code is 0000 Hex (normal
completion).
DM 0352
xx xx
DM 0353
08 8E
Number of bytes received (data length
from word DM 0353 onwards).
Slave node address is 08.
RECEIVE DATA READ response service
code is 8E Hex.
DM 0354 on
xx xx...
Data received from port 2 of the RS-232C
Unit and read is stored in order from the
leftmost byte to the rightmost byte.
297
SECTION 7
Communications Timing
This section describes the time required for a complete communications cycle, for an output response to be made to an
input, to start the system, and to send a message.
7-1
7-2
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
7-1-1
I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
7-1-2
Communications Cycle Time and Refresh Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
7-1-3
More than One Master in Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
7-1-4
System Startup Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
Message Communications Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
299
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
This section describes the characteristics of DeviceNet communications when
OMRON Master and Slave Units are being used. Use this section for reference when planning operations that require precise I/O timing.
The equations provided here are valid under the following conditions:
1,2,3...
1. The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled.
2. All of the required Slaves are participating in communications.
3. No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit.
4. Messages are not being produced in the Network (from another company’s
configurator, for example).
Note The values provided by these equations may not be accurate if another company’s Master or Slave is being used in the Network.
7-1-1
I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from the reception of an input signal
at an Input Slave to the output of the corresponding output signal at an Output
Slave.
CV-series PLCs
(Asynchronous Mode)
The following timing charts show the minimum and maximum I/O response
times of the DeviceNet Network for a CV-series PLC operating in asynchronous mode.
Minimum I/O Response Time
The minimum I/O response time occurs when the DeviceNet Master Unit
refreshing is executed just after the input signal is received by the Master and
instruction execution is completed within one peripheral servicing cycle.
Instruction execution
cycle time
PLC cycle
(instruction execution cycle)
Instruction
execution
PLC cycle
(peripheral servicing cycle)
Peripheral
servicing cycle
time
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
TPLC2
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay (Minimum value: 0.)
TIN:
TOUT: The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay (Minimum value: 0.)
TRT-IN: Input Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
300
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
TRT-OUT: Output Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
TPLC2:The PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time
The minimum I/O response time (TMIN) is the total of the following terms:
TMIN = TIN + TRT-IN + TPLC2 + TRT-OUT + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time.
Maximum I/O Response Time
The maximum I/O response time occurs with the I/O timing shown in the following diagram.
Instruction execution
cycle time
PLC cycle
(instruction execution cycle)
Instruction
execution
Instruction execution
PLC cycle
(peripheral servicing cycle)
Peripheral
servicing
cycle time
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
TPLC2
TIN:
TOUT:
TRM:
TPLC1:
TPLC2:
TPLC1
TPLC2
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
Master Unit’s communications cycle time (See page 305.)
The PLC’s instruction execution cycle time
The PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time
The maximum I/O response time (TMAX) is the total of the following terms:
TMAX = TIN + 2 × TRM + TPLC1 + 2 × TPLC2 + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time. (Look under Asynchronous Operation.)
301
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
CV-series PLCs
(Synchronous Mode)
The following timing charts show the minimum and maximum I/O response
times of the DeviceNet Network for a CV-series PLC operating in synchronous mode.
Minimum I/O Response Time
The minimum I/O response time occurs with the I/O timing shown in the following diagram.
Cycle time
Program
execution
PLC
Program
execution
Program
execution
Peripheral
servicing
Peripheral
servicing
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
TRT - IN +TPLC0
TPLC0
TIN:
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
TOUT: The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
TRT-IN: Input Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
TRT-OUT: Output Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
TPLC0: The PLC’s cycle time (program execution + peripheral servicing)
The minimum I/O response time (TMIN) is the total of the following terms:
TMIN = TIN + TRT-IN + 2 × TPLC0 + TRT-OUT + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time. (See under Synchronous Operation.)
302
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
Maximum I/O Response Time
The maximum I/O response time occurs with the I/O timing shown in the following diagram.
Cycle time
Program
execution
PLC
Program
execution
Peripheral
servicing
Program
execution
Program
execution
Peripheral
servicing
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
TRM +TPLC0
TIN:
TOUT:
TRM:
TPLC0:
TPLC0
TPLC0
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
Master Unit’s communications cycle time (See page 305.)
The PLC’s cycle time (program execution + peripheral servicing)
The maximum I/O response time (TMAX) is the total of the following terms:
TMAX = TIN + 2 × TRM + 3 × TPLC0 + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time. (See under Synchronous Operation.)
CS1H/G, C200HS, and
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) PLCs
The following timing charts show the minimum and maximum I/O response
times of the DeviceNet Network with a CS1H/G, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), or
C200HS PLC.
303
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
Minimum I/O Response Time
The minimum I/O response time occurs when the Slave’s I/O refreshing is
executed just after the input signal is received by the Master Unit and the output signal is output at the beginning of the next I/O refresh cycle.
TPLC
PLC
Program execution
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
(T PLC -TRF)
TIN:
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay (0 used as the minimum value)
TOUT: The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay (0 used as the minimum value)
TRT-IN: Input Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
TRT-OUT: Output Slave’s communications time/Slave (See page 306.)
TPLC: The PLC’s cycle time
TRF:
The PLC’s DeviceNet Unit refresh time (See page 307.)
The minimum I/O response time (TMIN) is the total of the following terms:
TMIN = TIN + TRT-IN + (TPLC – TRF) + TRT-OUT + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time.
304
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
Maximum I/O Response Time
The maximum I/O response time occurs with the I/O timing shown in the following diagram.
PLC
Program execution
Program execution
Program execution
Master Unit processing
Input
Output
TPLC
TIN:
TOUT:
TRM:
TPLC:
TRF:
TPLC
The Input Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
The Output Slave’s ON (OFF) delay
The communications cycle time for the total Network (See page 305.)
The PLC’s cycle time
The PLC’s DeviceNet Unit refresh time (See page 307.)
The maximum I/O response time (TMAX) is the total of the following terms:
TMAX = TIN + 2 × TRM + 2 × TPLC + TRF + TOUT
Note
1. Refer to SECTION 4 General-purpose Slaves, SECTION 5 Environmentresistive and Waterproof Slaves, and SECTION 6 Special I/O Slave Units
Specifications for details on Input and Output Slaves’ delay times.
2. Refer to Refresh Time on page 307 and the PLC’s Operation Manual for
details on the PLC’s peripheral servicing cycle time.
7-1-2
Communications Cycle Time and Refresh Time
The communications cycle time, communications time for each Slave, and
refresh time are explained in this section. All of these are necessary for calculating the time required for various processes in a DeviceNet Network.
Communications Cycle
Time
The communications cycle time is the time from the completion of a Slave’s
remote I/O communications processing until remote I/O communications with
the same Slave are processed again. The communications cycle time is used
to calculate the maximum I/O response time.
The communications cycle time depends on the number of Masters on the
Network and on whether or not message communications are being performed. The following equations are valid when there is only one Master Unit.
For details on cycle time equations for multiple Master Units, refer to
page 307.
One Master in Network
The following equations show the communications cycle time (TRM) when
there is only one Master in the Network. Even if the equation result is less
than 2 ms, the minimum communications cycle time (TRM) is 2 ms.
305
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
TRM = Σ (Communications time for each Slave)
+ MULTIPLE I/O TERMINAL processing time
+ Explicit messages processing time
+ 0.01 × N + 1.0 [ms]
Communications time for each Slave: Time required for each Slave
Σ (Communications time for each Slave) is the total of the processing time
of each Slave in the network.
MULTIPLE I/O TERMINAL processing time:
3.5 [ms]
Only when Slaves with input, output, or mixed I/O of more than 8
bytes exist.
Explicit messages processing time:
0.11 × TB + 0.6 [ms]
Explicit message communications execution time
TB: Baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
N:
Communications Time for
each Slave
Number of Slaves
The following equations show the communications time per Slave (TRT) for
each kind of Slave Unit.
Output Slaves with 8 Bytes of Output Max.
TRT = 0.016 ×TB × SOUT1 + 0.11 × TB + 0.07 [ms]
SOUT1: The number of Output Slave output words
The baud rate
TB:
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Input Slaves with 8 Bytes of Input Max.
TRT = 0.016 ×TB × SIN1 + 0.06 × TB + 0.05 [ms]
SIN1:
TB:
The number of Input Slave input words
The baud rate
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Mixed I/O Slaves with 8 Bytes of I/O Max.
TRT = 0.016 × TB × (SOUT2 + SIN2) + 0.11 × TB + 0.07 [ms]
SOUT2: The number of Mixed I/O Slave output words
The number of Mixed I/O Slave input words
SIN2:
The baud rate
TB:
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Input Slaves, Output Slaves, or Mixed I/O Slaves with Over 8 Bytes of I/O
TRT = TOH + TBYTE-IN × BIN + TBYTE-OUT × BOUT [ms]
TOH:
TBYTE-IN:
BIN:
TBYTE-OUT:
BOUT:
Baud rate
500 kbps
306
The protocol overhead
The input byte transmission time
The number of input bytes
The output byte transmission time
The number of output bytes
TOH
0.306 ms
TBYTE-IN
0.040 ms
TBYTE-OUT
0.036 ms
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
Baud rate
250 kbps
125 kbps
TOH
0.542 ms
1.014 ms
TBYTE-IN
0.073 ms
0.139 ms
TBYTE-OUT
0.069 ms
0.135 ms
The number of output bytes (BOUT) for Input Slaves is 0, and the number of
input bytes (BIN) for Output Slaves is 0.
Refresh Time
The refresh time is the time required for I/O data to be exchanged between
the PLC’s CPU Unit and the DeviceNet Master Unit. The PLC’s cycle time is
increased when a Master Unit is mounted, as shown below.
Note Refer to the PLC’s Operation Manual for more details on the refresh time and
the PLC’s cycle time.
Master Unit for CV-series PLCs (CVM1-DRM21)
The PLC’s cycle time is increased by 1.1 ms. This is the extra time required
for CPU Bus Unit servicing (DeviceNet Master Unit refreshing).
Master Unit for CS1H/G, C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), and C200HS PLCs
(C200HW-DRM21)
The PLC’s cycle time is increased by the amount shown below. The extra time
is required for I/O refreshing.
PLC
DeviceNet Unit I/O refreshing time (ms)
CS1H/G and C200HX/
HG/HE (-ZE)
1.72 + 0.022 × the number of words refreshed
C200HS
2.27 + 0.077 × the number of words refreshed
The number of words refreshed is the total number of words in the I/O Area
that are used by the Slaves, including any unused words between words actually used by the Slaves. For example, if there are only two Input Slaves with
node addresses 1 and 5, the 5 input words for nodes 1 through 5 would be
refreshed even though the input words for nodes 2, 3, and 4 are unused.
If message communications are being performed, just add the number of
words used in message communications to the above number of words for
whenever messages are being processed.
C200H I/O Link Unit
The PLC’s cycle time is increased by the amount shown below when a C200H
I/O Link Unit is mounted to the PLC. The extra time is required for I/O refreshing.
Additional processing time (ms)
1.72 + 0.022 × the number of words refreshed
The number of words refreshed is the total number of words allocated to the
Read/Write Area.
If message communications are being performed, just add the number of
words used in message communications to the above number of words for
whenever messages are being processed.
7-1-3
More than One Master in Network
The following equation shows the remote I/O communications cycle time
(TRM) when there is more than one Master in the Network and message communications are not being performed. An example for two Master Units is
used.
307
Section 7-1
Remote I/O Communications Characteristics
First, the Network is divided into two groups: Master A and the Slaves in
remote I/O communications with it and Master B and the Slaves in remote I/O
communications with it.
Slave A
Group A
Group B
Master A
Master B
Slave C
Slave B
Slave D
Slaves in remote I/O communications with Master A
Slave E
Slave F
Slaves in remote I/O communications with Master B
Note Although in the above diagram the Slaves are separated into two groups for
convenience, the actual physical positions in the Network are irrelevant.
Next, we can refer to the previous equations and calculate the communications cycle time for each group as if they were separate Networks.
Group B
Group A
Master B
Master A
Slave A
Slave C
Slave B
Slave D
Group A communications
cycle time: TRM-A
Slave E
Slave F
Group A communications
cycle time: TRM-B
In Networks with two Masters, the communications cycle time for the entire
Network will be the sum of the communications cycle times for the groups.
TRM = TRM-A + TRM-B
Although this example shows only two Masters in the Network, the total communications cycle time for any Network can be calculated by dividing it into
groups and adding the communications cycle times of all groups.
7-1-4
System Startup Time
This section describes the system startup time for a Network operating with
the scan list enabled. The system startup time is the delay from the time that
the Master Unit is turned ON until remote I/O communications begin. Here,
we assume that the scan list is enabled and that remote I/O communications
are set to start automatically at startup.
System Startup Times
The following table shows the system startup times for two cases. In the first
case, the Master Unit starts up just after all of the Slaves’ power supplies are
turned ON. In the second case, the Master Unit is restarted while communications are in progress.
Case
The Master is started just
after Slave startup.
308
Slave’s indicator status
System startup time
The NS indicator is OFF or 6 seconds
flashing green.
Section 7-2
Message Communications Time
Case
The Master only is
restarted.
The Slaves only are
restarted.
Program Example
Slave’s indicator status
The NS indicator flashes
red while the Master is
OFF.
---
System startup time
8 seconds
10 seconds
As shown in the preceding table, it takes time for DeviceNet communications
to start up. This programming uses flags in the Master Status Area to prevent
the Slaves’ I/O processing from being performed until remote I/O communications start up.
Note Refer to the Master Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the Master Status
Area 1.
This programming is for a CV-series PLC and a Master Unit with a unit number of 00.
Remote I/O
Communications
Flag
Error/Communications
Stopped Flag
7-2
Slaves' I/O processing
Message Communications Time
The message communications time is the time required from the time a Master Unit starts to send a message over the Network to another node until the
Master Unit completes sending the message (data for SEND(192)/
RECV(193) and FINS commands for CMND(194)/IOWR).
If the CPU Unit attempts to send another message or receives a message
from another node within the message communications time, the second
message or the message being received from another node may be
destroyed. Never execute a second communications instruction before the
message communications time has elapsed and never send messages to any
one node at intervals less than the message communications time.
Note
1. If send or receive messages are destroyed, error records will be placed in
the error history of the Master Unit. If an error occurs, read the error history
using the FINS command or monitor the error history from the Configurator.
2. The following equations can be used to find the approximate message
communications time, but this is a typical time, not the maximum time. The
message communications time will vary depending on the frequency of
message communications, the load on the remote node, the communications cycle time, and other factors. For any one Master Unit, the message
communications time can be greatly increased due to heavy loads and the
user program must be written to allow for this.
The following equation can be used to compute the approximate message
communications time.
309
Section 7-2
Message Communications Time
Message communications time =
Communications cycle time × ((No. of message bytes + 15) ÷ 6 + 1)
No. of message bytes: No. of data bytes following the FINS command
code
The communications cycle time depends on whether or not remote I/O communications are being used.
No Remote I/O Communications
The following equation can be used to compute the message communications
time when remote I/O communications are not being used.
Message communications time =
2 ms (see note) + 0.11 × TB + 0.6 [ms]
TB:
The baud rate
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Note The minimum remote I/O communications cycle time is 2 ms even if remote I/
O communications are not being used.
Remote I/O and Message Communications
Performing message communications in addition to remote I/O communications will increase the message communications time.
Message communications time=
Communications cycle time for remote I/O communications only
+ 0.11 × TB + 0.6 [ms]
TB:
310
The baud rate
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep
the DeviceNet Network operating properly. We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before
operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly.
8-1
8-2
8-3
Indicators and Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
8-1-1
Errors Occurring in the Slave Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
8-1-2
C200H I/O Link Unit Seven-segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
8-2-1
Slave Unit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
8-2-2
Analog Input Unit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
8-2-3
Temperature Input Terminal Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
316
8-2-4
C200H I/O Link Unit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
316
8-2-5
RS-232C Unit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
8-3-1
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
8-3-2
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
8-3-3
Replacing Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
311
Section 8-1
Indicators and Error Processing
8-1
8-1-1
Indicators and Error Processing
Errors Occurring in the Slave Unit
The following table lists probable causes and remedies for errors that occur in
the Slave Unit.
Display/Indicator
status
MS
ON
(green)
NS
ON
(green)
ON
(green)
ON
(green)
ON (red)
OFF
Flashing
(red)
Flashing
(green)
OFF
Network status
Probable cause and remedy
Remote I/O or message commu- Remote I/O communications and/or message communications
nications in progress (normal
are active on the Network.
status)
Checking for node address dupli- Checking whether the Unit’s node address has been set on
cation
another node.
Waiting for connection
The Unit is waiting for a connection from the Master Unit.
Watchdog timer error
A watchdog timer error occurred in the Unit. Replace the Unit.
OFF
Incorrect switch settings
A mistake has been made in the switch settings. Check the settings and restart the Slave.
ON
(green)
ON
(red)
Node address duplication
The Slave Unit’s node address has been set on another node.
Change the settings to eliminate the duplication and restart the
Slave.
ON
(green)
ON
(red)
Bus Off error detected
The communications controller detected a Bus Off status and
communications have been stopped.
Check the following and restart the Slave: Master/Slave baud
rates, for loose or broken cables, for noise, cable lengths, and
Terminating Resistors.
ON
(green)
Flashing
(red)
Communications timeout
The connection with the Master Unit timed out.
Check the following and restart the Slave: Master/Slave baud
rates, for loose or broken cables, for noise, cable lengths, and
Terminating Resistors.
8-1-2
C200H I/O Link Unit Seven-segment Display
C200H I/O Link Units have a 2-digit, 7-segment display that normally indicates the C200H I/O Link Unit’s node address (decimal value from 00 to 63).
When an error occurs, the display will alternate between the error code and
the node address of the faulty C200H I/O Link Unit. If more than one error
occurs at the same time, the error codes will be displayed in sequence, followed at the end by the faulty Unit’s node address.
Normal: C200H I/O Link Unit node address
Error: Error code and faulty C200H I/O Link Unit's node address
Read/Write Area default/user settings
Dot Indicators
The dots at the lower-right of each digit are operated by bit 13 (Read/Write
Area default setting) of the Status Area (first word of the IR Area + 5 words),
and show whether user settings or default settings are being used for the
Read/Write Area. The dots are lit when the default settings are used and not
lit when the user settings are used.
312
Section 8-2
Troubleshooting
Seven-segment Display
The 7-segment digits show the C200H I/O Link Unit’s node address during
normal operation, but alternate between the error code and the Unit’s node
address when an error occurs. The following table outlines the operation of
the display.
Status
Error
Display
Watchdog timer
Memory or system
error
Other errors
Not lit
Error code only
Lit
Error code and error node address
alternate (see diagram below)
The following diagram illustrates the alternating display of the error code and
error node address.
Error code
(1 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
Error code
(1 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
Node address
(1 s)
OFF (0.3 s)
If more then one error occurs at the same time, each error code will be displayed in sequence, followed at the end by the error node address.
8-2
8-2-1
Troubleshooting
Slave Unit Troubleshooting
Red Indicator
(ON or Flashing)
Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in a Slave that has a red indicator that is ON or flashing.
Error
The MS indicator is a constant red.
Probable cause
The Slave Unit is faulty. Replace the Unit.
The MS indicator is flashing red.
• Check that the Slave’s baud rate setting is correct. The setting must
be 125 kbps, 250 kbps, or 500 kbps. Restart the Unit after changing
the baud rate.
• Replace the Unit if the MS indicator continues to flash red even
though the baud rate setting is correct.
313
Section 8-2
Troubleshooting
Error
After the MS indicator turns green, the NS indicator does not flash green - it turns red immediately.
Probable cause
Restart the faulty Slave Unit after checking the following points.
• Make sure that the Master and Slaves baud rate settings all match. If
they do not match, set all of the baud rates to the same value.
• Check for a node address duplication. If necessary change the node
address settings so that each node has a unique number.
• See the troubleshooting steps below under the error heading:
“The NS indicator lights green but turns red after a short time.”
• Check whether all of the Slaves’ settings are correct.
• If a particular Slave’s NS indicator is always red, replace that Slave.
The NS indicator lights green but turns red after • Restart the faulty Slave Unit after checking the following points.
a short time
• Make sure that there are 121-Ω Terminating Resistors connected at
or
both ends of the trunk line. Connect 121-Ω Terminating Resistors if
The NS indicator lights green but starts flashing
the wrong resistance is being used.
red after a short time.
• Check whether all of the Slaves’ settings are correct.
• Check whether the communications cables are connected properly.
• Check whether the power supply is set correctly.
• Check all the nodes for broken wires in the communications and
power supply cables attached to the connectors.
• Check whether power is correctly supplied to the network.
• If there is nearby equipment that generates electrical noise, take
steps to shield the Master, Slaves, and communications cables from
the noise.
• If an error has occurred with an OMRON Master Unit, refer to the
Master Unit’s Operation Manual. If an error has occurred in a Master
Unit supplied by another maker, refer to the relevant operation manual.
• If a particular Slave’s NS indicator is always red, replace that Slave.
Trouble Adding a Slave to
the Network
Error
The NS indicator remains OFF.
314
Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in adding a Slave to the network.
Probable cause
• Check if the baud rate of the Master Unit coincides with that of the Slave
Unit. If the baud rates are different, correct the baud rate of the Slave
Unit.
• Check that the Slave’s connector is connected correctly.
• Check whether the communications power supply is supplying 24 V DC.
• Make sure that the Master is operating properly.
When using an OMRON Master, refer to the Master Unit’s Operation
Manual. When using another company’s Master Unit, refer to that Master’s user’s manual.
• Check whether the communications cables are connected properly.
• Check whether the power supply is set correctly.
• Check for broken wires in the communications and power supply cables
attached to the connectors.
Section 8-2
Troubleshooting
Error
The NS indicator continues to flash green.
Probable cause
• Make sure that the Master is operating properly.
When using an OMRON Master, refer to the Master Unit’s Operation
Manual. When using another company’s Master Unit, refer to that Master’s operation manual.
• Check whether the Slave is registered in the Master’s scan list.
If an OMRON Master Unit is being used, a new Slave cannot be added to
the network if the Master is operating with the scan list enabled. First perform the clear scan list operation, check that the Slave has joined the network, and then perform the create scan list operation.
If another company’s Master Unit is being used, refer to that Master’s
operation manual for details on adding a new Slave to its scan list.
The NS indicator alternates between being
green and flashing green, or alternates
between flashing red and flashing green.
• When using an OMRON Master, check the following items and perform
the necessary error processing steps.
→
→
Register the scan list again.
(After performing the clear scan list operation, check that the Slave
has joined the network and perform the create scan list operation.)
Make sure that the Slave’s allocated I/O area does not overlap with
that of another Slave. If there is an overlap, change the Slave’s node
address to eliminate it.
→
Make sure that the allocated I/O area does not exceed the allowed
range shown below:
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Output: IR 050 to IR 099
Input:
IR 350 to IR 399
If the I/O area exceeds this range, change the Slave’s node address
to correct the problem.
• When using another company’s Master Unit, check that the I/O size registered in the Master’s scan list matches the actual I/O size of the Slave.
The I/O size is recorded in the following attributes of the connection
object:
Interface 2 (Polled I/O Connection)
Produced Connection size (Input size)
Consumed Connection size (Output size)
and:
Interface 3 (Bit strobed I/O Connection)
Produced Connection size (Input size)
See Appendix B Slave Device Protocol for details and register the correct
value in the Master’s scan list. Refer to the Master’s manual for details on
registering the values.
8-2-2
Analog Input Unit Troubleshooting
DRT1-AD04
Error
The AD converted data is FFFF.
Probable cause
The Analog Input Terminal’s open-circuit detection function is activated
when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0.8 V or
the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA.
The converted data is set to FFFF when the open-circuit detection function
is activated.
Check the Analog input’s cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring.
When the input signal rises above 0.8 V or 3.2 mA, the converted data will
automatically return to its normal range.
315
Section 8-2
Troubleshooting
DRT1-AD04H
Error
Probable cause
The AD converted data is 7FFF when the
disconnection indicator is lit.
8-2-3
The Analog Input Terminal’s open-circuit detection function is activated
when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0.8 V or
the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA.
The converted data is set to FFFF when the open-circuit detection function
is activated. The disconnection indicator will be lit at the same time.
Check the Analog input’s cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring.
When the input signal rises above 0.8 V or 3.2 mA, the converted data will
automatically return to its normal range. The disconnection indicator will go
out at the same time.
Temperature Input Terminal Troubleshooting
Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in the Temperature Input Terminal.
Error
Probable cause
The temperature data is 7FFF when the dis- Check the temperature sensor cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring.
connection indicator is lit.
Check that input cables are wired properly.
Check that the cold junction compensator is connected properly
(applicable to the DRT1-TS04T only).
8-2-4
C200H I/O Link Unit Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in the C200H I/O Link Unit and the error code is displayed by the 7-segment display, use the following table to troubleshoot the
problem. If the error code is not shown on the 7-segment display, use the
table under the heading Identifying Errors from Symptoms to troubleshoot the
problem.
Identifying Errors from Seven-segment Display
Display
C0
C3
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Attempt was made to set the Link Area when the 1.Turn OFF bit 00 of the software switches.
PLC is not in PROGRAM mode.
2.Switch the PLC’s operating mode to PROGRAM mode.
3.Turn ON bit 00 of the software switches again.
Invalid setting values in Link Area.
1.Turn OFF bit 00 of the software switches.
2.Check the area settings, address settings, and size
settings, and correct if necessary.
3.Turn ON bit 00 of the software switches again.
D9
Timeout error in communications with Master
Unit.
• The Master Unit is not operating.
• The cables are not connected properly.
• A source of noise is close to the Master Unit.
1.Check the status of the Master Unit.
2.Check that the DeviceNet communications cables are
connected properly and that noise preventative measures have been taken.
3.If the error is not cleared after taking the above steps,
restart the Unit.
E0
The Network’s communications power is not
being supplied normally.
Check the Network’s power supply and wiring, and restart
the Unit.
E4
The Unit’s Read/Write Area is set to default set- 1.Check that the area address settings for the SYSMAC
tings with other Communications Units conBUS Masters, DeviceNet Masters, and DeviceNet
nected.
Slaves are not overlapping.
2.Set the Read/Write Area settings using bit 00 of the software switches. (If the settings are overlapping intentionally, the Unit will operate according to the Read/Write
Area settings after setting this bit.)
3.Restart the Unit.
E6
The CPU Unit is mounted to a C200H or
C200HS PLC.
316
Remount the CPU Unit to a C200HE, C200HG, or
C200HX PLC, and restart the PLC.
Section 8-2
Troubleshooting
Display
E8
Probable cause
Internal non-volatile memory data error
Possible remedy
1.Set the Read/Write Area settings using bit 00 of the software switches.
2.Restart the Unit.
3.If the error is not cleared, replace the Unit.
F0
Duplicate node address error
F1
Bus Off error
Reset the node address to a number that is not used by
another Unit, and restart the Unit.
1.Check that the DeviceNet communications cables are
wired connected, and that noise preventative measures
have been taken.
2.Restart the Unit.
Master Unit baud rate setting error
Make sure that the baud rate settings match and restart
the Unit.
F3
Front/rear-panel DIP switch setting error
• Pin 4 of front-panel DIP switch is ON.
• Pins 1 and 2 of front-panel DIP switch are
ON.
• Pin 7 or 8 on rear-panel DIP switch is ON.
• Make sure pin 4 on the front panel, and pins 7 and 8 on
the rear panel are turned OFF.
• Turn ON or OFF pins 1 and 2 according to the correct
baud rate setting.
F6
CPU Unit interface error from noise
Remove cause of noise and restart the Unit.
If the error is not cleared, replace the C200H I/O Link Unit
or the CPU Unit.
F9
Hardware error
1.Restart the Unit
2.If the error is not cleared, replace the Unit.
Identifying Errors from Symptoms
Symptom
The power is ON, but the Slave Unit’s
indicators are all OFF.
Probable Cause
CPU Unit error caused by noise interference.
Possible remedy
Restart the Unit.
The Read/Write Area’s settings have
been set, but data is not being
refreshed according to the settings.
The settings have not been validated.
1.Turn ON bit 00 of the software
switches.
2.Reset the Unit.
Restart the PLC or turn ON and OFF
the Unit’s Restart Bit. With C200HX/
HG/HE PLCs, these bits are in AR 01.
With CS-series PLCs, these bits are in
words A502 to A507.
Check the area settings of other Communications Units, and correct settings
so that data is not written to an area
already being used by another Unit.
The Unit has not been reset.
After setting the areas and operating
The area settings are overlapping with
the Unit, the data in the output area fre- those of other Communications Units.
quently appears as unexpected values.
When reading the Slave’s DM Area
from the Master, unstable values are
returned and the data is unreadable.
Attempt was made to access of words
from DM 4096 onwards in the
C200HE-CPU11 CPU Unit.
Access the correct words only.
The Explicit Connection Established
Flag is ON in the C200H I/O Link Unit’s
status words, but Unit is not receiving
an explicit message from the Master.
The Network cables are disconnected,
or the Master Unit’s power supply is
OFF. (OMRON Master Units do not
have timeouts when explicit message
communications are used, so the
Explicit Connection Established Flag
will not turn OFF even if communications are stopped).
Restart the Master Unit, or connect the
cables correctly. (Timeouts cannot be
set for OMRON Master Units using
explicit message communications.)
317
Section 8-3
Maintenance
8-2-5
RS-232C Unit Troubleshooting
Symptom
Probable cause
The RS-232C Unit’s ERR indicator is lit. The RS-232C Unit is damaged.
Possible remedy
Replace the RS-232C Unit.
RS-232C port communications error
(the Unit’s RD and SD indicators are
not lit).
The wiring is incorrect, or the cables
are not connected properly.
The RS-232C port’s parameters do not
match those of the RS-232C Unit.
Check the wiring with the RS-232C
Unit and correct it if necessary.
Reset the RS-232C port’s parameters
to match the parameters of the RS232C Unit.
Parameter Error Flag (bit 01 or 09) in
communications status word is ON.
The parameters are set incorrectly.
Parity Error Flag (bit 04 or 12) in communications status word is ON.
The parity setting does not match the
setting in the RS-232C Unit.
Overrun Error Flag (bit 05 or 13) in
communications status word is ON.
The baud rate does not match the setting in the RS-232C Unit.
Framing Error Flag (bit 06 or 14) in
communications status word is ON.
The character block settings (data
length, parity, and stop bits) do not
match those in the RS-232C Unit.
Reset the parameters correctly using
the PARAMETER SET command, then
execute the RS-232C PORT RESET
command or restart the RS-232C Unit.
Reset the RS-232C port’s parity setting
to match the parity of the RS-232C
Unit.
Reset the RS-232C port’s baud rate to
match the baud rate of the RS-232C
Unit.
Reset the RS-232C port’s character
block (data length, parity, and stop bits)
to match the character block of the RS232C Unit.
Receive Buffer Error Flag (bit 07 or 15) The receive buffer has overflowed.
in communications status word is ON.
8-3
The receive buffer for each of the RS232C Unit’s ports is 1,024 bytes.
Increase the reading frequency so that
the receive buffer does not overflow.
If the receive buffer has overflown, execute the RS-232C PORT RESET command or restart the RS-232C Unit.
Maintenance
This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as
regular maintenance.
8-3-1
Cleaning
Clean the DeviceNet Units regularly as described below in order to keep it in
its optimal operating condition.
• Wipe the Unit with a dry, soft cloth for regular cleaning.
• When a spot cannot be removed with a dry cloth, dampen the cloth with a
neutral cleanser, wring out the cloth, and wipe the Unit.
• A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum, vinyl, or tape that was left
on for a long time. Remove the smudge when cleaning.
!Caution Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner or benzene or chemical
wipes. These substances could damage the surface of the Unit.
8-3-2
Inspection
Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in its optimal operating
condition. In general, inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months, but
inspect more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humidity or under dirty/dusty conditions.
318
Section 8-3
Maintenance
Inspection Equipment
Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system.
Required Equipment
Have a standard and phillips-head screwdriver, multimeter, alcohol, and a
clean cloth.
Equipment that May be Required
Depending on the system conditions, a synchroscope, oscilloscope, thermometer, or hygrometer (to measure humidity) might be needed.
Inspection Procedure
Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below
standard.
Item
Standard
Equipment
Environmental
conditions
Ambient and cabinet temperature
Ambient and cabinet humidity
See below.
See below.
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Installation
Dust/dirt accumulation
Are the Units installed securely?
None
--No looseness ---
Are the communications connectors fully inserted?
No looseness ---
Are the external wiring screws
No looseness --tight?
Are the connecting cables undam- No damage
--aged?
8-3-3
Replacing Nodes
The DeviceNet Master Unit and Slave Units make up the network. The entire
network is affected when a Unit is faulty, so a faulty Unit must be repaired or
replaced quickly. We recommend having spare Units available to restore network operation as quickly as possible.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions when replacing a faulty Unit.
• After replacement make sure that there are no errors with the new Unit.
• When a Unit is being returned for repair, attach a sheet of paper detailing
the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer.
• If there is a faulty contact, try wiping the contact with a clean, lint-free
cloth dampened with alcohol.
Settings after Replacing
Nodes
After replacing a Unit, set the new Unit’s switches to the same settings that
were on the old Unit.
319
Appendix A
Node Address Settings Table
This appendix shows all of the node address settings for Slaves that have node addresses set in binary with
pins 1 through 6 of the Slave’s DIP switch. There are some differences in the location and orientation of the DIP
switches, but the node address is always set in binary.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
DIP switch setting
Node
address
DIP switch setting
Node
address
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6
0
0
0
0
0
1
32
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
33
34
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
35
36
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
37
38
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
7
8
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
39
40
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
9
10
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
41
42
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
11
12
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
43
44
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
13
14
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
45
46
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
15
16
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
47
48
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
17
18
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
49
50
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
19
20
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
51
52
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
21
22
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
53
54
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
23
24
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
55
56
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
25
26
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
57
58
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
27
28
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
59
60
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
29
30
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
61
62
1
1
1
1
1
0
31
1
1
1
1
1
1
63
321
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
This appendix explains how to operate an OMRON Slave when the Slave is connected to a Master manufactured by another company.
Use Poll Connection with Output Slaves
If the Slave has outputs, do not communicate with the Master through a bit strobe connection.
There are several DeviceNet I/O communications methods, including poll and bit strobe connections, but
DeviceNet specifications allow the bit strobe connection with inputs only. OMRON Master Units conform to
these specifications and communicate with Output Slaves through a poll connection, but some other company’s Masters allow bit strobe connections with Output Slaves. Before connecting an OMRON Slave to
another company’s Master, verify the Master’s connection specifications.
About EDS Files
When connecting an OMRON Slave to another company’s Master, it may be necessary to install the OMRON
Slave’s EDS file in the other company’s configurator to set the Slave’s information in the Master. With some
companies’ Masters, the Slaves can be connected without making settings.
With some other companies’ configurators, installing the OMRON Slave’s EDS file in the configurator will allow
you to make various parameter settings from the configurator.
If you can’t obtain a copy of the EDS file or the other company’s configurator does not support EDS files, it will
be necessary to directly input settings such as the connection type and data size.
Installing an EDS File
EDS files are provided by the manufacturer for each Slave and contain settings such as the Slave’s ID and I/O
data sizes. If the EDS file is installed in the configurator, the Slave’s settings can be changed and the I/O size
will be input automatically when the Master’s scan list is created.
EDS files for the Slaves described in this manual can be downloaded from the product catalog at the following
website:
http://www.odva.astem.or.jp
Locate the EDS file for the desired Slave and install that EDS file in the configurator. Installation procedures
vary; refer to the configurator’s manuals for details on the installation procedure.
Inputting Settings Directly
If you can’t obtain a copy of the EDS file or the other company’s configurator does not support EDS files, it will
be necessary to directly input settings such as the connection type and data size. (Always select the connection type that is supported by the Slave.)
The following connection types are allowed in DeviceNet communications.
Connection type
poll
bit strobe
change of state
(COS)
cyclic
Operation
Remarks
Data is exchanged in individual command/
--response transmissions from the Master to each
Slave. The output data is transferred in commands
and the input data is received in responses.
The Master broadcasts a command and multiple The command is sent just once, so the cycle time
Slaves return input data in their responses.
is short, however this method supports a maximum of 8 bytes of input data from Slaves.
Data is transmitted when the data has changed in Data is transmitted only when there has been a
the Master or Slave.
change. Devices that do not need to communicate will not communicate, so the network usage
is more efficient.
The Master and Slaves transmit input/output data --cyclically (at fixed intervals).
323
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Table of Connection Type and Data Size Settings
The following table lists the I/O data sizes for each OMRON Slave as well as the supported connection types.
(A “Yes” indicates that the connection is supported; a “No” indicates that it is not.)
Slave group
Model
Yes
Connection type
bit
change cyclic
strobe of state
Yes
No
No
1
0
DRT1-ID08-1
DRT1-ID16
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
1
2
0
0
DRT1-ID16-1
DRT1-OD08
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
2
0
0
1
DRT1-OD08-1
DRT1-OD16
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
1
2
DRT1-OD16-1
DRT1-MD16
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
1
2
1
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals DRT1-ID16T
with 3-tier I/O Terminal Blocks
DRT1-ID16T-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
2
2
0
0
DRT1-ID16TA
DRT1-ID16TA-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
2
2
0
0
DRT1-OD16T
DRT1-OD16T-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
2
2
DRT1-OD16TA
DRT1-OD16TA-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
2
2
DRT1-MD16T
DRT1-MD16T-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
1
1
1
DRT1-MD16TA
DRT1-MD16TA-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
4
4
0
0
DRT1-OD32ML
DRT1-OD32ML-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
4
4
DRT1-MD32ML
DRT1-MD32ML-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
2
2
2
2
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-ID16X-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
2
2
0
0
DRT1-OD16X
DRT1-OD16X-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
2
2
Sensor Terminals
DRT1-HD16S
DRT1-ND16S
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
2
1
0
1
Temperature Input Terminals
DRT1-TS04T
DRT1-TS04P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
8
8
0
0
Analog Input Terminals
DRT1-AD04
DRT1-AD04H
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
8
8
0
0
Analog Output Terminals
CQM1 I/O Link Unit
DRT1-DA02
CQM1-DRT21
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
2
4
2
poll
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals DRT1-ID08
Transistor Remote I/O Terminals DRT1-ID32ML
with Connectors
DRT1-ID32ML-1
Remote Adapters
324
Data sizes
IN
OUT
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Slave group
Model
poll
Environment-resistive Transistor
Terminals
Connection type
bit
change
strobe of state
Data sizes
IN
OUT
cyclic
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-HD16C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
1
2
0
0
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-OD08C
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
2
0
0
1
DRT1-WD16C
DRT1-WD16C-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
2
2
DRT1-MD16C
DRT1-MD16C-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
1
1
1
DRT1-ID04CL
DRT1-ID04CL-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
1
1
0
0
DRT1-ID08CL
DRT1-ID08CL-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
1
1
0
0
DRT1-OD04CL
DRT1-OD04CL-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
1
1
DRT1-OD08CL
DRT1-OD08CL-1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
0
0
1
1
B7AC Interface Unit
C200H I/O Link Unit
DRT1-B7AC
C200HW-DRT21
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See
note 1.)
No
No
No
No
4
0 to 64
(See
note 2.)
0
0 to 64
(See
note 2.)
RS-232C Unit
DRT1-232C2
Yes
Yes
No
No
2
0
Waterproof Terminals
Note 1. The bit strobe connection is supported only when the output size is set to 0 bytes and the input size
is set to 8 bytes.
2. The data sizes can be changed.
3. The device profiles below contain more detailed DeviceNet specifications if more information needs
to be registered in the scan list.
Device Profiles for Regular and Environment-resistive Slaves
The following device profiles contains more detailed DeviceNet specifications for General-purpose and Environment-resistive Slaves if more information needs to be registered in the scan list.l
General data
Compatible DeviceNet Specifications
Volume I - Release 1.3
Volume II - Release 1.3 (See note)
Header name
Device protocol name
OMRON Corporation
Slaves: Generic
Manufacturer catalog number
Manufacturer revision
W347
1.0
Header ID = 47
Protocol number = 0
325
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Physical conform- Network current consumption
ance data
40 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Units:
CQM1-DRT21, DRT1-HD16S, DRT1-ND16S, and
DRT1-OD08CL
30 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Units:
DRT1-ID08(-1), DRT1-ID16(-1), DRT1-OD08(-1),
DRT1-OD16(-1), DRT1-ID16T(-1), DRT1-OD16T(-1),
DRT1-MD16T(-1), DRT1-WD16C(-1), DRT1-MD16C(-1),
DRT1-ID16X(-1), DRT1-OD16X(-1), DRT1-AD04,
DRT1-AD04H, DRT1-DA02, DRT1-ID08CL(-1),
DRT1-ID08C, DRT1-HD16C(-1), DRT1-TS04T, and
DRT1-TS04P
25 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Units:
DRT1-MD16 and DRT1-ID04CL(-1),
50 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Units:
DRT1-ID16TA(-1), DRT1-OD16TA(-1),
DRT1-MD16TA(-1), and DRT1-ID32ML(-1),
Communications
data
Connector type
90 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Unit:
DRT1-OD32ML(-1)
70 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Units:
DRT1-MD32ML(-1) and DRT1-B7AC
35 mA max. (24 V DC) for the following Unit:
DRT1-OD04CL(-1)
Open plug
Physical insulation
Supported indicators
Yes
Module, Network
MAC ID setting
Default MAC ID
DIP switch
0
Baud rate setting
Supported baud rates
DIP switch
125 kbps, 250 kbps, and 500 kbps
Predefined Master/Slave connection set
Dynamic connection support (UCMM)
Group 2 only server
No
Explicit message fragmentation support
Yes
Note For Analog Input Terminals, Analog Output Terminals, and Temperature Input Terminals, Volume I is 1.2
and Volume II is 1.1.
Object Mounting
Identity Object (0x01)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Item
Object instance
326
Not supported
Not supported
ID content
Attribute
Get (read)
Set (write)
Value
1 Vendor
2 Product type
Yes
Yes
No
No
47
0
3 Product code
4 Revision
Yes
Yes
No
No
See note 2.
1.3 (See note 1.)
5 Status (bits supported)
6 Serial number
Yes
Yes
No
No
Bit 0 only
Unique for each Unit
7 Product name
8 State
Yes
No
No
No
Same as the model name.
---
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance
Service
DeviceNet service
05Reset
No
Parameter option
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
Note 1. For Analog Input Terminals, Analog Output Terminals, and Temperature Input Terminals, Revision is
1.2.
2. The product code depends on the Slave. Refer to the following table.
Model
Product code
DRT1-ID08
DRT1-ID08-1
100
106
DRT1-ID16
DRT1-ID16-1
102
108
DRT1-OD08
DRT1-OD08-1
101
107
DRT1-OD16
DRT1-OD16-1
103
109
DRT1-MD16
DRT1-ID16T
168
122
DRT1-ID16T-1
DRT1-OD16T
125
124
DRT1-OD16T-1
DRT1-MD16T
127
123
DRT1-MD16T-1
DRT1-ID16TA
126
142
DRT1-ID16TA-1
DRT1-OD16TA
146
144
DRT1-OD16TA-1
148
DRT1-MD16TA
DRT1-MD16TA-1
143
144
DRT1-ID32ML
DRT1-ID32ML-1
128
131
DRT1-OD32ML
DRT1-OD32ML-1
129
132
DRT1-MD32ML
DRT1-MD32ML-1
130
133
DRT1-ID16X
DRT1-ID16X-1
104
110
DRT1-OD16X
DRT1-OD16X-1
105
111
DRT1-HD16S
DRT1-ND16S
2
9
DRT1-TS04T
DRT1-TS04P
302
303
DRT1-AD04
DRT1-AD04H
300
304
DRT1-DA02
CQM1-DRT21
301
50
DRT1-ID04CL
DRT1-ID04CL-1
134
138
DRT1-ID08CL
136
327
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Model
DRT1-ID08CL-1
Product code
140
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-HD16C
112
120
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-OD04CL
115
135
DRT1-OD04CL-1
DRT1-OD08CL
139
137
DRT1-OD08CL-1
DRT1-OD08C
141
113
DRT1-WD16C
DRT1-WD16C-1
121
116
DRT1-MD16C
DRT1-MD16C-1
114
117
DRT1-B7AC
430
Message Router Object (0x02)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Object instance
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Header specification addition
No
DeviceNet Object (0x03)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Not supported
Item
Object instance
Attribute
Item
Object instance
Service
ID content
1 MAC ID
Get (read) Set (write)
Yes
No
---
2 Baud rate
3 BOI
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
4 Bus Off counter
5 Allocation information
No
Yes
No
No
-----
6 MAC ID switch changed
7 Baud rate switch changed
No
No
No
No
-----
8 MAC ID switch value
9 Baud rate switch value
No
No
No
No
-----
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
4BAllocate_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
4CRelease_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
No
No
Value
Parameter option
Assembly Object (0x04)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Attribute
1 Number of members in list
2 Member list
No
No
No
No
-----
3 Data
9 Baud rate switch value
Yes
No
No
No
-----
Item
Object instance 1
(Instance type
Static I/O)
328
ID content
Get (read)
Set (write)
Value
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 1 Service
(Instance type
Static I/O)
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
Parameter option
No
Connection Object (0x05)
Object class
Item
Object instance 1
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Max. number of active connections
1
Section
Instance type
Information
Explicit Message
1
Production trigger
Transport type
Cyclic
Server
-----
Transport class
3
---
Item
Object instance 1
ID content
Attribute
Item
Object instance 2
Get
(read)
Set
(write)
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
3 Transport class trigger
4 Produced connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
83 (hexadecimal)
---
5 Consumed connection ID
6 Initial comm. characteristics
Yes
Yes
No
No
--21 (hexadecimal)
7 Produced connection size
8 Consumed connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
0D00 (hexadecimal)
0D00 (hexadecimal)
9 Expected packet rate
12 Watchdog time-out action
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
--01 (hexadecimal)
13 Produced connection path length
14 Produced connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
00 (hexadecimal)
---
15 Consumed connection path length
16 Consumed connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
00 (hexadecimal)
---
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
No
00 (hexadecimal)
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
1 State
2 Instance type
Item
Object instance 1
Max. number of instances
Parameter option
05Reset
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
No
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
Section
Instance type
Polled I/O
Information
1
Max. number of instances
Production trigger
Transport type
Cyclic
Server
-----
Transport class
2
---
329
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 2
Item
Object instance 2
ID content
Attribute
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
82 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
See note.
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
See note.
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
See note.
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
See note.
See note.
16 Consumed connection path
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
Yes
No
No
See note.
00 (hexadecimal)
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
Parameter option
05Reset
No
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
No
Note These values depend on the type of Slave being used. Refer to the following table.
Model
Produced Consumed Produced
connection connection connection
size
size
path length
Produced connection
path
Consumed
connection
path length
Consumed connection
path
DRT1-ID08
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID08-1
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID16
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID16-1
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD08
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08-1
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16-1
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-ID16T
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID16T-1
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD16T
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16T-1
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16T
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16T-1
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-ID16TA
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID16TA-1
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD16TA
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16TA-1
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16TA
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16TA-1
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-ID32ML
04H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID32ML-1
04H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD32ML
00H
04H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD32ML-1
00H
04H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD32ML
02H
02H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD32ML-1
02H
02H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
330
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Model
Produced Consumed Produced
connection connection connection
size
size
path length
Produced connection
path
Consumed
connection
path length
Consumed connection
path
DRT1-ID16X
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID16X-1
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD16X
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16X-1
00H
02H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-HD16S
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ND16S
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-TS04T
08H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-TS04P
08H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-AD04
04H or 08H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-AD04H
08H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-DA02
00H
04H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
CQM1-DRT21
02H
02H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-ID04CL
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID04CL-1
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID08CL
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID08CL-1
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID08C
01H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-HD16C
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-HD16C-1
02H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-OD04CL
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD04CL-1
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08CL
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08CL-1
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08C
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-WD16C
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-WD16C-1
00H
01H
0
---
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16C
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16C-1
01H
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-B7AC
04H
00H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
Item
Object instance 3
Section
Information
Max. number of instances
Instance type
Production trigger
Bit strobed I/O
Cyclic
1
---
Transport type
Transport class
Server
2
-----
331
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 3
Item
Object instance 3
ID content
Attribute
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
82 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
See note.
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0800H
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
01
See note.
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
See note.
See note.
16 Consumed connection path
Yes
No
See note.
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
Parameter option
05Reset
No
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
No
Note These values depend on the type of Slave being used. Refer to the following table.
Model
Produced
Produced
connection connection
size
path length
Produced connection
path
Consumed
connection
path length
Consumed connection
path
DRT1-ID08
01H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
---
DRT1-ID08-1
DRT1-ID16
01H
02H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID16-1
DRT1-OD08
02H
00H
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08-1
DRT1-OD16
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16-1
DRT1-MD16
00H
01H
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
DRT1-ID16T
DRT1-ID16T-1
02H
02H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-OD16T
DRT1-OD16T-1
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16T
DRT1-MD16T-1
01H
01H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID16TA
DRT1-ID16TA-1
02H
02H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-OD16TA
DRT1-OD16TA-1
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-MD16TA
DRT1-MD16TA-1
01H
01H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID32ML
DRT1-ID32ML-1
04H
04H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-OD32ML
DRT1-OD32ML-1
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
332
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Model
DRT1-MD32ML
Produced
Produced
Produced connection
connection connection
path
size
path length
02H
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
Consumed Consumed connection
connection
path
path length
0
---
DRT1-MD32ML-1
DRT1-ID16X
02H
02H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID16X-1
DRT1-OD16X
02H
00H
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD16X-1
DRT1-HD16S
00H
02H
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
DRT1-ND16S
DRT1-TS04T
01H
08H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-TS04P
DRT1-AD04
08H
04H or 08H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-AD04H
DRT1-DA02
08H
00H
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
CQM1-DRT21
DRT1-ID04CL
02H
01H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID04CL-1
DRT1-ID08CL
01H
01H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-ID08CL-1
DRT1-ID08C
01H
01H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-HD16C
DRT1-HD16C-1
02H
02H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-OD04CL
DRT1-OD04CL-1
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08CL
DRT1-OD08CL-1
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
DRT1-OD08C
DRT1-WD16C
00H
00H
0
0
-----
6
0
20_04_24_01_30_03
---
DRT1-WD16C-1
DRT1-MD16C
00H
01H
0
6
--20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
DRT1-MD16C-1
DRT1-B7AC
01H
04H
6
6
20_04_24_01_30_03
20_04_24_01_30_03
0
0
-----
Device Profile for the C200H I/O Link Unit
General data
Compatible DeviceNet Specifications
Volume I - Release 1.3
Volume II - Release 1.3
Header name
Device type name
OMRON Corporation
Slaves:
Communication adapter
Manufacturer catalog number
Manufacturer revision
W347
1.0
Header ID = 47
Device type number = 12
333
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Physical conform- Network current consumption
ance data
Connector type
Communications
data
24 V DC at 45 mA max.
Open plug
Physical insulation
Supported indicators
Yes
Module, Network
MAC ID setting
Default MAC ID
DIP switch
0
Baud rate setting
Supported baud rates
DIP switch
125 kbps, 250 kbps, and 500 kbps
Predefined Master/Slave connection set
Dynamic connection support (UCMM)
Group 2 only server
No
Explicit message fragmentation support
Yes
Object Mounting
Identity Object (0x01)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Attribute
1 Vendor
2 Product type
Yes
Yes
No
No
47
12
3 Product code
4 Revision
Yes
Yes
No
No
51
1.3
5 Status (bits supported)
6 Serial number
Yes
Yes
No
No
Bit 0 only
Unique for each Unit
7 Product name
8 State
Yes
No
No
No
C200HW-DRT21
---
Item
Object instance
ID content
Item
Object instance
DeviceNet service
Service
05Reset
0EGet_Attribute_Single
Message Router Object (0x02)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Object instance
Service
Attribute
Not supported
Not supported
Service
Header specification addition
Not supported
No
DeviceNet Object (0x03)
Object class
334
Get (read)
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Not supported
Set (write)
Value
Parameter option
No
No
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance
Attribute
Item
Object instance
Service
ID content
1 MAC ID
Get (read) Set (write)
Yes
No
---
2 Baud rate
3 BOI
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
4 Bus Off counter
5 Allocation information
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 MAC ID switch changed
7 Baud rate switch changed
No
No
No
No
-----
8 MAC ID switch value
9 Baud rate switch value
No
No
No
No
-----
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
4BAllocate_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
4CRelease_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
No
No
Value
Parameter option
Connection Object (0x05)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Max. number of active connections
Not supported
1
Item
Section
Object instance 1
Item
Object instance 1
Max. number of instances
Explicit Message
Cyclic
1
---
Transport type
Transport class
Server
3
-----
Item
Object instance 1
Information
Instance type
Production trigger
ID content
Attribute
Set
(write)
Get
(read)
1 State
2 Instance type
Yes
Yes
No
No
--0000 (hexadecimal)
3 Transport class trigger
4 Produced connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
83 (hexadecimal)
---
5 Consumed connection ID
6 Initial comm. characteristics
Yes
Yes
No
No
--21 (hexadecimal)
7 Produced connection size
8 Consumed connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
FE00 (hexadecimal)
FE00 (hexadecimal)
9 Expected packet rate
12 Watchdog time-out action
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
--0100 (hexadecimal)
13 Produced connection path length
14 Produced connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
---
15 Consumed connection path length
16 Consumed connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
---
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
Parameter option
05Reset
No
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
No
335
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 2
Section
Instance type
Polled I/O
1
Production trigger
Transport type
Cyclic
Server
-----
Transport class
2
---
Item
Object instance 2
ID content
Attribute
Max. number of instances
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
0100 (hexadecimal)
82 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
See note.
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
See note.
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
0000 (hexadecimal)
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
16 Consumed connection path
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
Item
Object instance 2
Information
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
Parameter option
05Reset
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
No
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
Note The number of bytes in the specified Read Area (Input Area) and Write Area (Output Area) is as follows:
Produced connection size:
Read Area bytes (default: 0200 (hexadecimal))
Consumed connection size:
Write Area bytes (default: 0200 (hexadecimal))
Item
Object instance 3
336
Section
Information
Max. number of instances
Instance type
Production trigger
Bit strobed I/O
Cyclic
1
---
Transport type
Transport class
Server
2
-----
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 3
ID content
Attribute
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
0100 (hexadecimal)
82 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
See note.
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0800 (hexadecimal)
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
0000 (hexadecimal)
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
16 Consumed connection path
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
Item
Object instance 3
DeviceNet service
Service
Value
Parameter option
05
Reset
No
0E
Get_Attribute_Single
No
10
Set_Attribute_Single
No
Note The number of bytes in the specified Read Area (Input Area) is as follows:
Produced connection size:
Read Area bytes (default: 0200 (hexadecimal))
PLC Object (0x2F)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Not supported
Item
Object instance 1
(CIO Area 1: IR 000 to IR 235)
See note.
Service
Object instance 2
(CIO Area 2: IR 300 to IR 511)
See note.
Service
Object instance 3
(DM Area: DM 0 to DM 6143)
See note.
Service
Object instance 4
(LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63)
See note.
Service
Object instance 5
(HR Area: HR 00 to HR 99)
See note.
Service
DeviceNet service
1C Block String Read
Parameter option
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
Logical Area Address
337
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 6
(AR Area: AR 00 to AR 27)
See note.
Service
Object instance 7
(TIM/CNT Area: TIM/CNT 000 to
TIM/CNT 511)
See note.
Service
Object instance 8
Service
(EM Area: Depends on the model)
See note.
DeviceNet service
1C Block String Read
Parameter option
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
1C Block String Read
Logical Area Address
Logical Area Address Length
1D Block String N Read
1E Block String Write
Logical Area Address Length
Logical Area Address
1F Block String N Write
Logical Area Address
Note The data areas shown in the table are for C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) PLCs. Refer to the following table for
the equivalent data areas in CS1H/G PLCs.
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
CIO Area 1 (IR 000 to IR 235)
CS1H/G
CIO Area 1 (CIO 000 to CIO 235)
CIO Area 2 (IR 300 to IR 511)
DM Area (DM 0000 to DM 6143)
CIO Area 2 (CIO 300 to CIO 511)
Data Memory Area (D0000 to D6143)
LR Area (LR 00 to LR 63)
HR Area (HR 00 to HR 99)
No equivalent
Holding Area (H000 to H099)
AR Area (AR 00 to AR 27)
TC Area (TC 00 to TC 511)
Holding Area (H100 to H127) (H101 is not allowed.)
Timer PV Area (T000 to T511)
EM Area (Depends on the model being used.)
E Area (Depends on the model being used.)
Refresh Object (0x92)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Item
Object instance 1
(current value)
ID and contents
Attribute
Item
Object instance 1
(current value)
338
64: Output refresh bytes
65: Output refresh area type
Get
(read)
Yes
Yes
Set
(write)
No
No
-----
Yes
No
---
67: Input refresh bytes
68: Input refresh area type
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
69: Input refresh address
Yes
No
--Parameter option
0EGet_Attribute_Single
01Set_Attribute_Single
ID content
Attribute
Value
66: Output refresh address
DeviceNet service
Service
Item
Object instance 2
(set value)
Not supported
Not supported
No
No
64: Output refresh bytes
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
Yes
Value
---
65: Output refresh area type
66: Output refresh address
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-----
67: Input refresh bytes
68: Input refresh area type
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-----
69: Input refresh address
Yes
Yes
---
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 2
(set value)
DeviceNet service
Service
Parameter option
0E Get_Attribute_Single
No
10 Set_Attribute_Single
No
01 Get_Attribute_All
No
02 Set_Attribute_All
No
Note The refresh areas are divided as follows:
C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
CS1H/G
CIO Area 1 (IR 000 to IR 235)
CIO Area 2 (IR 300 to IR 511)
CIO Area 1 (CIO 000 to CIO 235)
CIO Area 2 (CIO 300 to CIO 511)
DM Area (DM 0000 to DM 6143)
LR Area (LR 00 to LR 63)
Data Memory Area (D0000 to D6143)
No equivalent
HR Area (HR 00 to HR 99)
AR Area (AR 00 to AR 27)
Holding Area (H000 to H099)
Holding Area (H100 to H127) (H101 is not allowed.)
TC Area (TC 00 to TC 511)
Timer PV Area (T000 to T511)
EM or E Area (Only valid with PLC’s equipped with Extended Data Memory. Bank 0 only.)
Note Device Profile for the RS-232C Unit
General data
Compatible DeviceNet Specifications
Volume I - Release 2.0
Volume II - Release 2.0
Header name
Device type name
OMRON Corporation
Slaves:
Generic
W347
Manufacturer catalog number
Manufacturer revision
Physical conform- Network current consumption
ance data
Connector type
Communications
data
Header ID = 47
Device type number = 0
1.0
24 V DC at 50 mA max.
Physical insulation
Open plug
Yes
Supported indicators
MAC ID setting
Module, Network
DIP switch
Default MAC ID
Baud rate setting
0
DIP switch
Supported baud rates
Predefined Master/Slave connection set
125 kbps, 250 kbps, and 500 kbps
Group 2 only server
Dynamic connection support (UCMM)
Explicit message fragmentation support
Yes
Yes
Object Mounting
Identity Object (0x01)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Not supported
339
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance
Attribute
ID content
1 Vendor
Get (read) Set (write)
Yes
No
47
2 Product type
3 Product code
Yes
Yes
No
No
0
308
4 Revision
5 Status (bits supported)
Yes
Yes
No
No
1.4
---
6 Serial number
7 Product name
Yes
Yes
No
No
Unique for each Unit
DRT1-232C
8 State
No
No
---
Item
Object instance
DeviceNet service
Service
05Reset
0EGet_Attribute_Single
Value
Parameter option
No
No
Message Router Object (0x02)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Object instance
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Header specification addition
No
DeviceNet Object (0x03)
Item
Object class
Object class
ID content
Not supported
ID content
Attribute
1 MAC ID
2 Baud rate
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
3 BOI
4 Bus Off counter
Yes
Yes
No
No
00 (hexadecimal)
---
5 Allocation information
6 MAC ID switch changed
Yes
No
No
No
-----
7 Baud rate switch changed
8 MAC ID switch value
No
No
No
No
-----
9 Baud rate switch value
No
No
---
Get (read)
No
Value
Service
Item
Object instance
Service
Yes
Set (write)
1 Revision
Item
Object instance
Get (read)
Attribute
02 (hexadecimal)
Set (write)
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
4BAllocate_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
4CRelease_Master/Slave_Connection_Set
No
No
Value
Parameter option
Assembly Object (0x04)
Object class
Attribute
Not supported
Service
Not supported
Item
Object instance
Attribute
Item
Object instance
340
ID content
3 Data
Get (read) Set (write)
Yes
No
---
DeviceNet service
Service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
Value
Parameter option
No
No
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Connection Object (0x05)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Max. number of active connections
1
Item
Section
Object instance 1
Max. number of instances
Instance type
Production trigger
Explicit Message
Cyclic
1
---
Transport type
Transport class
Server
3
-----
Item
Object instance 1
Information
ID content
Attribute
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
83 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
21 (hexadecimal)
FFFF (hexadecimal)
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
FFFF (hexadecimal)
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
01 (hexadecimal)
00 (hexadecimal)
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
16 Consumed connection path
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
Item
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
Value
Parameter option
Object instance 1
Service
No
No
Item
Object instance 2
Section
Instance type
Polled I/O
1
Production trigger
Transport type
Cyclic
Server
-----
Transport class
2
---
Information
Max. number of instances
341
Appendix B
Using Another Company’s Master Unit
Item
Object instance 2
ID content
Attribute
1 State
Get
(read)
Yes
Set
(write)
No
---
2 Instance type
3 Transport class trigger
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
82 (hexadecimal)
4 Produced connection ID
5 Consumed connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
-----
6 Initial comm. characteristics
7 Produced connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
01 (hexadecimal)
0200 (hexadecimal)
8 Consumed connection size
9 Expected packet rate
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0000 (hexadecimal)
---
12 Watchdog time-out action
13 Produced connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
00 (hexadecimal)
02 (hexadecimal)
14 Produced connection path
15 Consumed connection path length
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
16 Consumed connection path
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
Yes
No
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
Item
Object instance 2
DeviceNet service
Service
Item
Item
Object instance 3
342
No
No
Information
Max. number of instances
Instance type
Production trigger
Bit strobed I/O
Cyclic
1
---
Transport type
Transport class
Server
2
-----
Item
Object instance 3
Parameter option
0EGet_Attribute_Single
10Set_Attribute_Single
Section
Object instance 3
ID content
Attribute
Service
Value
Set
(write)
Get
(read)
Value
1 State
2 Instance type
Yes
Yes
No
No
--01 (hexadecimal)
3 Transport class trigger
4 Produced connection ID
Yes
Yes
No
No
82 (hexadecimal)
---
5 Consumed connection ID
6 Initial comm. characteristics
Yes
Yes
No
No
--02 (hexadecimal)
7 Produced connection size
8 Consumed connection size
Yes
Yes
No
No
0200 (hexadecimal)
0800 (hexadecimal)
9 Expected packet rate
12 Watchdog time-out action
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
--00 (hexadecimal)
13 Produced connection path length
14 Produced connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
06 (hexadecimal)
20_04_24_01_30_03
15 Consumed connection path length
16 Consumed connection path
Yes
Yes
No
No
00 (hexadecimal)
---
17 Production inhibit time
Yes
No
00 (hexadecimal)
DeviceNet service
0EGet_Attribute_Single
No
Parameter option
10Set_Attribute_Single
No
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and
Device Current Consumptions
Slave Units
Basic I/O Slave Units
Model
DRT1-ID08
Specifications
Remote I/O Terminal
8 Transistor inputs (NPN)
Manufacturer
OMRON
DRT1-ID08-1
Remote I/O Terminal
8 Transistor inputs (PNP)
OMRON
DRT1-ID16
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (NPN)
OMRON
DRT1-ID16-1
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (PNP)
OMRON
DRT1-OD08
Remote I/O Terminal
8 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Remote I/O Terminal
8 Transistor outputs (PNP)
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (PNP)
OMRON
DRT1-OD08-1
DRT1-OD16
DRT1-OD16-1
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
DRT1-MD16
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (NPN)
DRT1-ID16T
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
OMRON
DRT1-ID16T-1
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
Remote I/O Terminal
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
OMRON
DRT1-OD16T
DRT1-OD16T-1
DRT1-MD16T
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
DRT1-MD16T-1
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block)
DRT1-ID16TA
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
16 Transistor inputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
16 Transistor inputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
DRT1-ID16TA-1
343
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Model
DRT1-OD16TA
Specifications
Manufacturer
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
16 Transistor outputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
DRT1-OD16TA-1
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
16 Transistor outputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (NPN)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
DRT1-MD16TA
DRT1-MD16TA-1
DRT1-ID32ML
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (PNP)
(3-tier I/O Terminal Block, internal power supply not required)
Remote I/O Terminal
OMRON
32 Transistor inputs (NPN) with Connectors
DRT1-ID32ML-1
Remote I/O Terminal
32 Transistor inputs (PNP) with Connectors
OMRON
DRT1-OD32ML
Remote I/O Terminal
32 Transistor outputs (NPN) with Connectors
OMRON
DRT1-OD32ML-1
Remote I/O Terminal
32 Transistor outputs (PNP) with Connectors
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs, 16 transistor outputs
(NPN) with Connectors
OMRON
DRT1-MD32ML-1
Remote I/O Terminal
16 Transistor inputs, 16 transistor outputs
(PNP) with Connectors
OMRON
DRT1-ID16X
Remote Adapter
16 Transistor inputs (NPN)
OMRON
DRT1-ID16X-1
Remote Adapter
16 Transistor inputs (PNP)
OMRON
DRT1-OD16X
Remote Adapter
16 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Remote Adapter
16 Transistor outputs (PNP)
Sensor Terminal
8 sensor inputs (NPN)
2 inputs per sensor
Sensor Terminal
8 sensor inputs (NPN)
1 input and 1 output per sensor
OMRON
DRT1-AD04
Analog Input Terminal
4 analog inputs (using 4 words) or
2 analog inputs (using 2 words) (Switchable)
OMRON
DRT1-AD04H
Analog Input Terminal
4 analog inputs (using 4 words)
OMRON
DRT1-DA02
Analog Output Terminal
2 analog outputs (using 2 words)
Temperature Input Terminal
Thermocouple thermometer input
4 temperature data inputs (using 4 words)
OMRON
DRT1-MD32ML
DRT1-OD16X-1
DRT1-HD16S
DRT1-ND16S
DRT1-TS04T
344
Appendix C
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Model
DRT1-TS04P
CQM1-DRT21
Specifications
Temperature Input Terminal
Temperature-resistance thermometer input
4 temperature data inputs (using 4 words)
I/O Link Unit suitable for CQM1-series PLC.
16 inputs and 16 outputs
Manufacturer
OMRON
OMRON
Environment-resistive Slaves
Model
Specifications
DRT1-ID08C
Environment-resistive Terminal
8 Transistor inputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
OMRON
DRT1-HD16C
Environment-resistive Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
OMRON
DRT1-HD16C-1
Environment-resistive Terminal
16 Transistor inputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP66
Environment-resistive Terminal
8 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
Environment-resistive Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
Environment-resistive Terminal
16 Transistor outputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP66
OMRON
DRT1-OD08C
DRT1-WD16C
DRT1-WD16C-1
Manufacturer
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
DRT1-MD16C
Environment-resistive Terminal
OMRON
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
DRT1-MD16C-1
Environment-resistive Terminal
8 Transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP66
Waterproof Terminal
4 Transistor inputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP67
Waterproof Terminal
4 Transistor inputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP67
Waterproof Terminal
8 Transistor inputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP67
OMRON
DRT1-ID08CL-1
Waterproof Terminal
8 Transistor inputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP67
OMRON
DRT1-OD04CL
Waterproof Terminal
4 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP67
OMRON
DRT1-OD04CL-1
Waterproof Terminal
4 Transistor outputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP67
Waterproof Terminal
8 Transistor outputs (NPN)
Conforms to IEC IP67
Waterproof Terminal
8 Transistor outputs (PNP)
Conforms to IEC IP67
B7AC Interface Unit
OMRON
DRT1-ID04CL
DRT1-ID04CL-1
DRT1-ID08CL
DRT1-OD08CL
DRT1-OD08CL-1
DRT1-B7AC
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
OMRON
345
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Special I/O Slave Units
Model
Specifications
Manufacturer
C200HW-DRT21
I/O Link Unit for C200HE, C200HG,
C200HX PLCs
(User-set allocations possible)
512 inputs max, 512 outputs max.
Read/Write Area can be user-set using
explicit DeviceNet messages
OMRON
DRT1-232C2
RS-232C Unit with 2 RS-232C ports
16 inputs (communications status)
RS-232C ports’ parameters can be set, and
data can be transmitted to and from external
devices using explicit DeviceNet messages
OMRON
Communications Cables
Model
Specifications
Manufacturer
DCA2-5C10
DCA1-5C10
Thick cable: 5 wires, 100 m
Thin cable: 5 wires, 100 m
OMRON
OMRON
DVN18-10G
DVN18-30G
Thick cable: 5 wires, 10 m
Thick cable: 5 wires, 30 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
DVN18-50G
DVN18-100G
Thick cable: 5 wires, 50 m
Thick cable: 5 wires, 100 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
DVN18-300G
DVN18-500G
Thick cable: 5 wires, 300 m
Thick cable: 5 wires, 500 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
DVN24-10G
DVN24-30G
Thin cable: 5 wires, 10 m
Thin cable: 5 wires, 30 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
DVN24-50G
DVN24-100G
Thin cable: 5 wires, 50 m
Thin cable: 5 wires, 100 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
DVN24-300G
DVN24-500G
Thin cable: 5 wires, 300 m
Thin cable: 5 wires, 500 m
Nihon Wire & Cable
Nihon Wire & Cable
1485C-P1-A50
1485C-P1-C150
Thick cable: 5 wires, 50 m
Thin cable: 5 wires, 150 m
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
[email protected]
Cable with round shielded connectors on
both ends (one socket and one plug)
OMRON
[email protected]
Cable with round shielded connector
(female socket) on one end
Cable with round shielded connector
(male plug) on one end
OMRON
[email protected]
OMRON
Note 1. The cables made by Nihon Wire & Cable Company Ltd. are sold through the OMRON 24 Service Co.,
Ltd. The product specifications are identical to the OMRON cable specifications.
2. The cables made by Allen-Bradley are stiffer than the cables made by OMRON and Nihon Wire &
Cable Company Ltd., so do not bend the Allen-Bradley cables as much as the others
346
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Connectors
Model
Specifications
Manufacturer
MSTB2.5/5-ST-5.08AU
For node connection
Phoenix Contact
Without connector set screws
GmbH & Co.
(Included with the [email protected](-1), [email protected](-1), [email protected](-1), [email protected](1), DRT1-AD04(H), DRT1-DA02, and [email protected])
XW4B-05C1-H1-D
For T-branch Tap and node connection
With connector set screws
(Included with the [email protected](-1),
[email protected](-1), CVM1-DRM21-V1,
C200HW-DRM21-V1, CQM1-DRT21, and
DCN1)
For node connection (Multi-drop wiring)
Without connector set screws
OMRON
For node connection (Multi-drop wiring)
With connector set screws
OMRON
XW4B-05C4-T-D
XW4B-05C4-TF-D
OMRON
Crimp Terminals for Communications Cables
Model
Crimper
Remarks
Manufacturer
TC series:
TME TC-0.5 (for thin cable)
TME TC-2-11 (power supply
wire for thick cable)
TME TC-1.25-11 (communications wire for thick cable)
NH-32
For single wire
insertion
Nichifu Co., Ltd.
(See note.)
AI series:
AI-0.5-8WH-B (product number 3201369)
AI series:
AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH (product
number 3200933)
ZA3
For single wire
insertion
Phoenix Contact
GmbH & Co.
UD6 (product number For two-wire
1204436)
insertion
(Multi-drop use)
Note The solderless (crimp) terminals made by Nichifu Co., Ltd. are sold through the OMRON 24 Service Co.,
Ltd. Contact the Nichifu Co., Ltd. directly for details on their products.
Specialty Screwdrivers for Connectors
Model
XW4Z-00C
SZF-1
Specifications
Manufacturer
Special screwdriver for DeviceNet connectors
Special screwdriver for DeviceNet connectors
OMRON
OMRON Tsufo
Service
Model
DRS1-T
Specifications
Terminal-block Terminating Resistor, 121 Ω
Manufacturer
OMRON
DRS2-1
DRS2-2
Shielded Terminating Resistor (male plug)
Shielded Terminating Resistor (female socket)
Terminating Resistors
Note Also can be used as Terminating Resistor with T-branch Tap.
347
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Appendix C
T-branch Taps
Model
Specifications
Manufacturer
DCN1-1C
3 connectors provided (When used on trunk line, 1
drop line can be connected.)
Terminating Resistor can be connected.
OMRON
DCN1-3C
5 connectors provided (When used on trunk line, 3
drop lines can be connected.)
Terminating Resistor can be connected.
OMRON
T-branch Connector
Model
DCN2-1
Specifications
Shielded T-branch Connector (1 branch)
Manufacturer
OMRON
Power Supply Sharing Taps
Model
1485T-P2T5-T5
Specifications
Manufacturer
Required when connecting more than one power
Allen-Bradley
supply.
Countercurrent flow prevention, ground terminal provided
DCN1-1P
One-branch tap for power supply. Use this tap when
connecting a communications power supply.
Two connectors and two fuses are standard.
OMRON
Note The Power Supply Sharing Taps are sold through the OMRON 24 Service Co., Ltd.
Connectors for I/O Cable Connections to Sensor Terminals
Model
XS8A-0441
Specifications
Connector marking: XS8-1
Applicable cable wire size: 0.3 to 0.5 mm2
Manufacturer
OMRON
XS8A-0442
Connector marking: XS8-2
Applicable cable wire size: 0.14 to 0.2 mm2
OMRON
Connectors for Environment-resistive Slaves
[email protected]@@C (-1): I/O Connectors
Model
[email protected]@
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@@
348
Description
Connector male plug assembly
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
Cable with connector on one end
(Male plug on one end, cable wires on one end)
Cable with connectors at both ends
(Male plug on one end, female socket on one end)
Manufacturer
OMRON
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
[email protected]@@C (-1): External Power Supply Connectors
Model
Description
[email protected]@
Female connector socket assembly
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
[email protected]@80-A
Cable with connector on one end
(Female socket on one end, cable wires on one end)
Manufacturer
OMRON
[email protected]@@CL (-1): I/O Connectors
Model
[email protected]@
[email protected]@@[email protected]
Description
Connector male plug assembly
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
Cable with connector on one end
(Male plug on one end, cable wires on one end)
Manufacturer
OMRON
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connectors at both ends
(Male plug on one end, female socket on one end)
[email protected]@@CL (-1): External Power Supply Connectors
Model
Description
Manufacturer
[email protected]@
Female connector socket assembly
OMRON
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
[email protected]@[email protected]
Cable with connector on one end
(Female socket on one end, cable wires on one end)
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connectors at both ends
(Male plug on one end, female socket on one end)
DRT1-B7AC: I/O Connectors
Model
[email protected]@
Description
Connector male plug assembly
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
Manufacturer
OMRON
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connector on one end
(Male plug on one end, cable wires on one end)
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connectors at both ends
(Male plug on one end, female socket on one end)
DRT1-B7AC: External Power Supply Connectors
Model
[email protected]@
Description
Manufacturer
Female connector socket assembly
OMRON
(Crimp-connect or soldered)
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connector on one end
(Female socket on one end, cable wires on one end)
[email protected]@@@[email protected] Cable with connectors at both ends
(Male plug on one end, female socket on one end)
T-joint
Model
XS2R-D427-5
Description
Shielded T-joint (Use to branch a cable for an Environment-resistive Terminal’s internal power supply.)
Manufacturer
OMRON
Y-joint Plug/Socket
Model
[email protected]
With cable
XS2R-D426-1
Without cable
Description
Manufacturer
Use for Environment-resistive Ter- OMRON
minals with 16 inputs or 16 outputs.
(Branches a single connector’s signals to two connectors.)
349
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Connector Covers for Environment-resistive Slaves
Model
Description
XS2Z-12
XS2Z-15
Manufacturer
Waterproof Cover (meets 1P67 standards)
Dust Cover
OMRON
RS-232C Connectors for the RS-232C Unit
Name
Model
Description
Manufacturer
Plug
Hood
XM2D-0901 (or equivalent)
XM2S-0913 (or equivalent)
9-pin, female
9-pin, SAE screws
OMRON
Recommended
cable
UL2464 AWG28×5P
IFS-RVV-SB
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
UL listed
Fujikura
UL2464-SB 5P×AWG28
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×AWG28
UL listed
Not UL listed
Not UL listed
Hitachi
Bracket for Remote I/O Terminal with Connector
Model
SRT2-ATT02
Description
Mounting bracket B
Manufacturer
OMRON
MIL Cables for Remote I/O Terminal with Connector
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends (40-pin on One End, Two 20-pins on One End)
Model
Compatible Slaves
Compatible Terminals
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
DRT1-ID32ML
DRT1-OD32ML-1
G7TC-ID16, G7TC-IA16
G7TC-OC16-4, M7F
G79-I50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D2 (75 cm)
DRT1-ID32ML-1
G70A-ZIM16-5
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
DRT1-OD32ML
G7TC-OC08/OC16,
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16,
G70A-ZOC16-3
DRT1-OD32ML-1
G70A-ZOC16-4,
G70D-SOC16-1
G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm)
DRT1-MD32ML
Inputs: G7TC-ID16/IA16
Outputs: G7TC-OC08/
OC16,
G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16,
G70A-ZOC16-3
G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm)
DRT1-MD32ML-1
Inputs: G70A-ZIM16-5
Outputs: G70A-ZOC16-4,
G70D-SOC16-1
Manufacturer
OMRON
Cables with Connector on One End (40-pin on One End, WIres on One End)
Model
Description
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m) Loose wire gauge: 28 AWG
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m) (Wires are just cut.)
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m) Fork terminals are attached to all of the loose wires.
G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m) Fork terminal model number: 161071-M2
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
350
Manufacturer
OMRON
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Flat Cable Crimp Connector
Model
XG4M-4030-T
Description
For cable with 28 AWG wires
Manufacturer
OMRON
Loose WIre Crimp Connectors
Name
Model
Description
Manufacturer
Socket
XG5M-4032-N
XG5M-4035-N
For cable with 24 AWG wires
For cable with 28 to 26 AWG wires
Partial Cover
Hood Cover
XG5S-2001
XG5S-2002
Two are required for each connector
Cannot be used together with
DeviceNet Connectors for multi-drop
wiring.
OMRON
Current Consumption Summary
Model
Internal current consumption
Communications current
consumption
DRT1-ID08
DRT1-ID08-1
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-ID16
DRT1-ID16-1
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-OD08
DRT1-OD08-1
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-OD16
DRT1-OD16-1
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-MD16
DRT1-ID16T
50 mA max.
90 mA max.
25 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-ID16T-1
DRT1-ID16TA
90 mA max.
(See note.)
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-ID16TA-1
DRT1-OD16T
(See note.)
90 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-OD16T-1
DRT1-OD16TA
90 mA max.
(See note.)
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-OD16TA-1
DRT1-MD16T
(See note.)
90 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-MD16T-1
DRT1-MD16TA
90 mA max.
(See note.)
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-MD16TA-1
DRT1-ID32ML
(See note.)
(See note.)
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-ID32ML-1
DRT1-OD32ML
(See note.)
(See note.)
50 mA max.
90 mA max.
DRT1-OD32ML-1
DRT1-MD32ML
(See note.)
(See note.)
90 mA max.
70 mA max.
DRT1-MD32ML-1
DRT1-ID16X
(See note.)
70 mA max.
70 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-ID16X-1
DRT1-OD16X
70 mA max.
70 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-OD16X-1
DRT1-HD16S
70 mA max.
60 mA max.
30 mA max.
40 mA max.
DRT1-ND16S
DRT1-AD04
60 mA max.
80 mA max.
40 mA max.
30 mA max.
351
Appendix C
Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions
Model
Internal current consumption
DRT1-AD04H
130 mA max.
Communications current
consumption
30 mA max.
DRT1-DA02
DRT1-TS04T
140 mA max.
130 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-TS04P
CQM1-DRT21
130 mA max.
80 mA max.
(at 5 V DC, supplied from the PLC’s
Power Supply Unit)
30 mA max.
40 mA max.
CPM1A-DRT21
50 mA max.
(at 5 V DC, supplied from the PLC’s
CPU Unit.)
30 mA max.
Note The internal power supply and communications power supply are shared.
Environment-resistive Slaves
Model
Internal current consumption
Communications current
consumption
DRT1-ID04CL
DRT1-ID04CL-1
(See note.)
(See note.)
25 mA max.
25 mA max.
DRT1-ID08CL
DRT1-ID08CL-1
(See note.)
(See note.)
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-ID08C
DRT1-HD16C
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-HD16C-1
DRT1-OD04CL
50 mA max.
(See note.)
30 mA max.
35 mA max.
DRT1-OD04CL-1
DRT1-OD08CL
(See note.)
(See note.)
35 mA max.
40 mA max.
DRT1-OD08CL-1
DRT1-OD08C
(See note.)
50 mA max.
40 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-WD16C
DRT1-WD16C-1
60 mA max.
60 mA max.
30 mA max.
30 mA max.
DRT1-MD16C
DRT1-MD16C-1
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
30 mA max.
50 mA max.
DRT1-B7AC
500 mA max.
70 mA max.
Note The internal power supply and communications power supply are shared.
Special-purpose Slaves
Model
352
Internal current consumption
Communications current
consumption
C200HW-DRT21
250 mA max.
(Supplied from the Backplane)
45 mA max.
DRT1-232C2
100 mA max.
50 mA max.
Appendix D
Precautions when Connecting Two-wire DC
Sensors
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-V DC or 24-V DC input device, check that the following conditions
have been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors.
Relation between Slave with Transistor Inputs and Sensor Residual Voltage
VON ≤ VCC – VR
VCC:
I/O power supply voltage (The allowable power supply range is 20.4 to 26.4 V, and thus
20.4 V will be used to allow for the worst possible conditions.)
VON:
ON voltage for a Slave with Transistor Inputs
VR:
Sensor’s output residual voltage
ON Current for Slave with Transistor Inputs and Sensor Control Output (Load Current)
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
IOUT: Sensor control output (load current)
ION:
Slave ON current
ION = (VCC – VR – VF)/RIN
VF:
RIN:
Internal residual voltage of Slave
Input impedance of Slave
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The bleeder resistor constant
can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
2-wire
sensor
VR
R
RIN
Slave with
Transistor
Input
VCC
Relation between OFF Current of Slave with Transistor Inputs and Sensor Leakage Current
IOFF ≥ Ileak
IOFF: OFF current of Slave
Ileak: Leakage current of Slave
Connect a breeder resistor if Ileak is greater than IOFF. Use the following equation to calculate the
breeder resistance constant.
R ≤ (IOFF x RIN + VF)/(Ileak – VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
353
Glossary
Busoff
A Busoff error occurs when there is an unacceptably high error rate on the
communications bus. This error is detected when the internal error counter exceeds a specified value. (The error counter is cleared whenever the Master
Unit is started or reset.)
CAN
Controller Area Network. A communications protocol for a LAN developed for
mounting in automobiles. The DeviceNet uses CAN technology.
configurator
A device used to make system settings, read IDs, read/write parameters, read
the network configuration, etc. OMRON provides a DeviceNet Configurator for
OMRON Master Units.
consumed connection size
The size in bytes of the data received through a connection.
ODVA
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association. A non-profit vendor association responsible for spreading DeviceNet.
produced connection size
The size in bytes of the data sent through a connection.
connection
A logical communications channel created to communicate between two
nodes. Connections are established and maintained between masters and
slaves.
device profile
A description of the structure and behavior of a device giving the minimum data
configurations and operations that the device must support. Device profiles enable common device models, and are also called device models. Device profiles are being studied for sensors, valves, displays, encoders, and other
devices.
master
A node that controls the collection and distribution of data. With the DeviceNet,
the predefined master/slave connection set defines the functions provided by
all masters.
slave
A node that provides data in response to requests from masters. With the DeviceNet, the predefined master/slave connection set defines the functions provided by all slaves.
355
Index
Numerics
7-segment display
meaning, 233, 312
A
allocations
CQM1
I/O Link Unit, 173
Analog Input Terminals
averaging function, 147
components, 139
converted data, 142
converted data storage, 147
dimensions, 149
DIP switch, 139
input ranges, 142
inputs
setting number of, 146
internal circuitry, 141
open-circuit detection function, 147
rotary switch, 140
specifications, 137
wiring, 142
Analog Input Units
troubleshooting, 315
Analog Output Terminals
components, 150
converted data, 153
converted data storage, 155
dimensions, 155
DIP switch, 151
internal circuitry, 152
output ranges, 153
outputs
status after communications error, 154
rotary switch, 151
specifications, 149
terminal arrangement, 152
wiring, 153
averaging function
Analog Input Terminals, 147
C
cleaning, 318
communications, 305
cycle time, 305
communications cycle time, 305
connector pin allocation
Remote Adapter
16 output type, 119
converted data
Analog Input Terminals, 142
Analog Output Terminals, 153
converted data storage
Analog Input Terminals, 147
Analog Output Terminals, 155
CQM1 word allocation
I/O Link Units, 173
cycle time, 305
communications, 305
D-E
decimal 2-column display mode
Temperature Input Terminals, 164
dimensions
Analog Input Terminals, 149
Analog Output Terminals, 155
I/O Link Units, 174
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 256
Remote Adapter
16 input type, 116
16 output type, 121
Sensor Terminals, 128, 132
Temperature Input Terminals, 160, 169
Transistor Remote Terminals
transistor input, 45
transistor output, 197
DIP switch
Analog Input Terminals, 139
Analog Output Terminals, 151
Temperature Input Terminals, 160
errors
indicators
Slave Unit, 312
I
I/O Link Units
components, 173
CQM1 word allocation, 173
dimensions, 174
specifications, 173
I/O response times, 300
maximum
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 305
CV-series PLCs in asynchronous mode, 301
CV-series PLCs in synchronous mode, 303
minimum
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 304
CV-series PLCs in asynchronous mode, 300
CV-series PLCs in synchronous mode, 302
indicators
errors
Slave Unit, 312
Master Units
CV-series, 233
meaning, 29
input devices
Remote Adapter
16 input type, 115, 116
input ranges
Analog Input Terminals, 142
inputs
setting number of
Analog Input Terminals, 146
inspection, 318
internal circuitry
Analog Input Terminals, 141
Analog Output Terminals, 152
Sensor Terminals, 127, 130
Transistor Remote Terminals
357
Index
transistor input, 42, 46
transistor output, 54
internal circuitry power supply
Remote Adapter
16 input type, 114, 115
16 output type, 119, 120
M-P
maintenance, 318
Master Units
dimensions
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 256
indicators
CV-series, 233
N
nodes
number setting table, 321
replacement, 319
O
open-circuit detection function
Analog Input Terminals, 147
output devices
Remote Adapter
16 output type, 120, 121
output ranges
Analog Output Terminals, 153
outputs
status after communications error
Analog Output Terminals, 154
R
refresh time, 307
Remote Adapter
16 input type
components, 113
dimensions, 116
input devices, 115, 116
internal circuitry power supply, 114, 115
specifications, 112
16 output type
connector pin allocation, 119
dimensions, 121
internal circuitry power supply, 119, 120
output devices, 120, 121
rotary switch
Analog Input Terminals, 140
Analog Output Terminals, 151
Temperature Input Terminals, 161
S
Sensor Terminals
components, 126, 130
dimensions, 128, 132
internal circuitry, 127, 130
Slave Units
baud rate, 40, 62, 88, 111, 137, 158, 172, 180, 201,
216, 261
358
node number setting range, 40, 62, 87, 111, 124, 180,
201, 216, 230
specifications, 31
troubleshooting, 313
specifications
Analog Input Terminals, 137
Analog Output Terminals, 149
communications, 28
I/O Link Units, 173
Remote Adapter
16 input type, 112
Slave Units, 31
Transistor Remote Terminals
transistor input, 41
transistor output, 49, 53
system startup times, 308
T-W
Temperature Input Terminals
decimal 2-column display mode, 164
dimensions, 160, 169
DIP switch, 160
rotary switch, 161
terminal arrangement, 162
wiring, 162
terminal arrangement
Analog Output Terminals, 152
Temperature Input Terminals, 162
test, 176
Transistor Remote Terminals
transistor input
components, 42, 46
dimensions, 45
internal circuitry, 42, 46
specifications, 41
wiring, 47
transistor output
components, 50, 53
dimensions, 197
internal circuitry, 54
specifications, 49, 53
wiring, 52, 55
troubleshooting
Analog Input Units, 315
Slave Units, 313
wiring
Analog Input Terminals, 142
Analog Output Terminals, 153
Temperature Input Terminals, 162
Transistor Remote Terminals
transistor input, 47
transistor output, 52, 55
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W347-E1-06
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
1
Date
October 1998
2
3
October 2000
June 2001
Revised content
Original production
Reprinted due to error.
Major revision to add new Units: DRT1-ID16T (-1), DRT1-ID16TA (-1), DRT1OD16T (-1), DRT1-OD16TA (-1), DRT1-MD16T (-1), DRT1-MD16TA (-1), DRT1MD16, DRT1-ID32ML (-1), DRT1-OD32ML (-1), DRT1-MD32ML (-1), DRT1ID04CL (-1), DRT1-ID08CL(-1), DRT1-HD16C (-1), DRT1-OD04CL (-1), DRT1OD08CL (-1), DRT1-WD16C(-1), DRT1-MD16C-1, and DRT1-B7AC.
“CompoBus/D” deleted from manual and “DeviceNet” used instead.
Page xiv: Precautions added on terminal polarity and other wiring specifications and Environment-resistive Slaves.
Page xi: Manuals added to list.
Pages 5 and 6: Callouts and graphics reworked and tables added after.
Pages 12 to 14 and elsewhere: References to manuals simplified.
Page 14: Connector added.
Page 15: “Restrictions to Master Units....” removed.
Page 17: Most of 2-3-4 Connecting Cables moved to 4-2 Connecting Cables
with some additions.
Page 31: Section 3 Common Specifications added from pages 48 and 49 and
examples previously in this section moved to new Section 6 Special I/O Slave
Units Specifications.
Pages 31 on: General-purpose Slaves and Environment Resistive Slaves separated into two sections (with new slaves added).
Page 136: Information moved or added to this page.
Pages 136, 141, 143, 150 to 161, and 193: Information added on CS-series
PLCs.
Pages 139 and 145: Note added.
Pages 145 to 149: Many changes made.
Page 162 and 180 to 184: Additions (some pages from other sections).
Page 169: Large addition.
Pages 169 to 177: Command formats changed in places.
Page 190: Small additions.
Page 192: Change to result line of equation.
Page 193: Addition on I/O Link Unit.
Pages 196 to 202: Deleted.
Page 206: 7-2 Error History deleted.
Page 209: 7-3-1 Master Unit Troubleshooting deleted.
Page 218: Table removed.
Page 222: Title changes and pages added.
Page 222 to 240: Changes and additions made for new Slaves.
Page 240: New appendix added.
359
Revision code
04
Date
April 2002
05
October 2002
PC changed to PLC throughout manual.
Page 33: First 6 rows of body of bottom table revised.
Page 34: Row for DRT1-OD16X and DRT1-OD16X-1 combined and new row
added to end of table.
Pages 91, 92, 96, 97, 101, 102: Graphic replaced.
Page 99: Note changed under and “m+1” changed to “n” in bottom table.
Page 102: Bottom graphic altered.
Page 108: Models added to table.
Pages 176, 177, 351, and 352: Contents of table changed.
Page 263: Contents of top table changed.
Page 287: Note added to table.
06
September 2003
Page 173: Table changed to include new models.
Pages 204, 207, 210, 213: One dimension corrected from “20” to “10” in the
diagram.
Page 235: Note added regarding Read/Write Area size settings.
Page 340: “2.1” corrected to “1.4” as the value of Attribute 4 for the Object
instance of Identity Object (0x01).
360
Revised content
Page xiii: Minor addition made to warning information.
Page xv: Paragraph added to first list.
OMRON CORPORATION
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. W347-E1-06
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W347-E1-06
C200HW-DRT21/CQM1-DRT21/DRT1 Series DeviceNet Slaves
OPERATION MANUAL
No. 6182
OMRON Corporation
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
1
No. 6182
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
2
No. 6182
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
3
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement